Valve Application, Maintenance and Repair Guide

Valve Application, Maintenance and Repair Guide
(In Situ State-of-the-Art Valve Welding Repair)

(Gate, Globe, & Check Valves), Volume 2
SED
R I
A L
LICE
M AT E
WARNING:
Please read the Export Control
and License Agreement on the
back cover before removing the
Wrapping Material.
Effective December 6, 2006, this report has been made publicly available in accordance
with Section 734.3(b)(3) and published in accordance with Section 734.7 of the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations. As a result of this publication, this report is subject to only
copyright protection and does not require any license agreement from EPRI. This notice
supersedes the export control restrictions and any proprietary licensed material notices
embedded in the document prior to publication.
Technical Report
EPRI
Powering Progress
R E P O R T
S U M M A R Y
Valve Application, Maintenance,

and Repair Guide
In Situ State-of-the-Art Valve Welding Repair
INTEREST CATEGORIES
Valves
Repair Welding
Hardfacing Repair
Nuclear Valve Repair
KEYWORDS
Maintenance
Repair
Valves
Welding
Hardfacing
The Valve Application, Maintenance, and Repair Guide is a three

volume series that provides a generic overview of valve application,
selection, maintenance, and repair. Volume 2 of this series is a comprehensive guide for in situ weld repair of gate, globe, and check
valve components such as bodies, bonnets, discs, and seats. The
information in this guide, though directed toward nuclear plant personnel, will assist all power plant engineers, planners, and maintenance
personnel responsible for valve maintenance and repair. Volume 1 of
this report will contain information on valve design, application, and
sizing; while Volume 3 will provide information on welding repair of
butterfly, ball, and plug-type valves.
BACKGROUND Several EPRI-sponsored studies and surveys have concluded

that valve failures are the single largest contributor to unscheduled shutdowns
and lost plant availability. While a majority of these failures are maintenance
related and can be addressed in short order, the more time consuming problems are typically related to cracks or wear of the valve body or critical internal
components. Replacing a valve or part especially those which are large or
safety related, can take in excess of 26 weeks to obtain, if it is available at all.
Today with the major emphasis on shorter outages and downtime, utilities are
opting for innovative repair techniques which keep the valve either in-line or at
the plant site. This guide has been developed to provide utility personnel with
the information necessary to identify and evaluate the problem, select the
appropriate repair option, establish the repair criteria and procedures, and carry
out a successful repair.
OBJECTIVES
To provide general design and operating criteria for gate, globe, and check
valves.
To present wear and degradation problems that are unacceptable for plant
performance and/or safety, and provide repair options.
To provide the most current and effective welding repair techniques and
technology to successfully repair valve components in accordance with the
requirements of the governing code body.
APPROACH EPRI surveyed the industry leaders associated with valve manufacturing, maintenance, repair, and operations to gain a thorough understanding
of common valve failures, materials, manufacturing methods, and repair methods typically employed. The survey was also used to identify qualified repair
EPRI TR-105852v2s
Electric Power Research Institute
December 1996
vendors, their in situ repair capabilities, and their experience. The

Nuclear Plant Reliability Data System (NPRDS) and License Event
Report (LER) databases provided information on failures and their
causes by valve type. Plant visits were made to manufacturing and
repair centers to gather in-depth knowledge on specific component
repair techniques and how remote welding and machining technology
was utilized in these repairs. All of this data was then broken down by
valve type and component, repair options and procedures, and repair
operations (machining, welding, heat treating, and so on).
RESULTS This guide presents nuclear utilities with the background
information necessary to understand why their valve is not meeting
either internal or external leak requirements, and provides detailed
repair options and procedures to address the problem with sound
engineering practices meeting the requirements of the ASME Boiler &
Pressure Vessel Code. The guide is written in such a manner to allow
the responsible engineer to understand each step in the repair process, to write repair procedures and specifications, and to follow the
work as it is performed by in-house or contractor personnel. Experienced valve repair personnel looking for specific information should
refer to specific topical sections or appendices for detailed information.
EPRI PERSPECTIVE Since 1980, EPRI has been engaged in the
development and evaluation of welding and machining equipment and
practices related to in situ valve repair. An extensive effort has been
made by valve repair service vendors and equipment manufacturers to
specifically address the repair of main steam isolation valve seats and
guide ribs. An equal effort has been made to develop hardfacing
materials welding techniques for in situ application. This document
draws on the results of these efforts and presents alternative repair
solutions which are known to, or practiced by few. The repair methods
presented in this guide have provided considerable cost savings and
plant availability to those utilities which have chosen to look forward.
PROJECT
Work Order 3887 and 3814
EPRI Project Managers:
Michael K. Phillips, Repair and Replacement Applications Center
Vic Varma, Nuclear Maintenance Applications Center
Nuclear Power Group
For ordering information about this report, call the Nuclear
Maintenance Applications Center, 800/356-7448.
For membership information, call 415/855-2514.
Valve Application,Maintenance,and Repair Guide

In Situ State-of-the-Art Valve Welding Repair
TR-105852v2
Final Report
December 1996
Prepared by
EPRI Repair & Replacement Applications Center (RRAC)
Principal Investigators
Michael K. Phillips
Shane J. Findlan
Contributing Author
William F. Newell, Jr.
W. F. Newell & Associates
Prepared for
Nuclear Maintenance Applications Center
Repair & Replacement Applications Program
1300 W.T. Harris Boulevard, Charlotte, NC 28262
(P.O. Box 217097, Charlotte, NC 28221)
Operated by
3412 Hillview Avenue, Palo Alto, CA 94304
(P.O. Box 10412, Palo Alto, CA 94303)
EPRI Project Managers

Vic Varma
Michael K. Phillips
Nuclear Power Group
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITIES

THIS REPORT WAS PREPARED BY THE ORGANIZATION(S) NAMED BELOW AS AN ACCOUNT OF WORK
SPONSORED OR COSPONSORED BY THE ELECTRIC POWER RESEARCH INSTITUTE, INC. (EPRI). NEITHER
EPRI, ANY MEMBER OF EPRI, ANY COSPONSOR, THE ORGANIZATION(S) BELOW, NOR ANY PERSON ACTING
ON BEHALF OF ANY OF THEM:
A) MAKES ANY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION WHATSOEVER, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, (I) WITH RESPECT
TO THE USE OF ANY INFORMATION, APPARATUS, METHOD, PROCESS, OR SIMILAR ITEM DISCLOSED IN THIS
REPORT, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR (II) THAT SUCH
USE DOES NOT INFRINGE ON OR INTERFERE WITH PRIVATELY OWNED RIGHTS, INCLUDING ANY PARTYS
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY, OR (III) THAT THIS REPORT IS SUITABLE TO ANY PARTICULAR USERS
CIRCUMSTANCE; OR
(B) ASSUMES RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF EPRI OR ANY EPRI REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES) RESULTING FROM YOUR SELECTION OR USE OF THIS REPORT OR ANY
INFORMATION, APPARATUS, METHOD, PROCESS, OR SIMILAR ITEM DISCLOSED IN THIS REPORT.
ORDERING INFORMATION
PRICE: $35,000
Requests for copies of this report should be directed to the Repair & Replacement Applications Center or
the Nuclear Maintenance Applications Center (NMAC), 1300 W.T. Harris Boulevard, Charlotte, NC 28262,
800/356-7448. There is no charge for reports requested by RRAP and NMAC member utilities.
Electric Power Research Institute and EPRI are registered service marks of Electric Power Research Institute, Inc.
Copyright 1996 Electric Power Research Institute, Inc. All rights reserved.
EPRI Licensed Material

Valve Application, Maintenance, and Repair Guide: In Situ State-of-the-Art Valve Welding Repair
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Volume 2 of the EPRI RRAC/NMAC Maintenance and Repair Guide, In-Situ State-of-the-Art
Valve Welding Repair has been developed with the support of numerous organizations and
individuals dedicated to the advancement of new repair technology and methods. The
authors want to thank the steering committee members of the Repair and Replacement
Applications Program and the Nuclear Maintenance Applications Center for their vision
to recognize the problems associated with valve repair and support this much needed
guide. We want to especially recognize the following utility personnel, valve manufacturers, and repair service vendors who made a contribution by way of technical input, repair
experience, or advice that supported the development of this product:
Pedro Amador
Rafiq Bandukwala
Pat Brennan
James Cobb
Bill Fingrudt
Bill Knect
Ray Luda
Garland Mahan
John Polacheck
Tim Satterfield
Al Silvia
Terry Weigel
Welding Services, Incorporated

Edward Valves, Incorporated
VR-TESCO, Incorporated
GE Nuclear Services, Incorporated
Anchor Darling Valve Company
Entergy/River Bend
PCI Energy Services
Northeast Utilities
Climax Portable Machine Tools, Incorporated
Our thanks also goes to the following companies who hosted on-site visits and provided detailed information on their valves and repair practices:
VR-TESCO, Incorporated
Entergy/Grand Gulf
Finally, we would like to extend a word of special thanks to those who reviewed the
final draft:
Greg Hartraft
John Aikin
Bill Pratt
Bill Knect
Richard Smith
John Hosler
GPU Nuclear
AECL
TVA
Altran
EPRI
iii

Let it be known that the various alloys or hardfacing materials referred to throughout
the document have trademarked names. The following is a list of trademarked alloys or
hardfacing:
Colmonoy
Delchrome
Deloro
Hastelloy
Incoloy
Inconel
Monel
NOREM
Nucalloy
Stellite
Tristelle
iv
Wall Colmonoy Incorporated

Deloro Stellite Limited
Stoody Deloro Stellite Incorporated
Haynes International Incorporated
Inco Alloys International Incorporated
EPRI

CONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
PROJECT DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1
Introduction and Application ............................................................................................. 1-1
1.2
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 1-3
CODES AND STANDARDS ............................................................................................................ 2-1

2.1
General ................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2
Pressure/Temperature Ratings ..........................................................................................

2.2.1 General ....................................................................................................................
2.2.2 Special Class Valves (Weld-End Valve) ...................................................................
2.2.3 Intermediate Rating Valves (Weld-End and Threaded Valves) ................................
2.3
General Discussion of Pressure Boundary Materials ..................................................... 2-7
2.4
Required Minimum Wall and Corrosion Allowance ......................................................... 2-9
2-4
2-4
2-6
2-7
GENERAL VALVE DESIGN ............................................................................................................ 3-1

3.1
Nomenclature/Glossary of Terms ...................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Glossary of Terms .................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2
Common Valve Construction Features ...........................................................................

3.2.1 Body-to-Bonnet Connections .................................................................................
3.2.2 Seat and Seat Rings ..............................................................................................
3.2.3 Disc-to-Stem Connection .......................................................................................
3.2.4 Disc/Stem Guide Arrangements ............................................................................
3-10
3-10
3-14
3-23
3-26
VALVE MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 4-1

4.1
Trim Components and Materials ....................................................................................... 4-1
4.2
Material Selection Practices ..............................................................................................

4.2.1 Design Practices to Minimize Corrosion ..................................................................
4.2.2 Design Practices to Minimize Erosion .....................................................................
4.2.3 Design Practices to Minimize Wear and Galling ......................................................
4.3
Hardfacing ........................................................................................................................... 4-9

4.3.1 Cobalt-Base Alloys (Stellites) ............................................................................... 4-9
4.3.2 Cobalt-Free Alloys ................................................................................................. 4-10
4.4
Resilient (Soft) Seating .................................................................................................... 4-11
4.5
Pressure-Retaining Materials .......................................................................................... 4-14
4-3
4-3
4-6
4-8

5.0
6.0
7.0
vi
GATE VALVES ................................................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1
5.2
Design .................................................................................................................................. 5-1

5.2.1 General .................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Solid-Wedge Gate ................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.3 Split-Wedge Gate .................................................................................................... 5-5
5.2.4 Flexible-Wedge Gate ............................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.5 Double-Disc Gate .................................................................................................... 5-9
5.2.6 Parallel-Slide Gate ................................................................................................. 5-12
5.2.7 Slab Gate ............................................................................................................... 5-15
5.2.8 Knife Gate .............................................................................................................. 5-17
5.3
Repair Issues ....................................................................................................................

5.3.1 Leakage Past the In-Body Seat .............................................................................
5.3.2 Leakage Past the Pressure Seal Ring ...................................................................
5.3.3 Valve Stem Leaks ..................................................................................................
5.3.4 Valve Body Damage ..............................................................................................
5.3.5 Valve Bonnet Leaks ...............................................................................................
5.3.6 Wedge Guides .......................................................................................................
5-19
5-19
5-24
5-26
5-28
5-31
5-33
GLOBE VALVES ............................................................................................................................. 6-1

6.1
6.2
Design ..................................................................................................................................
6.2.1 General ....................................................................................................................
6.2.2 Horizontal Globe ......................................................................................................
6.2.3 Y-Globe ....................................................................................................................
6.2.4 Angle Globe .............................................................................................................
6.2.5 Y-Angle Globe ..........................................................................................................
6.2.6 Control Valves ..........................................................................................................
6.3
Repair Issues ....................................................................................................................

6.3.1 Leakage Past the In-Body Seats ...........................................................................
6.3.3 Valve Stem Leaks ..................................................................................................
6.3.6 Poppet (Disc) Guide Ribs ......................................................................................
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-11
6-11
6-14
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-16
CHECK VALVES ............................................................................................................................. 7-1

7.1
7.2
Design ..................................................................................................................................
7.2.1 General ....................................................................................................................
7.2.2 Swing Check ............................................................................................................
7.2.3 Lift Check .................................................................................................................
7.2.4 Tilting Disc ...............................................................................................................
7.3
Repair Issues ....................................................................................................................

7.3.1 Leakage Past the In-Body Seats ...........................................................................
7.3.3 Valve Stem Leaks ..................................................................................................
7.3.6 Poppet (Disc) Guide Ribs ......................................................................................
7.3.7 Leakage Past the Hinge Pin Cover ........................................................................
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-5
7-8
7-10
7-10
7-13
7-14
7-14
7-14
7-14
7-15

8.0
VALVE COMPONENT REPAIRS .................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1
Valve Body Repair ..............................................................................................................

8.1.1 Repair Strategy ........................................................................................................
8.1.2 Repair Prerequisites ................................................................................................
8.1.3 Flaw Removal ..........................................................................................................
8.1.4 Filler Material Selection ...........................................................................................
8.1.5 Preheat and Post-Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) Requirements .............................
8.1.6 Welding Repair ........................................................................................................
8.1.7 Final Machining ........................................................................................................
8.1.8 Inspection ................................................................................................................
8.1.9 Testing .....................................................................................................................
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-7
8-8
8.2
Pressure Seal Area Repair ................................................................................................. 8-8

8.2.1 Repair Strategy ........................................................................................................ 8-9
8.2.2 Repair Prerequisites .............................................................................................. 8-10
8.2.3 Flaw Removal ........................................................................................................ 8-11
8.2.4 Filler Material Selection ......................................................................................... 8-12
8.2.5 Preheat and Post-Weld Heat Treatment Requirements ......................................... 8-12
8.2.6 Welding Repair ...................................................................................................... 8-13
8.2.7 Final Machining ...................................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.8 Inspection .............................................................................................................. 8-14
8.2.9 Testing ................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.3
Seat Ring Repair ...............................................................................................................

8.3.1 Repair Assessment and Strategy ..........................................................................
8.3.2 Repair Prerequisites ..............................................................................................
8.3.3 Defect Removal .....................................................................................................
8.3.4 Filler Material Selection .........................................................................................
8.3.5 Preheat and Post-Weld Heat Treatment Requirements .........................................
8.3.6 Repair Welding ......................................................................................................
8.3.7 Final Machining ......................................................................................................
8.3.8 Inspection ..............................................................................................................
8.3.9 Testing ...................................................................................................................
8-14
8-16
8-16
8-27
8-28
8-29
8-29
8-32
8-34
8-34
8.4
Seat Ring Replacement ....................................................................................................

8.4.3 Seat Ring Removal ................................................................................................
8.4.6 Seat Ring Installation and Welding ........................................................................
8.4.7 Machining ..............................................................................................................
8.4.8 Inspection ..............................................................................................................
8.4.9 Testing ...................................................................................................................
8-35
8-39
8-40
8-42
8-45
8-45
8-45
8-50
8-52
8-52
8.5
Integral Seat Repair ..........................................................................................................

8.5.3 Defect Removal .....................................................................................................
8.5.6 Repair Welding ......................................................................................................
8.5.7 Machining ..............................................................................................................
8.5.8 Inspection ..............................................................................................................
8.5.9 Testing ...................................................................................................................
8-52
8-53
8-54
8-55
8-55
8-55
8-56
8-57
8-59
8-59
vii

viii
8.6
Integral Seat Replacement ...............................................................................................

8.6.2 Seat Hardfacing Replacement Prerequisites .........................................................
8.6.3 Seat Removal and Weld Preparation .....................................................................
8.6.6 Welding Repair ......................................................................................................
8.6.7 Machining ..............................................................................................................
8.6.8 Inspection ..............................................................................................................
8.6.9 Testing ...................................................................................................................
8-59
8-60
8-61
8-61
8-63
8-64
8-64
8-65
8-66
8-67
8.7
Bonnet Backseat Repair and Replacement ....................................................................

8.7.1 Repair Strategy ......................................................................................................
8.7.3 Flaw Removal ........................................................................................................
8.7.6 Welding Repair ......................................................................................................
8.7.7 Final Machining ......................................................................................................
8.7.8 Inspection ..............................................................................................................
8.7.9 Testing ...................................................................................................................
8-67
8-67
8-68
8-69
8-71
8-71
8-72
8-72
8-74
8-75
8.8
Guide Repair and Replacement.......................................................................................

8.8.1 Repair Strategy ......................................................................................................
8.8.3 Flaw Removal ........................................................................................................
8.8.6 Welding Repair ......................................................................................................
8.8.7 Final Machining ......................................................................................................
8.8.8 Inspection ..............................................................................................................
8.8.9 Testing ...................................................................................................................
8-75
8-76
8-77
8-78
8-79
8-79
8-79
8-80
8-80
8-80
8.9
Guide Rib Repair ...............................................................................................................

8.9.1 Repair Strategy ......................................................................................................
8.9.3 Flaw Removal ........................................................................................................
8.9.6 Welding Repair ......................................................................................................
8.9.7 Final Machining ......................................................................................................
8.9.8 Inspection ..............................................................................................................
8.9.9 Testing ...................................................................................................................
8-81
8-82
8-83
8-83
8-84
8-84
8-85
8-88
8-88
8-88
8.10
Hinge Pin Repair ............................................................................................................... 8-88

8.10.1 Repair Strategy ...................................................................................................... 8-95
8.10.2 Repair Prerequisites .............................................................................................. 8-97
8.10.3 Flaw Removal ........................................................................................................ 8-97
8.10.4 Filler Material Selection ......................................................................................... 8-98
8.10.5 Preheat and Post-Weld Heat Treatment Requirements ......................................... 8-98
8.10.6 Welding Repair ...................................................................................................... 8-99
8.10.7 Final Machining ...................................................................................................... 8-99
8.10.8 Inspection ............................................................................................................ 8-100
8.10.9 Testing ................................................................................................................. 8-100

9.0
8.11
Wedge/Disc Repair (Gate, Swing Check, and TDC) .....................................................

8.11.1 Repair Strategy ....................................................................................................
8.11.2 Repair Prerequisites ............................................................................................
8.11.3 Flaw Removal ......................................................................................................
8.11.4 Filler Material Selection .......................................................................................
8.11.5 Preheat and Post-Weld Heat Treatment Requirements .......................................
8.11.6 Welding Repair ....................................................................................................
8.11.7 Final Machining ....................................................................................................
8.11.8 Inspection ............................................................................................................
8.11.9 Testing .................................................................................................................
8-100
8-102
8-103
8-105
8-107
8-107
8-108
8-110
8-112
8-113
8.12
Poppet Hardfacing Repair ..............................................................................................

8.12.1 Repair Strategy ....................................................................................................
8.12.2 Repair Prerequisites ............................................................................................
8.12.3 Flaw Removal ......................................................................................................
8.12.4 Filler Material Selection .......................................................................................
8.12.5 Preheat and Post-Weld Heat Treatment Requirements .......................................
8.12.6 Welding Repair ....................................................................................................
8.12.7 Final Machining ....................................................................................................
8.12.8 Inspection ............................................................................................................
8.12.9 Testing .................................................................................................................
8-113
8-114
8-115
8-116
8-117
8-117
8-117
8-118
8-119
8-120
8.13
Valve Stem Repair ........................................................................................................... 8-120
DEFECT REMOVAL ........................................................................................................................ 9-1

9.1
Grinding ............................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.2
Machining ............................................................................................................................ 9-6
9.3
Lapping ................................................................................................................................ 9-8
9.4
Honing ............................................................................................................................... 9-10
10.0 WELDING PROCESS SELECTION ............................................................................................. 10-1

10.1
Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW) ................................................................................. 10-2
10.2
Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) ...................................................................................... 10-3
10.3
GMAW-P ............................................................................................................................. 10-4
10.4
FCAW ................................................................................................................................. 10-4
10.5
Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) .............................................................................. 10-5
10.6
Machine Welding ............................................................................................................... 10-6
10.7
GTAW-P-AU ........................................................................................................................ 10-6
10.8
Efficiency/Cost Comparisons .......................................................................................... 10-6
11.0 WELDING FILLER MATERIAL ..................................................................................................... 11-1

11.1
Types of Filler Metals ....................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2
Filler Metal Requirements ................................................................................................ 11-2
11.3
Filler Metal Selection ........................................................................................................ 11-4

11.3.1 A-Numbers ............................................................................................................. 11-8
11.3.2 F-Numbers ............................................................................................................. 11-9
ix

11.4
Storage of Welding Filler Materials ............................................................................... 11-11
11.5
Handling of Welding Filler Materials ............................................................................. 11-11
11.6
Dissimilar Weldments ..................................................................................................... 11-12
11.7
Filler Metals for Hardfacing Applications ..................................................................... 11-15
11.8
Typical Weld Filler Metal Specifications ....................................................................... 11-15
12.0 SHIELDING AND PURGING GASES ........................................................................................... 12-1

12.1
Purging .............................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.2
Shielding............................................................................................................................ 12-2
13.0 PREHEAT/POST-WELD HEAT TREATMENT REQUIREMENTS ................................................. 13-1

13.1
Preheat............................................................................................................................... 13-3
13.2
Interpass Temperature ..................................................................................................... 13-4
13.3
Post-Weld Heat Treatment ................................................................................................ 13-5
13.4
Guide to Selection of Heating Methods ..........................................................................

13.4.1 Gas Torch Heating .................................................................................................
13.4.2 Electrical Resistance Heating ................................................................................
13.4.3 Furnace Heating ....................................................................................................
13.4.4 Induction Heating ...................................................................................................
13.5
Guide for Selection of Preheat and PWHT ..................................................................... 13-7
13.6
Preheat and PWHT Procedures ....................................................................................... 13-8

13.6.1 General .................................................................................................................. 13-8
13.6.2 Temperature Measurement .................................................................................... 13-8
13.6.3 Thermocouples ...................................................................................................... 13-9
13.6.4 Minimum Controlled Band Width ......................................................................... 13-14
13.6.5 Heat Treatment Records ...................................................................................... 13-14
13.7
Preheat and Post-Weld Heat Treatment ConsiderationsHardfacing ....................... 13-16

13.7.1 Preheat ................................................................................................................ 13-16
13.7.2 Post-Weld Heat TreatmentHardfacing .............................................................. 13-16
13.8
Contracted PWHT ........................................................................................................... 13-16
13-7
13-7
13-7
13-7
13-7
14.0 WELDING METHODS AND PROCEDURES ............................................................................... 14-1
14.1
Manual Base Metal Welding Procedure Guidelines ....................................................... 14-1

14.1.1 Manual SMAW ....................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.2 Manual GTAW ........................................................................................................ 14-2
14.2
Machine Base Metal Welding Procedure Guidelines ..................................................... 14-2

14.2.1 Machine GTAW ...................................................................................................... 14-2
14.3
Hardfacing Welding Procedure Guidelines ....................................................................

14.3.1 General RequirementsHardfacing ......................................................................
14.3.2 Suggested Welding Practices ................................................................................
14.3.3 Manual GTAW ........................................................................................................
14.3.4 Localized Hardfacing Repair Practices ..................................................................
14-3
14-3
14-5
14-5
14-6

14.4
Machine Hardfacing Welding Procedure Guidelines ..................................................... 14-8

14.4.1 Machine GTAW ...................................................................................................... 14-8
14.4.2 Machine PTAW ...................................................................................................... 14-9
14.5
Temperbead Welding Repair Guidelines ........................................................................ 14-9

14.5.1 Temperbead Qualification and Demonstration ....................................................... 14-9
14.5.2 Implementation .................................................................................................... 14-13
15.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING METHODS .................................................................................... 15-1

15.1
Nondestructive Examination ........................................................................................... 15-1
15.2
Post-Repair Testing .......................................................................................................... 15-3

15.2.1 Exercise Test .......................................................................................................... 15-3
15.3
Blue Check ........................................................................................................................ 15-4
APPENDIX A: GATE VALVE WEDGE FITTING TECHNIQUES ............................................................. A-1

APPENDIX B: IN SITU WELDING EQUIPMENT ................................................................................... B-1
APPENDIX C: IN SITU VALVE MACHINING EQUIPMENT ................................................................... C-1
APPENDIX D: VALVE MANUFACTURERS ........................................................................................... D-1
APPENDIX E: IN SITU VALVE REPAIR VENDORS .............................................................................. E-1
APPENDIX F: REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL BIBLIOGRAPHY ................................................... F-1
Additional Bibliography ................................................................................................................ F-6
APPENDIX G: ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................ G-1
xi

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure No.
Page No.
Section 3 ____________________________________________________________________________
3-1
Globe ValveTypical Valve Nomenclature .................................................................................. 3-2
3-2
Gate ValveTypical Valve Nomenclature ................................................................................... 3-3
3-3
Screwed Bonnet ........................................................................................................................ 3-11
3-4
Flanged (Bolted) Bonnet ........................................................................................................... 3-12
3-5
Welded Bonnet .......................................................................................................................... 3-12
3-6
Pressure-Sealed Bonnet ........................................................................................................... 3-13
3-7
Seat Joint Mating Surfaces ....................................................................................................... 3-14
3-8
Seat Plane Distortion under Vertical and Horizontal Bending Moments ................................... 3-15
3-9
Typical Globe Valve Seating Configurations .............................................................................. 3-17
3-10
Cross Ring Indentation .............................................................................................................. 3-18
3-11
Soft Seat Retention Methods .................................................................................................... 3-19
3-12
Methods for Attaching Seat to Body .......................................................................................... 3-21
3-13
Flexible Seat .............................................................................................................................. 3-22
3-14
Floating Seat ............................................................................................................................. 3-22
3-15
Spring-Loaded Packing Seals ................................................................................................... 3-23
3-16
Stem Connections ..................................................................................................................... 3-24
3-17
Gate Valve Gate Guide.............................................................................................................. 3-27
Section 4 ____________________________________________________________________________
4-1
Double-Seated Globe Valve Trim Components ........................................................................... 4-2
4-2
Balanced Disc Cage-Style Valve ................................................................................................. 4-2
xiii

Figure No.
Page No.
Section 5 ____________________________________________________________________________
5-1
Inside Screw Stem Thread Configurations .................................................................................. 5-2
5-2
Rising Stem Design, Outside Screw ........................................................................................... 5-2
5-3
Solid-Wedge Gate Valve ............................................................................................................. 5-4
5-4
Split-Wedge Gate Valve .............................................................................................................. 5-6
5-5
Flex-Wedge Gate Valve ............................................................................................................... 5-8
5-6
Double-Disc Gate Valve ............................................................................................................ 5-10
5-7
Through-Conduit, Double-Disc Gate Valve ............................................................................... 5-11
5-8
Parallel-Slide Gate Valve ........................................................................................................... 5-13
5-9
Through-Conduit, Parallel-Slide Gate Valve .............................................................................. 5-15
5-10
Slab Gate Valve ......................................................................................................................... 5-16
5-11
Knife-Gate Valve ........................................................................................................................ 5-18
5-12
Welded-In Gate Valve Seat Ring ............................................................................................... 5-20
5-13
Gate Valve Wedge Seating Too Low in Seats ........................................................................... 5-21
5-14
Split-Wedge Gate with Spacer Ring .......................................................................................... 5-22
5-15
Typical Pressure Seal Bonnet Configuration ............................................................................. 5-24
5-16
Pressure Seal Bonnet ............................................................................................................... 5-26
5-17
Typical Valve Stem/Bonnet Backseat ........................................................................................ 5-27
5-18
Typical Gate Valve Body ............................................................................................................ 5-29
5-19
Typical Bolted Bonnet Components .......................................................................................... 5-31
5-20
Single Guide Design for Gate Valves ........................................................................................ 5-34
5-21
Parallel Guide Design for Gate Valves ...................................................................................... 5-35
xiv

Figure No.
Page No.
Section 6 ____________________________________________________________________________
6-1
Plug-Type Disc ............................................................................................................................ 6-2
6-2
Cage-Type Disc ........................................................................................................................... 6-3
6-3
Horizontal Globe Valve ................................................................................................................ 6-4
6-4
Y-Globe Valve .............................................................................................................................. 6-5
6-5
Angle Globe Valve ....................................................................................................................... 6-6
6-6
Y-Angle Globe Valve .................................................................................................................... 6-7
6-7
Single-Port Control Valve ............................................................................................................ 6-8
6-8
Double-Port Control Valve ......................................................................................................... 6-10
6-9
Three-Way Valve ....................................................................................................................... 6-11
6-10
Disc Seating Too Low in Seat .................................................................................................... 6-13
6-11
Valve Body ................................................................................................................................ 6-15
Section 7 ____________________________________________________________________________
7-1
Swing Check Valve ...................................................................................................................... 7-3
7-2
Lift Check Valve, T-Pattern ........................................................................................................... 7-5
7-3
Lift Check Valve, Y-Pattern........................................................................................................... 7-6
7-4
Lift Check Valve, Angle Configuration ......................................................................................... 7-6
7-5
Disc-Type Lift Check Valve .......................................................................................................... 7-7
7-6
Piston-Type Lift Check Valve ....................................................................................................... 7-7
7-7
Tilting Disc Check Valve .............................................................................................................. 7-9
7-8
Disc Seating Too Low in Seats .................................................................................................. 7-12
7-9
Swing Check and Tilting Disc Check Valve, Standard Compression

Flange and Gasket Joints ......................................................................................................... 7-16
7-10
Swing Check and Tilting Disc Check Valve, Pressure Seal Joints ............................................ 7-17
xv

Figure No.
Page No.
Section 8 ____________________________________________________________________________
8-1a
Typical Body Repair Locations .................................................................................................... 8-1
8-1b
Recommended First Layer Weld Repair Bead Placement for

Valve Body Base Material Repairs .............................................................................................. 8-6
8-1c
Recommended Second Layer Weld Repair Bead Placement for

8-1d
Recommended Cavity Fill Weld Repair Bead Placement for

8-2a
Pressure Seal Repair Location ................................................................................................... 8-9
8-2b
Example of Pressure Seal Area Boring ..................................................................................... 8-12
8-3a
Seat Ring Configuration ............................................................................................................ 8-15
8-3b
Blue Check for Seating Location ............................................................................................... 8-17
8-3c
Typical Wedge Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 8-18
8-3d
Gate Valve Seat Measurements ................................................................................................ 8-19
8-3e
Reference Dimensions for Gate/Check Valve Seat Width ......................................................... 8-20
8-3f
Reference Points on the Seat Ring of Swing Check Valve ........................................................ 8-21
8-3g
Seating Location on Tilting Disc ................................................................................................ 8-22
8-3h
Reference Mark Locations on Tilting Disc ................................................................................. 8-23
8-3i
Seat Location on Poppet ........................................................................................................... 8-24
8-3j
Typical Body Dimensions, Globe Valve ..................................................................................... 8-25
8-3k
Typical Body Dimensions, Y-Type Globe and Lift Check Valve .................................................. 8-26
8-3l
Gate Valve Seat Machining ....................................................................................................... 8-27
8-3m
Globe Valve Seat Machining ..................................................................................................... 8-28
8-3n
Gate Valve Hardfacing Application, Machine GTAW ................................................................. 8-30
8-3o
Globe Valve Hardfacing Application, Machine GTAW ............................................................... 8-31
8-3p
Globe Valve Seat Final Machining ............................................................................................ 8-33
8-3q
Typical Globe Valve Seat Angle Differential .............................................................................. 8-34
8-4a
Typical Gate Valve Seat Ring Seal Weld ................................................................................... 8-35
xvi

Figure No.
Page No.
Section 8 ____________________________________________________________________________
8-4b
Typical Seal Weld Locations for Globe-Type Seat Rings ........................................................... 8-36
8-4c
Seat Ring Angle Generated by the Angle in the Seat Pocket ................................................... 8-37
8-4d
Example of Globe Valve with a Threaded Seat Ring ................................................................. 8-38
8-4e
Split View of Valve Body (In-Line) Exhibiting the Seal Weld Fixture .......................................... 8-43
8-4f
Valve Body Preparation for Replacement Seat Ring ................................................................. 8-44
8-4g
Typical Weld Buildup for Repair of Threaded Globe Valve Seat Ring Pocket ............................ 8-46
8-4h
Valve Boring System with Thread Attachment for Restoration

of Threads in the Seat Ring Pocket ........................................................................................... 8-47
8-4i
Example of Tapered Seat Ring .................................................................................................. 8-48
8-4j
Split View of Valve Body (In-Line) Exhibiting Seal Weld Head Setup ........................................ 8-49
8-4k
Gate Valve Seat Narrowing ....................................................................................................... 8-51
8-4l
Typical Lapping Fixture for Globe-Type Seat Ring .................................................................... 8-52
8-5a
Turbine Throttle Valve ................................................................................................................ 8-56
8-5b
Swing Check Valve Lapping Machine ....................................................................................... 8-58
8-6a
Seat Removal with Automatic Grinding System ........................................................................ 8-62
8-6b
Base Material Restoration for Seat Ring ................................................................................... 8-65
8-6c
In Situ Machining of MSIV Seat ................................................................................................ 8-66
8-7a
Typical Bonnet Backseat/Stem Configuration for Blueing ......................................................... 8-69
8-7b
Proper Stem to Backseat Seating Configuration ....................................................................... 8-73
8-7c
Lapping Bonnet Backseat to Stem ............................................................................................ 8-74
8-8a
Typical Single Guide Configuration for Gate-Type Valves ......................................................... 8-75
8-8b
Double-Guided Gate Configuration ........................................................................................... 8-76
8-9a
Globe Valve Configuration Showing Guide Rib ......................................................................... 8-81
8-9b
Y-Type MSIV .............................................................................................................................. 8-85
8-9c
Guide Rib Hardfacing Refurbishment Sequence ...................................................................... 8-87
xvii

Figure No.
Page No.
Section 8 ____________________________________________________________________________
8-10a
Swing Check and Tilting Disc Check Valves ............................................................................. 8-89
8-10b
Swing Check Valve, Pin Supported in Cast Journals ................................................................ 8-90
8-10c
Swing Check Valve, Bracket Mounted on Two Pads .................................................................. 8-91
8-10d
Swing Check Valve, Pin Supported in Bracket Attached to Bonnet .......................................... 8-91
8-10e
Hinge Pins and Covers Inserted into Disc Assembly Bushings ................................................ 8-92
8-10f
Pipe Plug Seal Cover ................................................................................................................ 8-93
8-10g
Blind Flange Cover .................................................................................................................... 8-94
8-10h
Pressure Seal Cover ................................................................................................................. 8-95
8-10i
Boring Bar with Flange Facing Capabilities............................................................................. 8-100
8-11a
Typical Wedge ......................................................................................................................... 8-101
8-11b
Removable Valve Disc/Wedges ............................................................................................... 8-101
8-11c
Seat Angle Determinations for Tilting Disc Check Valve ......................................................... 8-105
8-11d
Wedge or Disc Mounted in Fixture .......................................................................................... 8-106
8-11e
Hardfacing Refurbishment Sequence ..................................................................................... 8-109
8-11f
Lapping Table and Portable Lapping Adapter ......................................................................... 8-110
8-11g
Seat Angle Determination for Tilting Disc Check Valve ........................................................... 8-111
8-11h
Lapping Fixture for In-Body Tilting Disc Check Valve Seat and Disc ...................................... 8-112
8-12a
Poppets with Hardfaced Wear Rings ....................................................................................... 8-113
8-12b
Poppet Seat and Wear Ring Dimensions ................................................................................ 8-116
8-12c
Typical Globe Valve Seat Angle Differential ............................................................................ 8-119
Section 9 ____________________________________________________________________________
9-1
Removal of Surface Indications Where No Weld Repair Is Required .......................................... 9-2
9-2
Excavation for Defect Type Verification and Local Weld Repair .................................................. 9-4
9-3
Gate Valve Seat Machining ......................................................................................................... 9-7
9-4
Milling Machine Removing Hardfacing from Guide Ribs ............................................................. 9-8
9-5
Gate Valve Lapping Machine ...................................................................................................... 9-9
xviii

Figure No.
Page No.
Section 10 ___________________________________________________________________________
10-1
Welding Process Versus Deposition Rate at 100% Duty Cycle ................................................ 10-2
10-2
Process Diagram (GTAW) ......................................................................................................... 10-2
10-3
Circuit Diagram (GTAW) ............................................................................................................ 10-3
10-4
Process Diagram (GMAW) ........................................................................................................ 10-3
10-5
Block Diagram (GMAW) ............................................................................................................ 10-4
10-6
Shielded Metal Arc Welding Process ........................................................................................ 10-5
10-7
Circuit Diagram (SMAW) ........................................................................................................... 10-5
Section 11 ___________________________________________________________________________
11-1
Styles of Consumable Inserts ................................................................................................... 11-7
Section 12 ___________________________________________________________________________
12-1
Sample Fixtures for Purging the Inside Diameter of Pipe Weldments ....................................... 12-2
Section 13 ___________________________________________________________________________
13-1
Typical Setup for Preheating Pipe Welds with Electrical Resistance Equipment ...................... 13-2
13-2
Typical Setup for Flexible Pad Heating Elements ...................................................................... 13-4
13-3
Thermocouple Attachment for PWHT Using the Capacitor Discharge Method ...................... 13-10
13-4
Thermocouple Attachment for PWHT Using Clips and a Flattened Tube ............................... 13-11
13-5
Minimum Controlled Band Width (CBW) for Post-Weld Heat Treatment ................................. 13-12
13-6
Required Thermocouple Locations and Minimum Heated Band Width (HBW)

for Post-Weld Heat Treatment ................................................................................................. 13-13
13-7a
Heat Treatment Quality Control Specification .......................................................................... 13-15
13-7b
Heat Treatment Quality Control Record .................................................................................. 13-17
Section 14 ___________________________________________________________________________
14-1
Temperbead Groove Preparation, Geometry, and Weld Bead Sequence ............................... 14-11
xix
Figure No.
Page No.
Appendix A _________________________________________________________________________
A-1
Blue Check Illustration ................................................................................................................ A-4
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
Heel and Toe Measurement Parameters ..................................................................................... A-7
A-7
Gauges Used to Determine Seat and Wedge Angles ................................................................. A-8

LIST OF TABLES
Table No.
Page No.
Section 2 ____________________________________________________________________________
2-1
Valve Design Codes .................................................................................................................... 2-2
2-2
Typical Valve Standards .............................................................................................................. 2-3
2-3
Safety Classes and Applicable Standards .................................................................................. 2-4
2-4
Pressure/Temperature Ratings for Steel Valves .......................................................................... 2-5
2-5
Materials Commonly Used for Pressure Boundary Parts ............................................................ 2-8
Section 4 ____________________________________________________________________________
4-1
Chart of Wear and Galling Resistance of Material Combinations ............................................... 4-4
4-2
Metals in Order of Corrosion Rate .............................................................................................. 4-5
4-3
Critical Variables for Accelerated Erosion-Corrosion ................................................................... 4-7
4-4
Properties of Plastics and Elastomers Used for Soft Seats ...................................................... 4-13
Section 11 ___________________________________________________________________________
11-1
P-Number, Composition, and Specifications for Selected Valve Materials ................................ 11-1
11-2
Welding Filler Material Use by Process..................................................................................... 11-2
11-3
Weld Filler Metal Specifications ................................................................................................ 11-3
11-4
Typical Filler Metals for Various Base Metals ............................................................................ 11-5
11-5
Weld Metal for Joining Selected Stainless Steel Base Materials .............................................. 11-6
11-6
Popular Electrode Product Forms and Available Sizes ............................................................. 11-8
11-7
A-NumbersClassification of Ferrous Weld Metal Analysis for Procedure Qualification ......... 11-9
11-8
F-Number Grouping of Welding Electrodes and Rods ............................................................ 11-10
11-9
Filler Metal Selection for Different P-Number Combinations ................................................... 11-13
11-10
Selected Weld Filler Metals Used for Hardfacing and Valve Seat Applications ....................... 11-14
xxi

Table No.
Page No.
Section 13 ___________________________________________________________________________
13-1
Preheat, Interpass, and PWHT Guidelines ............................................................................... 13-1
13-2
Mandatory Requirements for Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Welds ........................................... 13-5
13-3
AWS Post-Weld Heat Treatment Temperatures for Selected Base Metal .................................. 13-6
13-4
Code References for Preheat & PWHT Requirements ........................................................... 13-16
Section 15 ___________________________________________________________________________
15-1
xxii
ASTM and ASME Standards for Nondestructive Examination Methods ................................... 15-2

1
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction and Application

Valves play a key role in the operation and performance of power plants. Maintenance
and repair of valves have been a leading concern of plant operators as they seek to
maximize plant availability and the return on their capital investment.
EPRI has initiated numerous studies and surveys aimed at understanding the impact of
valve-related problems on plant availability. The results of these studies indicate that
valve failures are the single largest contributor to unscheduled shutdowns and lost
power generation [1]. EPRI responded positively to the results of these studies by initiating several projects that addressed basic maintenance needs, such as bolting practices,
valve stem packing, and motor-operated valve (MOV) training.
A costly issue that has not been adequately addressed involves the repair of the valve
bodies, bonnets, and internal trim components, which generally requires some degree
of welding and machining. Damage to critical valve parts due to wear, erosion, corrosion, cracking, and other destructive mechanisms typically leads to lengthy forced or
extended outages when welding is required. Welded repairs to valves have traditionally been performed by the valve manufacturer who attempts a lengthy repair in their
manufacturing facility or a hot shop facility if the valve is contaminated. Another
typical approach has been to replace the valve with a new one. This also has many
shortcomings, especially in todays market when replacement stock is not readily available for most larger valves.
Today, with the emphasis on shorter refueling outages and tighter radiation exposure
limits, utilities are looking for a faster and more cost-effective approach to getting back
on-line quickly. In situ repair of welded-in valves and on-site repair for flanged valves
have become the preferred or required approach. Performing the repair in situ avoids
cutting the valve out of line and shipping it to the repair facility, eliminates the system
hydro testing after reinstallation, and keeps the owner in control of the repair and its
impact on the outage schedule.
Major in situ repairs are currently being performed by original equipment manufacturers
(OEMs), service vendors, and utility maintenance personnel with varied levels of success.
The welding and machining technology currently available to make field repairs is
1-1

limited, focusing primarily on some large nuclear valves (main steam isolation valves or
MSIVs) of the globe-type configuration. In the early 1980s, EPRI sponsored a program to
develop in situ machining and welding equipment to address the boiling water reactor
(BWR) MSIV seating problems. Several equipment manufacturers and service organizations designed and built MSIV repair systems. These systems were demonstrated at the
EPRI NDE Center in 1987 and several are being utilized today [2]. The result of that EPRIsponsored program was a better understanding of the valve repair issues that the nuclear
industry faces, which has further influenced the development of repair systems for
smaller globe-type valves.
In 1994, the subscribing members of the EPRI Repair and Replacement Applications
Program (RRAP) initiated a study to identify the capabilities and qualifications of organizations performing in situ valve repair. Three separate surveys were sent out to field
service vendors, valve manufacturers, and RRAP utility members. The purpose of the
surveys were to:
Identify the most common valve repair issues
Determine the types and sizes of valves that contribute to down time
Determine the capabilities of the manufacturers and service vendors to perform
welded in situ repairs
Develop contacts and obtain case histories for these guidelines
The results of that survey indicated that the number of utilities and service vendors
performing in situ valve repairs was less than ten, and repair capabilities were quite
limited. It was also apparent from the survey that there had been very little transfer of
information on repair cases and capabilities across the industry. In fact, many utility
contacts were unaware of in situ repair capabilities, other than general maintenance
grinding/lapping of valve seats.
In 1996, the Nuclear Maintenance Applications Center (NMAC) and its member utilities
joined with RRAC to develop a comprehensive valve application, repair, and maintenance series. Volume 1 addresses the selection of valves and maintenance issues. This
document, Volume 2, addresses the repair of gate, globe, and check valves. Volume 3
will address the repair of ball, butterfly, and plug-type valves.
The purpose of the guidelines in this document is to present information on valve problems that require repair practices and applications beyond those typically recognized as
maintenance. These guidelines specifically address machining to remove defects in valve
components and restoring those materials by welding. These guidelines are aimed at the
system, maintenance, and welding engineers responsible for maintaining valves. Secondary audiences are the design engineers and others interested in understanding the types
of valves and the techniques needed to repair them. Most important, these guidelines lead
the engineer down a path to resolving problems associated with valve base material and
trim by offering guidance in understanding the work scope and developing resource
requirements. Finally, the guidelines will assist in writing a repair specification and provide the basic knowledge for the engineer to understand the operations he will oversee.
1-2

1.2 Summary
Numerous EPRI-sponsored studies and development efforts have been performed since
the early 1980s to address valve reliability issues in nuclear power plants. The majority of
these programs have resulted in applicable products or guidelines aimed at valve maintenance and diagnostics. Some of the more familiar products addressed bolting, on-line leak
sealing, motor-operated valve (MOV) diagnostics and maintenance, and several valvespecific maintenance guidelines [3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9]. This study moves beyond the general
maintenance of valves and addresses the repair of valve bodies and internal components,
and more specifically, in situ repair. For the purpose of this program, repair refers to
operations that incorporate welding and/or machining of base materials.
Valves that require repair due to cracking, erosion, corrosion, or wear have had significant impact on plant availability, extending outages by days or even weeks. Most of
these repairs are unique due to repair location, size, type, and configuration of the
valve. In addition to being unique, most of the failures are identified well into the outage or during start up, which adds to the scheduling impact on start up.
When a problem is identified, the real challenge begins. Utilities must first search out a
qualified in-house staff repair vendor or team of vendors. Together, they must then
develop a repair strategy and implement it. The repair program typically requires
developing or adapting welding and machining systems, developing a mock-up, demonstrating the repair, qualifying welders and procedures, and finally implementing the
repair. Any one of these steps can be a great challenge that results in significant delays.
Only recently have cost-effective repair techniques been demonstrated for the repair of
large globe-type valves such as the Y-type Atwood Morrill MSIV found in BWR plants
[26, 27]. Repairs to smaller globe valves and all gate- and check-type valves have been
performed but with varying degrees of success.
This guide provides extensive guidance to the user in identifying a specific repair issue,
understanding the repair options, walking through the specific repair, understanding
the Code requirements, and preparing the valve for system testing. This guide specifically includes the following:
Technical descriptions of gate, globe, and check valves are provided. Individual
sections on design and application along with advantages and disadvantages are
provided.
Materials of construction are presented including pressure retaining materials and
trim such as cobalt-based, nickel-based, and iron-based hardfacing alloys.
A section is provided on each specific type of valve, the typical repair issues, and the
repair options. The repair options direct the user to specific repair sections.
An extensive section on specific component repairs is presented, including the
component repair list prerequisites; repair strategies; flaw removal techniques;
material selection; machining, welding, and heat treatment requirements; and final
inspection and testing requirements.
1-3

Sections are provided on detailed welding material selection, including welding

guidelines for specific processes, base material, and filler metals such as gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW) of hardfacing on carbon steel substrates; and preheat and
post-weld heat treatment guidelines.
Appendices to the guide provide a listing of contractors and equipment suppliers
capable of providing assistance for the repair of valve components and implementation of these guidelines.
1-4

2
CODES AND STANDARDS
Industry codes and standards provide extensive design rules and guidance for valve
design. These codes and standards provide the necessary rules for establishing such
design requirements as wall thicknesses for pressure boundary parts, end connection
configuration, and accepted materials, along with their allowable stresses. Industry
codes and standards do not provide design rules for non-pressure boundary parts that
are critical to valve operation, such as valve yokes, gaskets, and packing [812].
2.1 General
A clear understanding of the applicable codes and standards that apply to a valve installation is essential to design, evaluate, procure, install, or modify nuclear valves and nuclear
balance-of-plant valves, as well as fossil plant valves, where ASME I and ANSI B31.1
apply. The applicable edition of the code or standard should be known as well.
There are over 70 industry documents that relate to valve requirements for designing,
manufacturing, or testing. The most frequently used valve documents are published by
the following organizations:
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI Standards)
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS-SP
Standard Practices)
American Water Works Association (AWWA Standards)
American Petroleum Institute (API Standards)
Underwriters Laboratory, Incorporated (UL Standards)
Instrument Society of America (ISA)
U.S. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), specifically General Design Criteria (GDC)
of 10 CFR Part 50
2-1

For nuclear plants, the codes and standards most frequently used for valve design are the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Nuclear Power Plant Components;
Section VIII, Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; and ANSI B16.34. A chronology
of the development of the major codes and standards is presented below and summarized
in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1
Valve Design Codes [8]
(Source: EPRI NP-6516)
Valve Type/Function
Code or Standard
Applicable Dates
Alternative Guidelines for

Design of Butt-Weld Valves
MSS-SP66
Mid-1960s through 1973
Design of Category I Valves
ASME III
ANSI B16.5*
ANSI B16.34*
(Note 1) (Note 2)
1971 on
up to 1977
1977 on
Design of Non-Nuclear
Boiler Pressure Boundary Valves
ASME I
ANSI B16.5**
ANSI B16.34**
(Note 1)
1914 on
up to 1977
1977 on
Design of Non-Safety,
Non-Boiler Valves
ANSI B16.5
ANSI B16.34
Up to 1973
1973 on
* As invoked by ASME III
** As invoked by ASME I
Notes:
1. ANSI B16.34 provides the pressure/temperature rating, as well as requirements for minimum wall thickness, pressure boundary
materials, marking, dimensions, and testing. ANSI B16.5 provides the pressure/temperature rating and the minimum wall thickness,
and outlines the requirements for testing.
2.
ASME III applies to nuclear safety-related valves. The earlier editions of ASME III referred to ANSI B16.5 or MSS SP66 primarily for
pressure/temperature ratings and wall thickness, but retained the rules for materials, design, examination, and testing. The current
ASME III refers to a large extent to ANSI B16.34 for valve requirements, but still retains design rules, spe cial material requirements,
and special nondestructive examination requirements.
The earlier editions of ASME III relied on ANSI B16.5 and/or MSS-SP66 for pressure/
temperature ratings and wall thickness, but retained the rules for materials, design,
examination, and testing. Currently ASME III refers to ANSI B16.34 for most valve
requirements. ASME III still retains design rules, special material requirements, and
special nondestructive examination requirements.
In addition to providing rules for nuclear plant valve design, ANSI B16.34 applies to
nuclear balance-of-plant valves and to fossil plants. For these applications, other standards also have been used for the design of valves. Table 2-2 identifies other standards
that might be applied to the design and/or selection of valves to be used in non-nuclear
valve applications.
For older plants, ANSI B16.5 provided primary guidelines and MSS-SP66 provided
alternative guidelines for the design of butt-weld end valves. When ANSI B16.34 was
issued, the thrust of MSS-SP66 was incorporated as special class valves (that is, nondestructive examination such as radiography allowed a higher pressure for a given temperature), and MSS-SP66 was withdrawn.
2-2

Table 2-2
Typical Valve Standards
Standard No.
Title
AWWA-C504
RubberSeated Butterfly Valves
API-602
Compact Gate Valves
MSS-SP67
Butterfly Valves
MSS-SP70
Cast Iron Gate Valves
MSS-SP72
Ball Valves
MSS-SP80
Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves
MSS-SP84
Steel Valves, Socket Welding, and Threaded Ends
MSS-SP66
Pressure Temperature Ratings for Steel Valves
MSS-SP71
Cast Iron Check Valves
MSS-SP85
Bronze Valves
Special consideration should be made if these or any other standards are not included
in Table 126.1 of ANSI B31.1.
The above referenced standards provide many of the design rules for valves. However,
they do not address non-pressure-containing functional components or internal parts
for non-nuclear valve applications. For nuclear valves, the requirements for internal
parts have been given only a limited formal design approach for Class 1 valves by
ASME III, Subarticle 3500. In order to properly address ASME Code Class 2 and Class 3
valves, ASME Code Case N62-4 was issued, which provides rules for materials, design,
fabrication, inspection, and examination of internal and external valve parts. Prior to
use, the code case should be consulted for the full scope of items covered. Code cases
are optional. The rules of a code case become mandatory only if a purchaser invokes its
requirements on a manufacturer, and then the entire code case is mandatory. Code
cases are periodically reviewed, at which time they are reaffirmed or annulled. Code
cases are annulled when the requirements have been incorporated into the code (for
example, ASME III) or the code case is no longer needed.
The categorization of nuclear safety-related equipment, including valves, is determined
by referring to ANSI/ANS-51.1 (formerly ANSI N18.2, Nuclear Safety Criteria for the
Design of Stationary Pressurized Water Reactor Plants) and ANSI/ANS-52.1 (Formerly
ANSI N2.2, Nuclear Safety Criteria for the Design of Boiling Water Reactor Plants), U.S.
Code of Federal Regulations (10 CFR 50.55a), and U.S. NRC Regulatory Guide 1.26
(Quality Group Classifications and Standards for Water, Steam, and Radioactive-Waste-Containing Components of Nuclear Power Plants). It should be noted that ANSI/ANS-51.1 and
ANSI/ANS-52.1 are currently undergoing revision and will result in a new, combined
standard, ANSI/ANS-50.1.
Safety Class 1 is for reactor coolant pressure boundary components. Safety Class 2 is for
components that form part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary, but might be
excluded from safety Class 1 by provisions of 10 CFR 50.55a, or that are necessary for
2-3

the safe shutdown of the reactor, or to maintain the reactor in a safe condition. Safety
Class 3 is for systems that support safety Class 1 and 2 systems. Consult 10 CFR 50.55a,
Regulatory Guide 1.26, and ANSI/ANS-51.2 and 52.1 for complete definitions. The
basic standards that apply and their correlation to safety classes are given in Table 2-3.
Table 2-3
Safety Classes and Applicable Standards
Safety Class
1
10 CFR 50.55a
Reactor Coolant
Pressure Boundary
(referred to as
Quality Group A in
Reg. Guide 1.26)
ASME III Cl 1
Reg. Guide 1.26
Remarks
Quality Group B -
ASME III Cl 2
3
Quality Group C -
ASME III Cl 3
NNS*
Quality Group D ANSI B31.1
For systems that contain or

might contain radioactive
material, but are not in
Groups A, B, or C
* Not nuclear safety-related
2.2 Pressure/Temperature Ratings
2.2.1 General
As previously stated, the pressure/temperature rating of a valve is provided in various
codes and standards. The standard that is used depends on the materials selected and
the valve style.
Typical pressure/temperature ratings are included in the following codes and standards:
Steel, nickel alloy, and other special alloy valves: ASME III, ANSI B16.34 (see Table 2-4)
Cast iron gate valves: MSS-SP70
Cast iron check valves: MSS-SP71
Cast iron globe valves: MSS-SP85
Bronze gate, globe, and check valves: MSS-SP80
2-4

Table 2-4
Pressure/Temperature Ratings for Steel Valves [8]
RATINGS FOR CARBON STEEL MATERIALS
A105(a)
A155-KC70(e)
A155-KCF70(e)
A216WCB(a)
A350-LF2(d)
A515-70(a)
A516-70(a)(g)
A537-Cl.1(d)
A675-70
A696-Gr.C(a)
Notes:
(a) Permissible, but not recommended for prolonged usage above about 800 F.
(d) Not to be us ed over 650F.
(e) Not to be used over 700F.
(f) Not to be used over 850F.
Standard Class Valves Flanged and Butt-Welding

Temperature, F
-20 to 100
200
300
400
500
600
650
700
750
800
850
900
950
1,000
Working Pressure by Classes, psig

150
285
260
230
200
170
140
125
100
95
80
65
50
35
20
300
740
675
655
635
600
550
535
535
505
410
270
170
105
50
400
990
900
875
845
800
730
715
710
670
550
355
230
140
70
600
1,480
1,350
1,315
1,270
1,200
1,095
1,075
1,065
1,010
825
535
345
205
105
900
2,220
2,025
1,970
1,900
1,795
1,640
1,610
1,600
1,510
1,235
805
515
310
155
1,500
3,705
3,375
3,280
3,170
2,995
2,735
2,685
2,665
2,520
2,060
1,340
860
515
260
2,500
6,170
5,625
5,470
5,280
4,990
4,560
4,475
4,440
4,200
3,430
2,230
1,420
860
430
4,500
11,110
10,120
9,845
9,505
8,980
8,210
8,055
7,990
7,560
6,170
4,010
2,570
1,545
770
Special Class Butt-Welding End Valves

Temperature, F
-20 to 100
200
300
400
500
600
650
700
750
800
850
900
950
1,000
Working Pressure by Classes, psig

150
290
290
290
290
290
275
270
265
240
200
130
85
50
25
300
750
750
750
750
750
715
700
695
630
515
335
215
130
65
400
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
950
935
925
840
685
445
285
170
85
600
1,500
1,500
1,500
1,500
1,500
1,425
1,400
1,390
1,260
1,030
670
430
260
130
900
2,250
2,250
2,250
2,250
2,250
2,140
2,100
2,080
1,890
1,545
1,005
645
385
195
1,500
3,750
3,750
3,750
3,750
3,750
3,565
3,495
3,470
3,150
2,570
1,670
1,070
645
320
2,500
6,250
6,250
6,250
6,250
6,250
5,940
5,825
5,780
5,250
4,285
2,785
1,785
1,070
535
4,500
11,250
11,250
11,250
11,250
11,250
10,690
10,485
10,405
9,450
7,715
5,015
3,215
1,930
965
Prior to determining the rating of a valve, a determination of the ANSI pressure class
must be made. The class is based on the design and operating conditions of the system
(for example, temperature and pressure). After the ANSI pressure class is determined, it
2-5

must be recognized that other conditions can limit the valves final rating. Valves with
elastomeric or plastic gaskets, packing, or seating elements might not meet the entire
range of pressure/temperature conditions for their designated pressure class.
ANSI B31.1 rules for non-nuclear valves provide no specific allowance for excursions of
operating pressure or temperature above design condition values. The maximum design pressures and temperatures are established by the pressure/temperature tables
previously referenced.
The user of this document should refer to the codes or standards and addenda applicable to the particular plant to determine the code provisions, if any, that permit allowance for variations from design conditions.
Current editions of several codes and standards now permit the operating pressure to
exceed the design pressure by not more than 10% under conditions of relief or safety
valve operation. In addition, under certain conditions ASME III permits Class 2 and
Class 3 valves to operate at a higher pressure than that normally allowed for the attained temperature. If the ASME criteria are allowed for these occasional transients,
then other sections of ASME III apply as appropriate. ANSI B16.34 also makes provisions for departure from the standard pressure temperature ratings.
The applicable code or standard should always be consulted when selecting a valve to
ensure that the system design pressure and temperature are covered by the pressure/
temperature rating allowed by the applicable code or standard. When selecting the
pressure class of the valve, other considerations can apply, such as pressure spikes due
to dynamic loads (for example, water hammer) or greater strength required to support a
heavy operator.
2.2.2 Special Class Valves (Weld-End Valve)

A special class valve for which additional nondestructive examination (for example,
radiography) is required, thus permitting a higher pressure/temperature rating. Tables
of acceptable pressure and temperature are published in ANSI B16.34 for both standard
class valves and special class valves. For example, a Class 600 carbon steel valve made
from A216 WCB can be used at 1,200 psig at 500F (8.2 MPa at 260C) as a standard class
valve. The same valve, when nondestructive examination is performed to merit the
rating of Class 600 special class, can be used at 1,500 psig at 500F (10.3 MPa at 260C).
This option can be valuable when the pressure and temperature allowed by B16.34
standard class do not meet the system requirements, but the special class does meet the
system requirements. A special class is sometimes cost-effective and would not have the
higher fluid flow pressure drop associated with the higher pressure class valve.
2-6

2.2.3 Intermediate Rating Valves (Weld-End and Threaded Valves)

ANSI B16.34 and ASME III specify a minimum wall thickness for each standard pressure
class (for example, Class 150 and Class 300) and the inside diameter of a valve. When the
actual wall thickness of a valve exceeds the minimum wall thickness specified for the
standard pressure class and inside diameter, but is less than the specified minimum wall
thickness for the next higher standard pressure class, ANSI B16.34 and ASME III make
provisions, and provide formulas for, determining an intermediate pressure rating. This
option requires higher hydrostatic test pressures than the next lower standard pressure
class and should be exercised by or through the manufacturer.
Intermediate-rated valves are used when system pressures and temperatures exceed
those allowed for a standard pressure class, and when the wall thickness exceeds that
required for the standard pressure class. For example, a manufacturer might provide a
Class 1878 valve for a pressurized water reactor (PWR) reactor coolant system where a
standard Class 1500 would not suffice, but a standard Class 2500 would far exceed the
requirements.
This option is different from special class valves in that an additional wall thickness above
the minimum is required to allow a higher pressure/temperature rating for intermediaterated valves versus additional nondestructive testing for special class valves.
2.3 General Discussion of Pressure Boundary Materials
Pressure boundary parts are defined in ASME III as the body, the bonnet, the disc, and
the bolting that joins the body to the bonnet. Stems and seats are not pressure boundary
parts. ASME III requires that these parts be made of an ASME III material, except for
2-inch (50 mm) or smaller line valve discs and safety valve discs and nozzles that are
internally contained by the external body structure. However, ASME III permits use of
material produced under ASTM specifications, provided the requirements of the ASTM
specification are identical to or more stringent than the ASME III material.
Other valve standards and codes do not specifically identify pressure boundary materials. However, ANSI B16.34 requires the body, bonnet, cover and body bonnet, or body
cover bottom to be constructed of material listed in Table I of ANSI B16.34.
Materials commonly used for pressure boundary parts (as defined in ASME III) fall into
three categories: stainless steels or other corrosion-resistant alloys, carbon steels, and
low-alloy steels. See Table 2-5 for commonly used pressure boundary materials.
2-7

Table 2-5
Materials Commonly Used for Pressure Boundary Parts
Material Type
Castings3
Stainless
Steel Valves
Carbon
Steel Valves
ASTM A351,
Gr CF8 (304 SS)
ASTM A216-WCB
ASTM A351,
Gr CF8M (316 SS)
ASTM A216-WCC
Low-Alloy
Steel Valves
ASTM A217-WC6
(1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo)
ASTM A217-WC9
(2-1/4Cr- 1Mo)
ASTM A351, Gr CF3

(304 SS)
ASTM A351, Gr CF3M
(316 low carbon SS)
Forgings3
Plate
Bolts, Studs,
and Nuts
ASTM A182-F304, F316
ASTM A105
ASTM A182, F11

(1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo)
ASTM A182-F304L, F316L
ASTM A350-LF2
ASTM A182, F22

(2-1/4Cr-1Mo)
ASTM A240-304, 304L
ASTM A515GR70
ASTM A387-1,CL2
(1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo)
ASTM A240-316, 316L
ASTM A516GR70
ASTM A387-2, CL2

(2-1/4Cr-1Mo)
ASTM A193, Gr B7
ASTM A194, Gr 2H
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
A193, Gr B71
A194, Gr 2H1
A193, Gr B6 (410 SS)
A194, Gr 6 (410 SS)
A193, Gr B8 (304 SS)2
A193, Gr 8 (304 SS)2
A564, Gr 630
A193,
A194,
A193,
A194,
Gr B7
Gr 2H
Gr 16
Gr 4
Notes:
1.
Although sometimes provided, these materials are not appropriate for stainless steel valves due to their potential for corrosion.
2.
Not recommended for threading into 304 or 316 bodies, because galling can occur.
3.
Typically used for valve bodies, bonnets, and discs or plugs.
The selection of materials is dependent on such factors as resistance to corrosion and

erosion, and to some extent, the pressure/temperature rating for the various materials.
It is common practice for the valve body to match the piping material. Fluid system
conditions, including the environment, primarily dictate material selection. For example, the boric acid content of a pressurized water reactor coolant system leads to the
selection of a stainless steel body, bonnet, and bolting. The superior erosion resistance
of stainless steel is another reason for its selection for this high-velocity system. Further,
the required retention of water purity in a demineralized water system requires the use
of stainless steel, where small amounts of corrosion products that could result from the
use of carbon steel cannot be tolerated. Carbon and low-alloy steel valves are used in
the steam, feedwater, extraction steam, and condensate systems, where the water chemistry can be controlled to restrict the corrosion rate.
2-8

Carbon steels and stainless steels have yield strengths that are about equal at room temperature; however, low-alloy steels generally have a significantly higher yield strength
than carbon or stainless steels. At the higher operating temperatures of a water-cooled
reactor [500F to 600F (260C to 316C)], the yield strength of stainless steel is less than
that of carbon steel. Carbon steel is not recommended for prolonged usage above 800F
(427C) because of its potential graphitization damage and creep damage at elevated
temperatures. The low-alloy steels have the highest yield strength at 500F to 600F.
For valve bodies and bonnets, the same material or product form is not required to be
used for both parts. The rating applied, however, must be based on the valve body,
with the bonnet designed and material selected accordingly. All materials should be
selected based on specific service conditions. For example: (a) a stainless steel valve in
corrosive service conditions should have stainless steel bolting to preclude bolting
corrosion due to leakage, (b) for steam service, which has a high moisture content and
which might result in erosion, 2 !f Chrome (Cr) 1 Molybdenum (Mo) or 1!!f Cr-!s Mo material should be used for the valve body and bonnet, even though the temperature would
permit carbon steel. In addition, for high velocity service, 2!f Cr-1Mo is superior to
carbon steel, and stainless steel is vastly superior.
Several other materials are available for valves, such as cast iron (ASTM A-126), ductile
iron (ASTM A-395), and bronze (ASTM B-62). Note that ASME III does not permit cast
iron or ductile iron valves. Other alloys are also used for service environments such as
seawater, where aluminum-bronze valves are often used.
2.4 Required Minimum Wall and Corrosion Allowance
One of the most basic parameters of valve design specified by the various codes for
pressure boundary integrity is the required minimum wall thickness.
The minimum wall thickness is, simply, the required thickness of the valve body wall to
safely contain fluid at the design pressure and temperature. This required thickness is a
function of the valve diameter, the design pressure of the valve, and the allowable stress
(which is determined by the material used, the design temperature, and the code class
of the valve).
ANSI B16.34 provides tables of minimum wall thickness as a function of valve inside
diameter and pressure rating, and formulas for interpolating the required wall thickness for pressure ratings that are not listed in the tables.
ASME III Subsections NB, NC, and ND provide formulas for required minimum wall
thickness as a function of B16.34 thicknesses with certain modifications.
If the actual wall thickness of a valve falls below the minimum required wall thickness,
it can be resolved in one of several ways. If the wall thinning is over a large area, the
valve should either be replaced or rerated. If the wall thinning is restricted to a small
local area, the area falling below the required minimum wall thickness can be weldrepaired to restore the original thickness, or the valve can be rerated.
2-9

Rerating is possible if the maximum pressure allowed for the pressure class of the valve
exceeds the actual design pressure of the valve. For instance, a Class 300 valve, with a
maximum allowable pressure of 655 psig at 300F (4.5 MPa at 149C), was used in a system with a design pressure of 250 psig at 300F (1.7 MPa at 149C) . Using the formulas for
interpolation between pressure classes (in B16.34 or ASME III, NB, NC, or ND, as applicable), the required minimum wall thickness for the actual design conditions can be
determined.
Rerating a valve requires the concurrence of the valve manufacturer and also requires
that the reduced rating be incorporated into the plant design and licensing documents.
A corrosion allowance should also be included for valves that are cast or forged, although the casting or forging process normally dictates that the final wall thickness of
the valve will be in excess of that required by ANSI B16.34. In the smaller sizes and
lower pressure ratings, the required wall thickness is often far less than the minimum
practical thickness of a casting. In addition, some foundries produce their castings at
least 1/8-inch (3 mm) thicker for each inch of metal thickness, compared to the specified
wall thickness.
Corrosion allowance, as used herein, is defined as additional wall thickness beyond that
required by ANSI B16.34, to compensate for corrosion loss over the life of the valve.
Certain product lines of some manufacturers were originally designed to meet the
required wall thickness in American Petroleum Institute (API) standards. API standards
require a wall thickness of excess of ANSI B16.34, thus providing a corrosion allowance
when used in ANSI B16.34 applications.
ANSI B16.34 has provided some excess in their tabulated wall thickness. When comparing these values against the required wall thickness determined by calculation, annex F,
paragraph F1.4 of ANSI B16.34, states, in part that . . . the actual values in Table 3 (of
ANSI B16.34) are approximately 0.1 inches (2.5 mm) heavier than those given by the
equation . . .
Some users take this to mean a corrosion allowance, although it does not specifically say
this nor should it be interpreted that way. Total compliance with ANSI B16.34 would
require wall thickness in accordance with Table 3 (of ANSI B16.34) for the life of the valve.
2-10

3
GENERAL VALVE DESIGN
3.1 Nomenclature/Glossary of Terms
3.1.1 Introduction
This section covers commonly used valve terminology and nomenclature. As examples,
Figures 3-1 and 3-2 show a globe and a gate valve, and the typical nomenclature used
for these valve types. References are given, where appropriate, to figures found in later
sections that depict the term being defined. Many terms used in this document are
defined in the following standards and technical textbooks [1].
Glossary of Valve Terms, Grove Valve Regulator Company, Oakland, CA, 1980.
ASME Standard 112, Diaphragm Actuated Control Valve Terminology, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, New York, NY.
ISA Handbook of Control Valves, Instrument Society of America, Pittsburgh, PA, 1971.
Control Valve Handbook, Second Edition, Fisher Control Company, Marshalltown,

Iowa, 1977.
ANSI B95.1, Terminology for Pressure Relief Devices.
3.1.2 Glossary of Terms

active valve. A valve that must perform a mechanical motion while performing its
intended function. (Note: The scope of this definition is currently under discussion by
ASME.)
actual discharge area. The minimum net area that determines the flow through a valve.
actuator spring (diaphragm actuator) (see Figure 3-l). A spring that moves the actuator
stem in a direction opposite to the direction created by diaphragm pressure.
3-1

Diaphragm Plate
Diaphragm Case
Diaphragm
Boss
Diaphragm Actuator
Actuator Spring
Actuator Stem
Stem Connector
Yoke
Packing
Valve Stem
Bonnet
Stem Guide
Body
Backseat
Disc/Plug
Seat Ring
Figure 3-1
Globe ValveTypical Valve Nomenclature
actuator stem (diaphragm actuator) (see Figure 3-l). A rod-like extension (usually the
valve stem) of the diaphragm plate to permit convenient external connection.
backpressure. Pressure on the downstream side of the valve.
backseat (see Figure 3-1). A shoulder on the stem disc of a valve that seals against a
mating surface inside the bonnet to act as a backup seal to the packing to limit stem seal
leakage.
3-2

block and bleed. The capability of obtaining a pressure seal across the upstream and
downstream seats of a valve, usually a gate valve, when the body pressure is bled off to
the atmosphere through blowdown valves or vent plugs. This is useful in testing the
integrity of seat shut-off and in accomplishing minor repairs under pressure; it is also
useful in keeping different process fluids separated. See double block and bleed.
bluing. The act of applying a fine non-drying film of blue paste on a finished component, such as a valve disc, and placing it against its matching component for the purpose of identifying contact areas.
body (see Figures 3-1 and 3-2). The principal pressure-containing part of a valve where
the closure element and seats are located.
Stem Movement
Handwheel Rotation
Handwheel (Actuator)
Yoke Nut
Yoke
Stem
Packing
Bonnet
Stem Guide
Body-Bonnet
Flanged Joint
Body
Disc/Gate
Process
Fluid Flow
End Connection
Valve Seats
Figure 3-2
Gate ValveTypical Valve Nomenclature
3-3

bonnet (see Figures 3-l and 3-2). The separable portion of the valve pressure boundary
that permits access to the internals. The major part of the bonnet assembly, excluding
the sealing means. The top pressure-containing part of a valve, which is attached to the
body, guides the stem, and adapts to extensions or operators.
bonnet assembly. An assembly that includes the part through which a valve plug stem
moves and is a means for sealing against leakage along the stem. It usually provides a
means for mounting the actuator.
bore (or port). The inside diameter, or other control configuration, of the flow passage
through a valve (for example, the diameter of the hole in the ball of a ball valve, the
inside diameter of seat rings).
boss. A reinforced area for the attachment of accessories or small connections.
bubble-tight shutoff. A phrase used in describing the sealing ability of a valve. During air pressure testing of a valve in the closed position, leakage past the seats is
bubbled through water. To qualify as bubble-tight, no bubbles should be observed in
a prescribed time span.
bypass. A system of pipes and valves intended to permit the diversion of flow or
pressure around a line valve or to equalize the body cavity pressure to either the upstream or downstream side.
cage (see Figure 4-2). A hollow cylindrical trim element that is a guide to align the
movement of a valve disc with a seat ring and also to retain the seat ring in the valve
body. Often the walls of the cage contain openings that determine the flow characteristics of a control valve.
capacity. The rate of flow through a valve under stated conditions of pressure drop and
fluid density.
chatter. Rapid reciprocating or vibrating motion of the valve disc during which the disc
contacts the seat.
closure element (see Figures 3-1 and 3-2). The moving part of a valve, positioned in the
flow stream, that controls the flow through the valve. Ball, gate, plug, clapper, disc, etc.,
are specific names for closure elements.
Cv (valve flow coefficient). The capacity factor of a valve, also called the valve flow
coefficient; specifically, the number of gallons of water at 60F that will flow through a
given valve within 1 minute, with a pressure drop (loss) of 1 psi.
corrective maintenance. The repair and restoration of equipment that has failed or is
malfunctioning and is not performing its intended function.
design pressure. The pressure used in the design of a valve and other pressure-retaining components for the purpose of determining the minimum permissible thickness.
3-4

When applicable, static head shall be added to the design pressure to determine the
thickness of the pressure-retaining components. There are slight differences in the exact
definition of the design pressure used by different codes; therefore, the definition from
the applicable code, such as ASME, must be used.
diaphragm (see Figure 3-1). A flexible pressure-responsive element that transmits force
to the diaphragm plate and actuator stem.
diaphragm actuator (see Figure 3-1). An assembly utilizing fluid pressure acting on a
diaphragm to develop a force to move the actuator stem. It might, or might not, have a
spring for the positioning and return of the actuator stem.
diaphragm case (see Figure 3-1). A housing, consisting of top and bottom sections,
used for supporting a diaphragm and establishing one or two pressure chambers.
diaphragm plate (see Figure 3-1). A plate concentric with the diaphragm for transmitting force to the actuator stem.
disc (see Figures 3-1 and 3-2). The closure element of a gate, globe, check, butterfly,
safety, or relief valve. The disc in different valve designs can be referred to as the gate,
wedge, poppet, or plug.
discharge area. The minimum net area that determines the flow through the valve.
double-acting actuator. An actuator that utilizes a switching mechanism to achieve
powered operation in either direction, extending or retracting the actuator stem as
dictated by the controller.
double block and bleed. The capability of a valve to isolate the body cavity from line
pressure when the valve is in either the fully closed or fully open position. (See block and
bleed for this operation with the valve in only the closed position.) In the open position,
pressure-energized, seat-ball valves and through-conduct gate valves can effectively
shut off the system pressure from entering the valve body cavity from either the upstream or downstream side, permitting the integrity of the seats to be checked with the
closure member in the open position.
dynamic unbalance. The net force produced on the valve disc in any stated open
position by the fluid pressure acting upon it.
extension bonnet. A bonnet with an extension between the packing box assembly and
bonnet flange to thermally isolate the stem packing from the process fluid.
fail-as-is. A characteristic of a particular type of actuator that, upon loss of power
supply, causes the valve plug, ball, or disc to remain in the position attained at the time
of the loss of external actuating power.
fail-closed. A condition wherein the valve disc moves to the closed position upon loss
of external actuating power.
3-5

fail-open. A condition where the valve disc moves to the open position upon loss of
external actuating power.
fail-safe. The selection of fail-as-is, fail-closed, or fail-open action, which avoids an
undesirable consequence in a fluid system.
field serviceable. A statement indicating that normal repair of the valve or replacement
of operating parts can be accomplished in the field without returning the valve to the
manufacturer.
fire safe. A statement associated with a valve design that is capable of passing certain
specified leakage and operational tests during and after exposure to fire of specified
conditions.
flow characteristic. Relationship between flow through the valve and percent rated
travel as the latter is varied from 0% to 100%. This is a special term; it should always be
designated as either inherent flow characteristic or installed flow characteristic.
flow coefficient. See Cv.
flutter. Rapid reciprocating motions of the valve disc during which the disc does not
contact the seat or body.
gate (see Figure 3-2). The closure element of a gate valve.
globe valve (see Figure 3-1). A basic control valve type that gets its name from the
globular shape of its body. It normally uses the basic valve disc as its valve closure
member.
hardfacing. A surface preparation in which an alloy is deposited on a critical valve
surface (for example, seat, guide, and disc), usually by weld overlay or spray coating
techniques, to increase resistance to galling, abrasion, and corrosion.
high-recovery valve. A valve design that dissipates relatively little flow stream energy
due to streamlined internal contours and minimal flow turbulence. Therefore, pressure
downstream of the valve vena contracta recovers to a high percentage of its inlet value.
(Straight-through flow valves, such as rotary-shaft ball valves, are typically high-recovery valves.)
inlet size. The nominal pipe size of the inlet of a valve, unless otherwise designated.
in situ repair. A statement associated with performing a machining or welding operation on a valve body or component that is still in-line rather than in a shop.
lapping. The final finishing of a hardsurfaced sealing face. The finishing is performed
with a fine grit paper or paste and an iron plate to obtain a polished or near-polished
surface. It can be performed manually with bench-type or portable machines.
3-6

leak test pressure. The specified inlet static pressure at which a quantitative seat leakage test is performed in accordance with a standard procedure.
leaking. A quantity of fluid passing through an assembled valve when the valve is in
the closed position under stated closure forces, with pressure differential. (ANSI
B16.104 leakage classifications are defined in Tables 2-1 and 2-2 of that document.)
live loading. A term used in reference to stem packing stuffing box arrangements to
denote that the packing gland follower is loaded through springs to minimize loss of
packing load due to packing consolidation and wear.
low-recovery valve. A valve design that dissipates a considerable amount of flow
stream energy due to turbulence created by the contours of the flowpath. Consequently, pressure downstream of the valve vena contracta recovers to a lesser percentage of its inlet value than is the case with a valve having more streamline flowpath.
(Although individual designs vary, conventional globe-style valves generally have low
pressure recovery capability.)
lower valve body. A half housing for internal valve parts having one flow connection.
For example, the half housing of a split body valve.
maximum allowable working pressure. The maximum pressure permissible in a
pressure-retaining component at a designated temperature. This pressure is based on
the nominal thickness of the component, exclusive of allowances for corrosion and
thickness required for loadings other than pressure. Maximum allowable working
pressure is also used as the basis for the pressure setting of the pressure-relieving devices protecting the component.
non-rising stem (see Figure 5-1B). A gate valve having its stem threaded into the gate.
As the stem turns, the gate moves (for example, from the closed to the opened position),
but the stem does not rise. Stem threads are exposed to line fluids.
outlet size. The nominal pipe size of the outlet of a valve, unless otherwise designated.
outside screw and yoke (0S&Y) (see Figure 5-2B). A valve in which the fluid does not
come in contact with the stem threads. The stem sealing element is between the valve
body and the stem threads.
packing (stuffing) box assembly (see Figure 5-19). The part of the bonnet assembly
used to seal against leakage around the valve plug stem, including various combinations of all or part of the following: packing gland, packing nut, gland follower, lantern
ring, packing spring, packing flange, packing flange studs or bolts, packing flange nuts,
packing ring, packing wiper ring, and felt wiper ring.
packing gland (see Figure 5-19). The piece that compresses the packing.
passive valve. A valve that is not required to perform a mechanical motion while
performing its intended function.
3-7

plug. See closure element.

port-guided (see Figure 6-8). A design on which the valve plug is aligned by the body
port or ports only.
pressure-containing member. A part of the component that is in actual contact with
the pressure media.
pressure-retaining member. A part of the component that is stressed due to its function in holding one or more pressure-containing members in position.
push-down-to-close construction. A globe-style valve construction in which the valve
plug is located between the actuator and the seat ring, so that extension of the actuator
stem moves the valve plug toward the seat ring, finally closing the valve.
push-down-to-open construction. A globe-style valve construction in which the seat
ring is located between the actuator and the valve plug, so that extension of the actuator
stem moves the valve plug away from the seat ring, opening the valve.
quick opening flow characteristic. An inherent flow characteristic in which there is
maximum change in the flow coefficient with minimum stem travel.
rated C. The value of Cv at the rated full-open position.
rated travel. Linear movement of the valve plug from the closed position to the rated
full-open position. (The rated full-open position is the maximum opening recommended by the manufacturer.)
rising stem (see Figure 5-1A). A valve stem that rises as the valve is opened.
seat (see Figures 3-1 and 3-2). That portion of the valve internals parts that is contacted
by a valve closure member to achieve a shutoff.
seat angle. The angle between the axis of the valve stem and the seating surface. A flatseated valve has a seat angle of 90.
seat area. The area determined by the inside and outside diameters of the seat.
seat diameter. The smallest diameter of contact between the fixed and moving portions
of the pressure containing element of a valve.
seat load. The contact force between the seat and the valve plug.
seat ring (see Figure 3-1). A separate piece inserted in a valve body to form a valve seat.
separable flange. A removable flange that fits over a valve body flow connection,
generally held in place by a retaining ring.
3-8

static unbalance. The net force produced on the valve disc in its closed position due to
the differential pressure on it.
stem (see Figures 3-1 and 3-2). A rod or shaft transmitting force from an operator to the
closure element of a valve to change its position.
stem connector (see Figure 3-1). A fitting to connect the actuator stem to the valve stem.
stem-guided (see Figure 3-1). A special case of top-guided construction in which the
valve disc is aligned by a guide acting on the valve disc stem.
stem unbalance. The net force produced on the valve disc stem in any position by the
fluid pressure acting upon it.
stuffing box (see Figure 5-19). The annular chamber provided around a valve stem in a
sealing system into which deformable packing is introduced.
tapping. The motion of a check valve disc element that causes it to impact against the
full disc open stop, making a tapping noise.
through-conduit. An expression characterizing valves which, in the open position,
present a smooth uninterrupted interior surface across the seat rings and through the
valve port, thus affording minimum pressure drop. There are no cavities or large gaps in
the bore between seat rings and body closures, or between seat rings and the ball/gate.
top-guided (see Figure 3-1). A design in which the valve plug is aligned by a single
guide in the body, adjacent to the bonnet or in the bonnet.
top- and bottom-guided (see Figure 7-5). A design in which the valve plug is aligned
by guides in the body or in the bonnet, and in the bottom flange. The plug is guided
above and below the seat.
top- and port-guided. A design in which the valve plug is aligned by a guide in the
bonnet or body, and the body port.
trim. The internal parts of a valve that are in contact with line fluid other than the body
and bonnet (usually consisting of the seat ring, valve plug, stem, valve plug guide,
guide bushing, and cage).
upper valve body. A half housing for a split-body type valve.
valve body assembly. An assembly of a body, bonnet assembly, and bottom flange.
valve closure member. The part of a valve that is positioned to close, open, or control
the amount of flow.
valve plug (see Figure 3-1). A movable part that provides a variable restriction in a port.
3-9

valve-plug guide. The portion of a valve plug that aligns its movement in a seat ring,
bonnet, bottom flange, or any two of these.
valve-plug stem (see Figure 3-1 and 3-2). A rod extending through the bonnet assembly
to permit positioning of the valve plug.
vena contracta. The location where the cross-sectional area of the flow stream is at its
minimum size, where fluid velocity is at its highest level, and fluid pressure is at its
lowest level.
wire drawing. Erosion caused by small high velocity jets in closely spaced surfaces, or
by cavitation or liquid droplet impingement. It usually occurs when the disc is closed
but some unintentional gap due to local damage or particulates causes the surfaces not
to be in intimate contact.
yoke (see Figures 3-1 and 3-2). A structure by which the valve actuator assembly is
supported rigidly on the bonnet assembly.
3.2 Common Valve Construction Features
Details of construction common to most valves are related to the minimum required
components to achieve pressure integrity, seating integrity, and to actuate the valve.
Although some variance can be found between manufacturers, these common construction features serve the same basic functions of connecting the body and bonnet, shutting
off pressure, connecting the stem to the disc, and sealing around the movable stem.
3.2.1 Body-to-Bonnet Connections

The bonnet can be a removable portion of a valve connected to the body by screwing,
flange bolting, welding, or a pressure-sealing mechanism. In some cases, the bonnet
can be an integral part of the valve body. Removal of the bonnet generally provides
access to the valve trim, except in end-entry valves, such as ball and butterfly valves.
For the end-entry valves, access to the trim is through the inlet or outlet ports or
through the body joint.
3.2.1.1 Screwed Bonnet
The screwed-in bonnet-type valve, shown in Figure 3-3, is one of the simplest and least
expensive constructions; it is commonly limited to valve sizes up to 3 inches. In valves
larger than 3 inches, the tools and torque required to tighten the joint become too cumbersome. Threaded joints should be avoided where thread corrosion or galling can make
disassembly difficult. There are two variations of the threaded joint: one where the bonnet is screwed directly onto the body, the other where a union is used.
3-10

Stem
Bonnet
Body
Threaded Connection
Figure 3-3
Screwed Bonnet
Screwing the bonnet directly onto the body requires that the gasket or ground joint
accommodate itself to rotating faces, and frequent unscrewing of the bonnet can damage the joint faces. Another disadvantage of these joints is the variability in the circumferential alignment between the bonnet and body, because the final assembly position is
dependent on the number of turns required during threading. Threaded joints, however, offer the advantage of being easily seal-welded to provide a redundant seal or to
eliminate the joint seal altogether.
Joining the bonnet to the body using a union ring offers the advantage of preventing
motion between the joint faces as the two are being made up, thereby permitting repeated unscrewing of the bonnet without damaging the joint faces or seals. Unions also
prevent accidental unscrewing of the bonnet by the operator.
3.2.1.2 Flanged (Bolted) Bonnet
Flanged bonnet joints, such as those found in valves shown in Figure 3-4, have an
advantage over the screwed joint in that smaller tools and lower torque are required to
tighten the joint. Flanged joints can be used on any size valve, under any operating
pressure, but they become very bulky and heavy when used on very large valves and
under high operating pressures. At temperatures above 650F, creep relaxation can, in
time, noticeably lower the bolt load and allow the joint to leak. If the application is
critical, the flanged joint can be seal welded.
3-11

Stem
Packing
Bolts
Bonnet
Flange
Gasket
Body
Flange
Figure 3-4
Flanged (Bolted) Bonnet
3.2.1.3 Welded Bonnet
Welding the bonnet to the body effectively provides a very economical and long-term
seal regardless of size, operating pressure, and temperature. This arrangement can be
used to achieve both a sealing function and a load carrying function, as shown in Figure
3-5. When coupled with screwed or flanged joints, the weld joint is designed to seal
only against pressure and requires minimal weld material. Except for cast iron, welding can be performed on most materials.
Bonnet
Groove Weld
Body
Figure 3-5
Welded Bonnet
This arrangement is used where the valve is expected to be maintenance-free for long
periods, where the valve is a throw-away design due to its relative cost to replace versus repair, or where the required sealing reliability of the valve far outweighs the difficulty of gaining access to valve internals, such as in bellows-sealed stem valves.
3-12

3.2.1.4 Pressure-Sealed Bonnet

The pressure sealed bonnet design, shown in Figure 3-6, provides the advantage of reduced weight and size over flanged connections, and allows the internal bonnet pressure
to increase the joint sealing contact stress, instead of unloading it as in bolted designs.
This joint is most attractive in larger valves and high pressure applications where the
pressure forces are high enough to generate the required contact stress to seal at the
metal-to-metal joint. This type of bonnet seal is usually available only on valves of pressure Class 600 or higher. It is particularly suited to high temperature applications (660F)
where bolted bonnet joints can loosen due to bolt creep. One of the disadvantages of this
type of bonnet joint is that it provides no positive mechanical location between the bonnet
and body and often allows misalignment to occur, which can cause stem binding. Binding can lead to stem galling, leakage through the stem packing, and potential valve
inoperability. In large valves, proper assembly of the bonnet usually requires installation
of the valve with the stem vertical and pointing upward (see Figure 3-3).
Bonnet Capscrews
Bonnet Retainers
Gasket Retainer
Spacer Ring
Pressure Seal Gasket
Bonnet
Valve Body
Figure 3-6
Pressure-Sealed Bonnet
Another drawback of the pressure seal bonnet joint is that it can start to leak in applications where frequent pressure or temperature fluctuations are experienced; therefore,
the bonnet cannot be safely tightened under pressure when a leak occurs because of the
possibility of making the leakage more severe when attempting corrective action. In
addition, if a leak should occur, it is more difficult to repair and reassemble the valve
than with a bolted bonnet due to the required careful alignment and tightening sequence procedures during assembly.
3-13

3.2.2 Seat and Seat Rings

The seat is the fixed, pressure-containing portion of a valve that comes in contact with
the closure member of the valve. The seat can be all metal construction, or it can incorporate soft conforming seat inserts, such as elastomers or plastics, to make a tighter seal
or to reduce the required load to seat.
For seat tightness, the objective is to block off, or minimize, the path formed by the
valleys on the seating surface. An enlarged view of the valleys in mating surfaces is
shown in Figure 3-7. Filling in the valleys requires the compressive stresses in the
mating surfaces to be of sufficient magnitude to elastically or plastically deform the
mating surfaces until the leak path is blocked off.
A. Low Seating Force
Elastic or
Plastic
Deformation
B. High Seating Force
Figure 3-7
Seat Joint Mating Surfaces
In addition to the basic design of the seat itself, other factors that directly affect seating
and operability are distortions that can occur at the disc/seat interface due to pressure,
thermal gradients, and mechanical loads transmitted to the valve body by the adjacent
piping. As shown in Figure 3-8, applied bending moments on gate valve bodies cause
the seat plane to tilt and distort, which can result in leakage and gate pinching in
wedge-type valves. In globe valves, body distortions produce ovality in the seat, which
lead to mismatch with the circular seating area on the tapered seated plugs. Distortions
caused by line loads become more severe when venturi-type valves or valves that are
smaller than the pipeline size are installed with upstream and downstream reducers.
3-14

Seat Plane
Distortion
Vertical
Moment
Vertical
Moment
Original Seat Face

Distorted Seat Face
Horizontal
Moment
Horizontal
Moment
Seat Plane Distortion
Figure 3-8
Seat Plane Distortion under Vertical and Horizontal Bending Moments
To avoid leakage or binding problems caused by line loads, valves should not be located at points of large line loads. Also, the section modulus of the valve body should
be significantly greater than the pipe to keep the stresses and distortions within acceptable limits. Axisymmetric-type valves, such as ball and butterfly, tend to be stiffer and
are less sensitive to line loads.
3.2.2.1 Metal-to-Metal Seating
When using metal-to-metal seating, the high compressive stresses required to produce
surface conformance between the two seating surfaces are achieved by making narrow
line-to-line contact between the disc or plug and the seat. Narrow line-to-line contact
should provide a certain minimum width in order to establish a tight seal and prevent
indentation damage caused by the plug on the seat. In addition, the seat should have
enough base width to provide an adequate backup cross-section that is capable of
supporting the high compressive stress at the disc-seat interface without yielding the
base material. In control valves, seat loading is usually expressed as pounds of force
3-15

per linear inch of mean seat joint circumference. For globe-type control valves using
line-to-line contact, loading can vary from 25 pounds per inch to 600 pounds per inch,
and most manufacturers rely on their own tests to develop specific magnitudes. Based
on the ISA Handbook of Control Valves, typical values are:
1. Twenty-five pounds per inch (4.35 kN/m)Low pressure drop service, leak-tight
shutoff is not required.
2. Fifty pounds per inch (8.7 kN/m)Moderate pressure drop service, slight leakage
expected (0. 1% Cv maximum).
3. One hundred pounds per inch (17.5 kN/m)Near drop-tight service (0.01% Cv
maximum) seals 3,000 psi pressure drop on 0.015-inch width, 30 joint of 316 SS.
4. Three hundred pounds per inch (52.0 kN/m)Drop-tight service (seals 6,000 psi on
0.025-inch width, 20 joint of AISI 440-C SS, hardness 55 Rockwell c scale (Rc).
5. Six hundred pounds per inch (105 kN/m)Pressure service greater than 6,000 psi.
Although the apparent average compressive seating stress on items 3 and 4 are
13,000 psi (89 MPa) and 35,000 psi (241 MPa), which is less than the yield strength of the
material, localized contact stresses at the peaks of the surface irregularities are much
higher, thus providing the surface yielding needed to accomplish a seal.
The required degree of seat tightness and accompanying stem thrust should be reasonably selected. Specifying high seat tightness increases the size and cost of the actuator
needed to develop the higher loads.
As an alternative to using high contact forces, the mating surfaces can be
superfinished to achieve a good seal. However, this superfinish can degrade quickly
in applications where fluid contaminants are present that can get trapped between the
mating surfaces during opening and closing action. Another common method used to
accomplish a seal is to lap the disc and seat during assembly; however, lapping the
surfaces should be limited so that a wide contact band does not develop.
Developing high compressive stress to achieve good seating should be weighed against
potential damage due to galling or gross surface yielding. Surfaces that slide under
load, such as the disc of a gate valve, should be sized so that contact stress is maintained
below the galling threshold for the material combination. Depending on the mating
materials and the details of the actual geometry, the calculated average contact stress to
cause galling can vary from as low as 2,000 psi (13.8 MPa) for some stainless steels to as
high as 50,000 psi (344.7 MPa) for cobalt-based materials such as Stellite 6. In reality, the
contact stress at the surface is not uniform, due to the irregular and uneven loading
encountered in actual application; therefore, the average contact stress should be limited to lower values. Typically, the contact stress for Stellite 6 is limited to 20,000 psi
(137.9 MPa) to avoid galling in sliding applications.
3-16

Typical seating configurations employed in globe valves are shown in Figure 3-9. The
seat design shown in Figure 3-9a, used in low pressure globe applications, provides the
advantage of not requiring precise alignment between the disc and seat, and it eliminates galling because the surfaces move perpendicular to each other during loading.
The seat design, shown in Figures 3-9b, 3-9c, and 3-9d, allows higher contact stress to be
developed due to the narrower contact band between the mating surfaces; however, it
requires better control of alignment between the disc and seat. As shown in Figures
3-9c and 3-9d, taper angles (half-cone angles) between 15 and 45 are in use in various
disc designs. Even though taper angles as small as 15 have been used in some valves,
they should be avoided because it has been found that for reliable nonsticking operation
of the disc, magnitudes of 30 and higher should be used.
A
Seat Angle
45
Disc
Disc
Seat
Seat
D
15
Disc
Disc
45
Seat
Seat
Figure 3-9
Typical Globe Valve Seating Configurations
When selecting the disc/seat contact geometry and materials, the potential for cross ring
indentation-type damage should also be considered. Seat ring indentation, as shown in
Figure 3-10, is caused when a hard narrow surface and a soft wider surface contact, and
3-17

the softer material yields. The indentation left on the softer component can create leakage
during a subsequent shutoff if the normal clearances present in the assembly of the plugto-seat components allow the new seating band to cross the previous indentation. Cross
ring indentation damage and its adverse effect on shutoff can be prevented by making the
component of a softer material narrower than the wider component.
Plug
Impression of Disc
on Soft Seat
Leak
Path
Seat
Figure 3-10
Cross Ring Indentation
3.2.2.2 Soft Seating
Soft seats are used to accomplish good seating with much lower contact force than in
metal-to-metal seats. It is easier to deform the softer materials and fill out the valleys in
the mating surfaces with considerably lower forces. In most designs, the soft seat rings
provide the primary seating, with metal-to-metal closure acting as a secondary seal in
case of damage or failure of the soft seal material. This secondary metal-to-metal contact also makes the seats fire safe and allows some degree of seat tightness, should the
resilient seat ring fail. Whenever the temperature, radiation, and pressure environment
permit, soft seals should be strongly considered because of the ease in accomplishing
good seating with soft seals.
Because seat ring materials do not have the required strength and stiffness to resist rupture
against pressure, and blowout against differential pressure, they must be securely clamped
in the seat. Several methods of restraining the seat ring in globe valves are shown in
Figure 3-11. The same restraint methods are employed in gate and check valves.
3-18

Primary Elastomer
Seal Ring
Backup Metal
Seal Ring
Valve Disk
Clamp
Elastic
Seal
Clamp Bolts
A. Seal Clamped in Plug
B. Seal Clamped in Seat Ring

Unvented Gland,
150 PSI P Limit
Vented Gland,
1,500 PSI P Limit
O-Rings
Seated
C. O-Rings on Double
V-Port Plug (for Low P)
D. O-Ring in Dove-Tail Gland

(for Higher P)
Figure 3-11
Soft Seat Retention Methods
The material properties to be considered in the selection of a soft seat ring are:
Fluid compatibility including chemical reaction, swelling, loss of hardness, permeability, and degradation
Room for thermal expansion
Hardness
Permanent set and extrusion under load
Rate of recovery upon removal of the load
3-19

Tensile and compressive strength

Radiation resistance
Abrasion resistance
Wear resistance
Thermal resistance
3.2.2.3 Seat Attachment
The method of attachment and sealing of the leakage path between the seat and the
body is as important as the seat itself. Methods of attaching fixed seats to the body are
shown in Figure 3-12, which shows screwing, welding, interference fitting the seat ring
into the body or seat pocket using press or shrink fits, bolting, clamping between two
pieces, and simply welding and machining the seat face into the body. Sealing at the
body is achieved using elastomers, gaskets, soft metals, metal-to-metal sealing by interference, and seal welding. The seat-to-body restraint should be independent of the seat
loading and should not depend on the seat load to achieve a seal. Inherent in fixed seat
designs is the problem that body distortions, caused by pressure, thermal gradients, and
line loads, are transmitted directly to the seat. These distortions create leakage paths
between the disc-to-seat mating surfaces in metal-to-metal seating unless some flexibility is designed into the disc (as in flex disc gate valves) or the globe valve seat, as shown
in Figure 3-13. The type of attachment to the body should also consider maintenance
that might be required on the seat.
3-20

Valve Body with Seat Ring Bore
Seat Ring
Seal Weld
Valve Body
Seat Ring
Hardfacing
Thread
A. Screwed
D. Welded-In Seat Ring
Retainer Bolt
Gasket
Valve Body
Seat
Ring
Seat Ring
Brazing Material
Valve Body
B. Bolted Gasket
Flexible
O-Ring
E. Brazed
Valve Body
Welded Hard Facing
Seat Ring
Valve Body
C. Integral Hardfacing
F. Axially Clamped
Figure 3-12
Methods for Attaching Seat to Body
3-21

Valve Body
Seat Clamp
Flexible Seat
Disc
Figure 3-13
Flexible Seat
When using gaskets, the seat should incorporate a metal-to-metal stop as shown in
Figure 3-11B to limit the amount of compression applied to the gasket because repeated
stress cycling of the gasket will lead to relaxation of the joint seal and eventual leakage.
Metal type gaskets should not be reused unless explicitly permitted by the gasket vendor.
Floating seats, such as those used in trunnion-mounted ball valves, do not require
independent restraints, but are held in place by the ball itself. Sealing of the floating
seat in the body is accomplished using elastomer or packing seals, as shown in
Figure 3-14. One ball valve design for high temperature service applications uses
spring-loaded packing seals as shown in Figure 3-15.
Spring
Body Cavity
O-Ring
Seat Ring
Seat Ring Insert
Sealant Channel
Figure 3-14
Floating Seat
3-22

Stem
Closure Element
Bonnet
Body
Seat
Packing
Spring
Figure 3-15
Spring-Loaded Packing Seals
3.2.3 Disc-to-Stem Connection

The disc-to-stem connection joint, which transmits the load from the actuator to the
disc, should be designed to have equal or greater strength than the stem itself. However, only the API Code imposes this requirement, and several valve manufacturers
supplying valves to the power industry do not follow this guideline. Depending on the
valve type, the joint can be fixed, free to rotate, or allow freedom for the disc to float
laterally, as shown in Figure 3-16.
3-23

Stem
Stem
Disk (Poppet)
Poppet
Collar
Body
Seat
Poppet
Body
Seat
Ring
Body
A. Fixed, Integral
B. Free-to-Rotate
Stem
Bonnet
Disk
Stem
Disc
Articulated Link
Guide Slot
Guide Bar/Cam
Downstream Seat
Tee
Square Head
Valve Body
C. Cam-Guided, Articulated-Link
Stem-to-Disc Connection
D. Laterally Floating
Figure 3-16
Stem Connections
3-24

3.2.3.1 Fixed Joints

Typical fixed joint disc-to-stem connections commonly used are integral, welded, and
screwed. These connections are normally used in non-rotating stem applications where
the stem and seat maintain their axial alignment. When this joint is used in a globe valve
application, an external means to prevent stem rotation should be provided. This is
necessary to prevent galling at the disc-seat interface. When used in wedging-type gate
valves, precautions should be taken to ensure that excessive lateral displacement of the
stem will not cause binding of the stem in the bonnet stuffing box area.
3.2.3.2 Free-to-Rotate Connections
Free-to-rotate connections should be used in rotating stem applications or when disc-toseat rotation is undesirable. These joints are frequently found in globe valves and nonrising stem gate valves. In non-rising stem gate valves, the disc-to-stem joint is
threaded so that the rotation of the stem in the disc opens and closes the valve. Most
free-to-rotate connections provide some limited lateral disc displacement to prevent
stem binding and allow the disc to align itself with respect to the seat face. Free-torotate connections should incorporate some means of preventing the disc from spinning. Asymmetric flow created by multiple elbows upstream can cause the disc to spin;
in fact, this has occurred in some swing check valve designs. Spinning discs can damage the disc and seat upon contact, and can cause premature failure of the connection
due to excessive wear.
3.2.3.3 Laterally Floating Connections
Floating connections are generally T-slot designs that permit assembly of the joint by
simply sliding the parts together in a lateral direction. The T-slot is usually oriented in
the direction of the flow (that is, in line with the expected disc displacement) to permit
sliding to occur without causing stem binding.
These joints are most commonly found in gate valve applications where the gate receives its alignment from guides in the body during the complete open-to-close cycle.
These joints incorporate an anti-rotation feature, such as a square head, to prevent stem
rotation.
As shown in Figure 3-16c, another type of design found in power plants uses a double
articulated link-type stem-to-disc connection to allow the wedge to float freely in the
lateral direction without causing side loads on the stem or uneven loading of the
wedge-to-seat face.
3-25

3.2.4 Disc/Stem Guide Arrangements

Guides are required for certain valve types to provide proper alignment of moving
parts and prevent poor valve performance or inoperability. These guides are manufactured from soft materials or from very hard anti-wear or anti-galling materials, depending on the application and service.
3.2.4.1 Wedge Gate Guides
Gate guides (see Figure 3-17) are provided specifically on wedge gate valves to keep the
gate away from the seat faces, except for a small distance very near the fully-closed
position, in order to minimize wear on the seating faces. Typically, the sliding surfaces
on the gate and guide are overlaid with hardfacing materials to prevent galling of the
sliding interfaces, due to the load generated by the differential pressure acting across
the gate as the valve is being closed or due to the gate weight when the valve is in a
position other than with the stem vertical. The clearance between the gate slots and the
guide should not be so excessive that gate tilting occurs, thus causing accelerated wear
or deterioration of the seating faces.
3-26

Gate
Gate Guide
Figure 3-17
Gate Valve Gate Guide
3-27

3.2.4.2 Stem Guides

Stem guides (see Figure 4-1) are most commonly found in globe valves. Stem guides,
which provide alignment for the plug, are typically manufactured from softer materials
to provide some lubricity and to prevent galling of the stem. Stem guides should be
provided where significant side loads on the plug are present. These forces can be
generated by side discharge, such as in angle globe valves. Stem guides are also provided when the stem is relatively long and flexible, such as in extended bonnet globe
valves and in lift check valves (see Figure 7-5).
3.2.4.3 Disc Guides
Disc guides (see Figures 6-9 and 6-11) are most commonly found in control, relief, and
safety valves. These guides provide alignment between the disc and seats, and offer
lateral support for uneven fluid discharge forces.
3-28

4
VALVE MATERIALS
4.1 Trim Components and Materials

Components of the valve considered to be trim consist of the removable or in-line
repairable internal parts that contact the flowing fluid. As an example, in globe-type
control valves, the plug or disc, seats, stem, guides, bushings, and cages are trim components (see Figures 4-1 and 4-2). Other components considered trim, but that do not
come into direct contact with the fluid, are the components that make up the stuffing
box: the packing gland, spring, lantern ring, and packing retainer ring. Secondary trim
parts are stem-to-disc attachment, seat retaining rings, seat-to-body seals, spacers, and
so on. Parts not included as trim are components that define the valve pressure boundary: the body, bonnet, body closures, and bonnet and body bolts and nuts. Closure
gaskets and seals are neither pressure boundary components nor trim components, but
maintain the leak-tight integrity of the valve [1, 2].
4-1

Valve Plug Stem
Packing Flange
Gland Follower
Packing
Packing Spring
Packing
Box Ring
Wiper Ring
Stem Bushing
Seat Ring
Valve
Plug/
Disc
Seat Ring
Stem
Bushing
Figure 4-1
Double-Seated Globe Valve Trim Components
Bonnet
Cage Gasket
Sliding Seal
Balancing Hole
Cage/Disc Guide
Seat
Valve Disc (Plug)
Figure 4-2
Balanced Disc Cage-Style Valve
4-2

Strained-hardened 316 SS, quenched and tempered 410 SS, and precipitation-hardened
17-4 PH SS are the most commonly used materials for valve stems and other valve trim
materials. Although not as corrosion resistant as 316 SS, the higher strength and correspondingly higher allowable stresses make the 410 SS and 17-4 PH materials much
more attractive for larger sizes and higher pressure rated valves, because smaller diameter stems can be used. Hardsurfacing trim materials are discussed in Section 4.3.
4.2 Material Selection Practices
In general, trim material selection should consider all of the important factors discussed
below, in addition to mechanical strength considerations.
4.2.1 Design Practices to Minimize Corrosion

Corrosion in valves can be minimized or eliminated by selecting materials that do not
react with the fluid or with the material around them. There are different types of corrosion and the corrosion type dictates the material required. Corrosion control is especially important in valves that are subjected to fluids that pose a hazard if allowed to
leak into the environment.
Corrosion is the deterioration of a metal by reaction with the environment. Corrosion is
generally controlled by selecting corrosion-resistant materials. Corrosion resistance of a
component can be improved by covering the wetted surface with a plating, cladding, or
by heat-treating. The rate of corrosion is influenced by the fluid velocity and media
temperature. Table 4-1 lists some commonly used trim materials and their suitability for
power plant applications.
4-3
4-4
Bronze
Inconel
Monel
Hastelloy B
Hastelloy C
Titanium
75A
Nickel
Alloy 20
Type 416
Hard
Type 440
Hard
17-4 PH
Alloy 6
(Co- Cr)
ENC*
Cr Plate
Al Bronze
316
SS
Bronze
SSatisfactory
FFair
PPoor
*Electroless Nickel Coating
316 SS
Key:
304 SS
304
SST
Inconel
Monel
Hastelloy
B
Hastelloy
C
Titaniu
m 75A
Table 4-1
Chart of Wear and Galling Resistance of Material Combinations
Nickel
Alloy
20
Type
416
Hard
Type
440
Hard
17-4
PH
Alloy 6
(Co- Cr)
ENC*
Cr
Plate
Al
Bronze

Galvanic corrosion is often found in valves due to the use of dissimilar materials for the
body and trim. The galvanic series (see Table 4-2) is used to give an indication of the
rate of corrosion between different metals or alloys when they are in contact in an
electrolyte, such as seawater. Metals close to the active end of the table will behave as an
anode and corrode, while metals close to the noble end will act as a cathode and be preserved. The distance between two metals in the chart is usually an indication of corrosion rate. This process is referred to as cathodic protection, with the cathodic material
receiving material deposits from the sacrificial anode.
Table 4-2
Metals in Order of Corrosion Rate
Corroded End (Anodic or Least Noble)
Aluminum
Mild Steel (Carbon)
Cast Iron
Ni-resist
Type 410 stainless steel (active)
Lead-tin solder
NOREM hardfacing alloys
Types 304 and 316 stainless steel (active)
Cobalt-base hardfacing alloys
Lead and tin
Muntz metal, manganese-bronze, and naval brass
Nickel-base hardfacing alloy
Nickel 200 (active) and Inconel Alloy 600 (active)
Yellow brass, admiralty brass, aluminum bronze, red brass,

copper, silicon bronze, 70-30 copper nickel, comp. G-bronze,
and comp. M-bronze
Nickel 200 (passive) and Inconel Alloy 600 (passive)
Monel Alloy 400
Types 304 and 316 stainless steel (passive) and Incoloy

Alloy 825
Incoloy Alloy 625, Hastelloy Alloy C and titanium
Protected End (Cathodic or Most Noble)
Area differences also affect galvanic corrosion. A larger anodic area, compared to the
cathodic area, is preferred because it reduces the amount of corrosion. As an example, a
stainless steel bolt in a carbon steel body usually causes the carbon steel to corrode at
only a slightly increased rate, whereas, a carbon steel bolt in a stainless steel body corrodes at a rapid rate because the stainless steel acts as a large cathode.
4-5

4.2.2 Design Practices to Minimize Erosion

Erosion is wear damage in which loss of material occurs due to the action of moving
particles carried in a fluid stream. This action is most severe when the velocity of the fluid
is high, such as during valve throttling or closing and opening under high pressure drops.
Entrained sand, slurries, catalyst fines, and liquid particles in flashing flow are sometimes
associated with this type of wear. The selection of materials for the pressure containment
parts, that is, the body and bonnet, is rather limited from the standpoint of their ability to
withstand erosion, but the use of sacrificial liners at the areas of impingement has been
successful. There are four principal types of erosion: (1) abrasive particle, (2) cavitation,
(3) erosion-corrosion, and (4) high velocity fluid impingement. These types of erosion and
specific guidance regarding how to improve the resistance of the trim materials to their
effects are discussed in the following paragraphs.
4.2.2.1 Abrasive Erosion
In abrasive erosion, small particles that are harder than the trim surface are carried at high
velocity in the fluid stream and impinge upon and scour away the trim metal. Resistance
of materials to impingement erosion varies with the angle of impingement. At low impingement angles (< 15 with respect to the surface), hardfacing materials with large
amounts of carbides, such as Stellite 1, are recommended. At high impingement angles
(> 80), hardfacing alloys with large amounts of relatively ductile matrix, material such as
cobalt in Stellite 21, are recommended. Stellite 6, however, has been found to provide the
best combination of erosion resistance and wear resistance as a trim material for the
widest range of valve geometries that have large variations in impingement angles. However, these cobalt-based materials will be activated if they are in fluids that are transported through the reactor core region, thus creating a radiation concern in that the cobalt
may plate out on the interior walls of a piping system or be captured in crevices known as
crud-traps. Cobalt-free alternatives, which are discussed in Section 4.3.2, have been
found to provide very good abrasive erosion resistance.
4.2.2.2 Cavitation Erosion
Cavitation occurs as the result of vapor bubbles forming when the pressure of a liquid
flowing in the restricted passages of a valve becomes less than the vapor pressure of the
liquid at that temperature. The bubbles then collapse as the flow area enlarges and the
pressure recovers. The implosion of bubbles produces shock waves and very high
localized stresses at the surface of the metal, causing the material to fail and detach from
the surface.
Because no known material can withstand continuous severe cavitation service without
failure, ease of trim replacement should be a strong consideration for service in cavitating conditions. Cobalt-based hardfacing alloys, such as Stellite 6 and Stellite 21, have
found extensive use for resisting cavitation erosion. Other materials used are Type
440/C, No. 6 Colmonoy, hardened tool-steel, and sintered tungsten carbide with a
nickel binder. Recent testing has shown the EPRI-developed NOREM alloys to be more
resistant to cavitation erosion than the Stellite Alloys 6 and 21 [10].
4-6

Cavitation erosion can be reduced by system design; by selecting the hardest trim
material that will not crack from the impact of repeated valve closure and thermal
shock; by using multiple valves to distribute the total pressure drop by providing back
pressure; by using valves that incorporate multiple pressure drop stages designed to
prevent cavitation through any one stage.
4.2.2.3 Combined Erosion and Corrosion
Both erosion and corrosion can occur in a piping system; although not simultaneously.
The erosion strips away the protective coating of corrosion, thus allowing additional
corrosion to occur, repeating the cycle. Accelerated failures of carbon-steel piping and
fittings have occurred in feedwater service due to a combined erosion-corrosion phenomenon. Valves and other components installed in these systems are subjected to the
same degradation mode. The failures are attributed to a single phase erosion-corrosion
phenomenon that happens to plain carbon steel when exposed to flowing water having
a low dissolved oxygen content (less than 10 ppb) in combination with a pH value less
than about 9.3.
Erosion-corrosion is essentially a flow-assisted dissolution process of the magnetite
corrosion film normally present under deoxygenated feedwater conditions. This phenomenon results in much higher metal corrosion rates than would normally be encountered. Loss rates can be greater than 1 mm (about 0.040 inch) per year in severe cases.
The worst attack occurs in areas of the feedwater system where temperatures are between 260F and 400F (127C and 204C).
The phenomenon is critically dependent on a number of variables, particularly flow
velocity, temperature, pH, and oxygen content of the feedwater, and the elemental
composition of the steel. A comparison of the critical operational variables to typical
PWR feedwater conditions is provided in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3
Critical Variables for Accelerated Erosion-Corrosion
Critical Operational
Accelerated Variables for
Erosion-Corrosion
Typical PWR
Feedwater Condition
pH less than 9.3
pH between 8.8 and 9.6
Temperatures between
212 F (100 C) and 525 F (275 C), with
worst attack between
260 F (127 C) and 400 F (204 C)
Varies depending on location in system,

typically between 100F (38C) and
450F (232C)
Dissolved oxygen content

less than 10 ppb
Dissolved oxygen content less than 5 ppb in

hot standby and less than 3 ppb in power operation
Turbulent hydrodynamic
conditions (high fluid
flow velocities)
Fluid flow velocity varies throughout the system.

High localized velocities in fitting and valves
are common.
4-7

Valve parts intended for PWR feedwater applications, particularly parts exposed to highly
turbulent flow, should not be constructed of plain carbon steel. The use of low-alloy steel,
with at least 0.5% chrome, has been shown to significantly reduce erosion-corrosion attack
and should be used as a replacement material whenever possible. Typical replacement
materials would be !s Cr-!s Mo Plate (A-387, Type 2), !s Cr-!s Mo Plate(A-387, Type 12),
!s Cr-!s Mo Plate Forging (A-182, Type F12 and A-336, Class F12), 1!f Cr-!s Mo Casting (A-217,
Type WC6) and 1!f Cr-!s Mo Bar (A-739, Grade B11).
4.2.2.4 High Velocity Fluid Impingement Erosion
High velocity fluid impingement erosion occurs when extremely high velocity fluid jets
turn abruptly, bouncing off one surface to impinge and erode the adjacent part. Impingement erosion can be a form of erosion-corrosion, whereby the high velocity fluid
jet blasts away the protective surface coating as rapidly as it forms. Average fluid velocity must exceed several hundred feet per second for impingement erosion to occur.
Fluid impingement erosion can be prevented or reduced using the same techniques and
materials for improving resistance to abrasive erosion and cavitation erosion.
4.2.3 Design Practices to Minimize Wear and Galling

Wear and galling of seating materials is responsible for many check valve problems,
especially those involving operability. Depending on the extent of the damage, the
valve might require more force than normal to actuate it, or damage might even make
the valve inoperable. In some cases, the damage can be so severe that even the structural integrity of the valve is compromised.
Galling is a condition that occurs on the rubbing surfaces of mating parts where material transfer results in localized welding, with subsequent spalling and a further roughening of the surfaces. Galling causes the damaged material to:
Impede the valve during stroking
Degrade the seat joint
Increase the operating force
Make the valve completely inoperable (in the worst case)
Factors affecting galling include the type of materials in contact, temperature, surface
finish, hardness, contact pressure, and the line fluid. Higher temperatures will generally
anneal or soften the metals, increasing their galling potential.
Test data show that hardness is the most significant factor affecting wear; the harder the
material, the less the wear. Galling like wearing, can be prevented by:
Using hard materials for one or preferably both parts
Avoiding excessive contact stresses
Providing adequate operating clearances
4-8

Using an appropriate lubricant between the sliding surfaces

Selecting pairs of material with low galling potential; using different materials for
components in contact, rather than the same material
Breaking in these components by cycling under low load before subjecting them to
the full load
4.3 Hardfacing
One of the most common methods used to prevent galling and excessive wear is
hardfacing. Hardfacing is the process of applyingby welding, plasma-spraying, or
flame-sprayinga point, edge, or layer of wear-resistant metal onto another metal to
increase its resistance to abrasion, erosion, or galling. In some cases, hardfacing is applied to impart some corrosion resistance to the base metal. For wear resistance, hardness is required only on the surface of the metal.
Hardfacing is generally used when external lubrication is not feasible or is inadequate to
give the desired service life, and it is usually applied only to the critical surfaces. In contrast to heat treatment to achieve high surface hardness, hardfacing can be used effectively in very large components where the contact area is small and heat treatment of the
entire component would be impractical. Also, because hardfacing is a welding technique,
it can be used for in-line repair or to refurbish large components without dismantling.
Hardfacing on valves is typically used on the plug or disc-to-seat joint (both on the disc
and on the seat) to maintain a tight seal. Other areas that are often overlaid include the
stem, bushing, and disc or plug guides.
No particular restrictions are imposed when using a base metal of carbon steel, but
there are some restrictions when using other metals, including stainless steels. For most
metals, it is desirable to preheat the base metal to prevent cracking of the hardfacing, as
cooling occurs.
In some cases, hardfacing can be achieved by case-hardening techniques, such as carburizing and nitriding. These superficial hardness treatments usually produce casehardened depths of less than 0.025 inch that are normally not detected by conventional
hardness measurement, such as Brinell and Rockwell tests, but require microhardness
testing methods.
4.3.1 Cobalt-Base Alloys (Stellites)

Cobalt-chrome and tungsten-carbide are the principal materials used in hardfacing. These
materials consist of hard tungsten and chromium particles in a softer cobalt matrix.
Stellite is a trade name typically associated with these types of materials. They are often
referred to as AMS (American Materials Society) 5387 or CoCr (Cobalt-Chrome).
Stellite 6 (CrCo-A) is used on valve seats, while the slightly harder, but more brittle,
Stellite 12 (CoCr-B) can be used on plugs. For field repair of worn surfaces, Stellite 21 is
4-9

less hard, more ductile, and has lower cracking tendencies, making its use more practical, even though its wear properties are not as good as Stellite 6. For smaller valve parts,
the disc or plug and seats can be made of solid Stellite material.
Stellites have a reputation for being hard to apply. In particular, they are susceptible to
stress or shrink cracking during cooling. To a large extent, this is an unavoidable sideeffect of being a brittle material, and similar problems occur with all hardfacing
materials. Generally, the harder the deposited material, the more susceptible it is to
cracking. These problems can be reduced or eliminated by utilizing good welding
practices, preheating the base material, and minimizing the deposited thickness to less
than 0.200 inch (5 mm). Additional suggestions are provided in Section 14.
In contrast to the cobalt-chrome materials, which are supplied in a wire form and applied
using conventional welding techniques, tungsten-carbides are usually applied to all trim
shapes by the spray-welding process and are then fused to give a nonporous surface.
Service temperature, thermal shock, and the required corrosion-resistance must be considered when using tungsten-carbide. Loading of the valve seat must be uniform, and impact
forces during closure should be low to prevent cracking of tungsten-carbide.
Refer to Section 11 for chemistry specifications.
4.3.2 Cobalt-Free Alloys

Cobalt-60 has been identified as a major isotope responsible for out-of-core radiation
contamination problems in the nuclear power industry. Cobalt-60 is an activation product
of natural cobalt, which is found in cobalt-based alloys. Surfaces subject to high wear do
wear over time, and metallic particles are introduced into the pipeline due to seat lapping
and other valve maintenance. Valve repair, such as seat lapping to decrease seat leakage,
produces significant amounts of cobalt grinding debris.
Naturally occurring cobalt in these alloys is 100% Cobalt-59. If it is in a pathway to the
reactor vessel, alloy particles will pass through the core, become exposed to thermal
neutron flux, and become activated to Cobalt-60. This isotope has a half life of 5.25 years
and emits 1.3 megaelectronvolt (MeV) gamma rays. These small cobalt particles accumulate in the piping system in crevices and cracks where the flow velocity is low, and
in stagnant pockets or crud traps that are inherent in the design of some valve bodies.
The accumulation of this radioactive contamination increases with time and becomes a
major hindrance to access for maintenance work, raising ALARA (radiation levels as
low as reasonably achievable) concerns.
A number of years ago, the high price and uncertain availability of cobalt-based alloys
led to efforts by manufacturers to develop alternate hardfacing materials using nickelbased, cobalt-free alloys such as ASTM A565 Grade 616, Deloro 40 and 50, and
Colmonoy 4 and 5 (NiCr-A and NiCr-B, respectively).
4-10

These alloys exhibit lower mechanical and corrosion-resistance attributes than cobaltbased alloys and initially had limited use and acceptance. However, their overall properties are sufficiently good that their potential for use in nuclear valves should not be
ignored.
More recently, there have also been renewed efforts to develop new low-cobalt or
cobalt-free alloys (nickel-based or iron-based) that reduce the exposure of service personnel to radiation due to Cobalt-60. Several EPRI-sponsored efforts have been conducted to evaluate existing low-cobalt alloys or cobalt-free hardfacing materials and to
develop new cobalt-free alloys as a valid alternative for hardfacing.
Further evaluation of cobalt-free alloys by EPRI, material manufacturers, and valve manufacturers continues, along with the development of new iron-based cobalt-free alloys and other cobaltfree alloys. These evaluations include testing for mechanical properties and corrosion resistance
and some in situ valve testing.
EPRI evaluation and testing has led to the development of the NOREM cobalt-free, iron-based
hardfacing alloy. Test results confirm that the NOREM 02 and 02A Alloys provide galling wear,
cavitation erosion resistance, corrosion resistance, hardness, and friction characteristics comparable to Stellite 6, and weldability characteristics equal to Stellite 21 [10].
NOREM has been used extensively in nuclear applications by valve manufacturers in cast form
(for manufacture of seat rings or discs) and in weld material form for application by welding.
Several utilities and service vendors have also applied the welding products in situ.
Other cobalt-free materials being evaluated or marketed include:
Valloy 1
Delchrome 91
Tristelle 5183
Nucalloy 453 and 488
4.4 Resilient (Soft) Seating
Resilient seats are used to accomplish good seating with much lower contact force than
in metal-to-metal seats. It is easier to deform the softer materials and fill out the valleys
in the mating surfaces. In most designs, the soft seat rings provide the primary seating,
with metal-to-metal closure acting as a secondary seal in case of damage or failure of
the soft seat material.
For some designs with stringent leakage rate requirements, such as those required for
containment isolation, the soft seat is very beneficial. It can be designed to control
leakage at low pressure differentials. As the pressure increases, the seating relies on
metal-to-metal contact.
4-11

This secondary metal-to-metal contact also makes the seats fire safe and allows some
degree of seat tightness, should the resilient seat ring fail. Whenever the temperature,
radiation, and pressure environment permit, soft seals should be strongly considered
because of the ease in accomplishing good seating with soft seals.
Because resilient seat ring materials do not have the required strength and stiffness to
resist rupture against pressure and blowout against differential pressure, they must be
securely clamped in the seat or installed in a grooved pocket.
The material properties to be considered in the selection of a soft seat ring are:
Room for thermal expansion
Hardness
Permanent set and extrusion under load
Rate of recovery upon removal of the load
Tensile and compressive strength
Radiation resistance
Abrasion resistance
Wear resistance
Thermal resistance
Halogen content and stability under high temperature and radiation conditions
Fluid compatibility including chemical reaction, swelling, loss of hardness, permeability, and degradation
Common elastomeric materials used in resilient valve seats and some of their respective
properties are listed in Table 4-4.
4-12

Table 4-4
Properties of Plastics and Elastomers Used for Soft Seats [8]
TEFLON
(Halon, TFE, and Fluon)
Radiation resistance: maximum 10 4 rads

Low coefficient of friction
High chemical resistance
Temperature limit of 400 F (204 C)
Susceptible to abrasion
TEFLON
(Glass Filled)
Radiation resistance: maximum 10 4 rads

Low to moderate coefficient of friction
Susceptible to abrasion, but better than unfilled teflon
NYLON
(Zytel, Nypel, and Fosta)
Radiation resistance: 104 rads

High coefficient of friction
Mode rate to low chemical resistance
Not susceptible to abrasion
KEL-F (CTFE)

Good chemical resistance
Susceptible to abrasion
TEFZEL

Moderate resistance to abrasion
POLYETHYLENE

Low to moderate coefficient of friction
NATURAL
GUM RUBBER

Good abrasion resistance
BUNA-N

High resistance to petroleum products
VITON

Good chemical resistance
ETHYLENE,

PROPYLENE,
TERPOLYMER
4-13

4.5 Pressure-Retaining Materials

Materials commonly used for pressure-boundary parts (as defined in ASME III, Code
Case N62, and ANSI B16.34) fall into three categories: stainless steels or other corrosionresistant alloys, carbon steels, and low-alloy steels. The selection of materials is dependent on such factors as resistance to corrosion and/or erosion, and to some extent, the
pressure/temperature rating for the various materials. All materials should be selected
based on specific service conditions. It is common practice for the valve body to match
the piping material.
Typical valve pressure-boundary materials and their advantages and disadvantages are
discussed below. Table 2-5 depicts specific material specifications and grades commonly used for valve pressure-boundary parts.
The same material or product form is not required to be used for the valve bonnet as for
the body. The rating applied, however, must be based on the valve body, with the
bonnet designed and material selected accordingly.
Stainless steelSA/A351 CF3 and CF8, SA/A182 F304, F316 and F347
The superior erosion resistance of stainless steel is a common reason for its selection for
a high-velocity system. Further, the required retention of water purity in a demineralized water system requires the use of stainless steels, because the small amounts of
corrosion products that could result from the use of carbon steel cannot be tolerated.
The boric acid content of a pressurized water reactor coolant system also leads to the
selection of a stainless steel body and bonnet.
Advantages:
Good high temperature/pressure performance
Good general corrosion resistance
Disadvantage:
High initial cost
Carbon steelSA/A 216, WCB and WCC, SA/A 105, or SA/A 350
Carbon steel valves are used in the steam, feedwater, extraction steam, and condensate
systems, where the water chemistry can be controlled to restrict the corrosion rate.
Carbon steels and stainless steels have yield strengths about equal at room temperature.
At the higher operating temperatures of a water-cooled reactor (500F to 600F) (260C
to 316C), the yield strength of carbon steel is greater than that of stainless steel.
Carbon steel is not recommended for prolonged usage above 800F (427C) because of
its potential graphitization and creep damage.
4-14

Advantages:
Widely used (available)
Moderately priced
Disadvantages:
Not appropriate for prolonged service over 800F (427C)
Poor chemical resistance to most corrosives
Poor resistance to erosion by high velocity vapor droplets, such as flashing condensate or wet steam
Never appropriate for any trim parts, except base material for a disc that is overlaid
with corrosion-resistant material at the seat
Chrome-moly low- (carbon) alloy steelSA/A217 WC6 and WC9, SA-182 F11 and F22
For steam service that has a high moisture content and that might result in erosion,
2!f Cr-1Mo or 1!!f Cr-!s Mo material should be used for the valve body and bonnet, even
though the temperature and water chemistry would permit carbon steel. In addition, for
high-velocity service, 2!f Cr-1Mo is superior to carbon steel.
Low-alloy steels generally have a significantly higher yield strength at higher operating
temperatures than carbon or stainless steels.
Advantages:
Can operate continuously at high temperatures
Price is reasonable, considering its superior characteristics
Has better resistance to corrosion than carbon steel
Gives additional erosion resistance and is, therefore, recommended on flashing or
erosive service
Disadvantage:
Welding must be followed by post-weld heat treating for thicker cross-sections.
Many other materials are available for valves, such as cast iron (A-126), ductile iron (A395), and bronze (B-62). ASME III permits the use of some, but not all, cast iron or
ductile-iron materials for valves. There are many more cast alloys available that are
generally used because of their own particular resistance to various fluid chemistries,
such as aluminum-bronze (B-148), bronze (B-61), Alloy 20 stainless steel (A-35a, CN7M),
Monel (A-494, M-35), and Inconel (A-494, CYAO). Alloys such as aluminum-bronze or
Monels are often used for service environments such as seawater.
4-15

Cast ironA-126
Advantages:
Low cost
Good for general service
Disadvantages:
Limited pressure and temperature rating
Brittle, can crack easily
Not allowed by ASME III
BronzeSB/B-61, SB/B-62
Advantages:
Low cost
Good for general service (air and water)
Disadvantages:
Limited in temperature and pressure
4-16

5
GATE VALVES

Gate valves are the most commonly used isolation valves in steam and process service.
They provide reliable sealing performance over a wide range of temperatures and pressures. Because gate valves are designed to take advantage of differential pressure, they are
very effective in high pressure and high temperature systems. Gate valves are available in
sizes ranging from 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) to 48 inches (1,200 mm) and larger. One of the major
benefits of the gate valve design is the low pressure drop realized across it, almost approaching that of a straight length of pipe. One of the major drawbacks of the gate valve
design is the difficulty in maintaining, repairing, or replacing its seats [8, 1318].
5.2 Design
5.2.1 General
Gate valves can be either a rising stem or non-rising stem design (see Figure 5-1). Rising
stem designs, utilizing an outside screw and yoke (OS&Y) (see Figure 5-2), provide the
advantage of having the power threads outside the fluid, thus minimizing thread damage
from exposure to the fluid. Rising stem action allows the incorporation of an optional
backseating feature to assist in isolating the packing from the process fluid by pulling up
the stem against the inside of the bonnet. Another rising stem option utilizes a power
screw inside the valve body, which exposes the threads to the fluid. A non-rising stem
configuration requires the power screw to be inside the valve disc or wedge. Because the
stem rotates in the packing without axial motion, packing wear and damage resulting
from abrasive contaminants and undesirable materials being dragged across the packing
is avoided. The disadvantages of the non-rising stem are that the threads are exposed to
the fluid, the stem cannot be backseated, and the disc position cannot be judged by the
stem position from the outside. Additionally, inside screw and non-rising stem configurations are usually limited to low pressure and low temperature applications.
5-1

Packing
Packing
Disc
Stem
A. Rising Stem Design
B. Non-Rising Stem Design
Figure 5-1
Inside Screw Stem Thread Configurations [8]
Handwheel
Packing
Yoke
Stem
Packing
A. Non-Rising Handwheel
B. Rising Handwheel
Figure 5-2
Rising Stem Design, Outside Screw [8]
5-2

Most gate valve designs are offered with metal-to-metal seating at the gate-to-seat
interface. Metal-to-metal seating allows valves to operate at a much higher temperature
than would be possible with elastomeric- or polymeric-type seat materials. Metal-tometal seating also makes the valve fire safe for most applications.
Five versions of the gate valve are widely used: solid-wedge, split-wedge, flex-wedge,
double disc, and parallel slide. There are many variations of each of these five types
available today, including the conduit, slab gate, and knife gate. When a system designer specifies a type of gate valve for an application, one should remember that not all
designs offer the same level of performance. A design that is perfectly acceptable for
one service might not perform reliably in another.
These guidelines are intended to be used only as general criteria. For a specific service
and all critical service applications, the system designer should consult with a valve
engineer who is familiar with both the application and the valve before selecting a
specific design.
5.2.2 Solid-Wedge Gate

Solid-wedge gates (see Figure 5-3) are of a simple, one-piece construction characterized
by a V-shaped wedge that converts the axial stem thrust to a high seat load, normal to
the seat faces. The seats can be separate pieces held firmly into the valve body by either
press fitting, welding, or threading; or they can be welded and machined into the body.
Typically, the body of a wedge gate valve has gate guides on the sides (as shown in
Figure 3-17) that mate with guide slots on the sides of the disc. These guides support the
load due to differential pressure across the wedge, and keep the wedge away from the
seat faces, except for a small distance very near the fully closed position, to minimize
wear. In small valves, the seat loading caused by the closing force applied through the
stem to the gate is much higher than the seat loading created by the pressure differential across the gate. Therefore, seating effectiveness is not significantly increased by
increasing the differential pressure across the gate. In larger valves, the differential
pressure acting on the gate provides the primary load against the seat, and the mechanical force from the stem is used to enhance the seating action.
5-3

Bonnet
Stem
Solid Wedge
Seat Ring
Body
Figure 5-3
Solid-Wedge Gate Valve [13]
The solid-wedge design is suitable only in smaller sizes where the stiffness of valve
body and disc is much higher than that of the adjacent pipe. The increased stiffness
minimizes seat distortion, which can create increased seat leakage or gate pinching due
to pipe loads transmitted to the valve ends. The solid-wedge gate design is not suited
for large valves, especially in high temperature applications where differential expansion and distortion of the gate, body, and seats, due to mechanical and thermal loads,
can cause loss of seat tightness and/or binding of the gate, which can either increase the
operating thrust required or, in some cases, cause complete inoperability. Solid-wedge
valves are not generally recommended for use with power actuators.
5-4

The following list identifies some of the advantages and disadvantages of solid-wedge
gate valves:
Advantages:
Seating effectiveness can be increased by the application of additional force to the
stem.
Solid-wedge gate valves have simple construction.
They have bi-directional operation due to symmetrical construction.
Disadvantages:
Solid-wedge gates are sensitive to line loads: bending moment, torsion, and axial
loads, which are transmitted by the adjacent pipe to the valve ends. The sensitivity
increases with the size of the valve.
Seating is sensitive to thermal distortions because solid-wedge gates do not have the
ability to easily conform to the seat face plane distortion.
Lack of flexibility in solid-wedge gates can cause the wedge to stick closed during
heatup or cooldown cycles when the gate is left in the closed position. The sticking
can be caused by the expansion of the stem during heatup, pushing the wedge
down, or by the differential thermal expansions that exist between the gate and the
body materials that can create an interference at the seat during cooling. For example, gates made of higher coefficient of thermal expansion materials (such as 410
stainless steel), when used in conjunction with valve bodies made of lower coefficient of thermal expansion materials (such as carbon steel or 316 stainless steel), can
create this unfavorable situation during cooldown.
It is difficult to perform in-line repair because of the problem in achieving an accurate matching of seat angles during lapping.
Depending on the clearance in the gate area, the gate could tilt under flow forces
and create galling or high wear at the disc/seat faces.
5.2.3 Split-Wedge Gate

Split-wedge gates (see Figure 5-4) are similar to solid-wedge gates, but are comprised of
two separate pieces. The split-wedge construction permits the gate assembly to more
easily tolerate line loads and temperature transients by allowing each wedge piece to
align with its mating seat. This feature is used in larger gate valves to overcome sticking
problems encountered with the solid wedge. Because of the ability of each gate wedge
to align itself independently against its respective seat, this type of construction allows
both wedge pieces to seat simultaneously, consequently fluid pressure can be trapped
in the body. Under a temperature increase, the thermal expansion of this trapped fluid
can cause buildup of very high pressures in the body, which can damage the pressure
boundary. The trapped fluid also increases the thrust required to open the valve, occasionally resulting in complete inoperability. Provisions to relieve the body pressure
must be made in such valves to eliminate these problems.
5-5

Yoke
Pressure Seal
Bonnet
Stem
Split Wedge
Seat Ring
Body
Figure 5-4
Split-Wedge Gate Valve [13]
5-6

The following list identifies the advantages and disadvantages of split-wedge gates:
Advantages:
Split-wedge gates have better immunity to line loads than the solid-wedge design,
minimizing sticking and leakage.
They can provide simultaneous shut off against pressure on both the upstream and
the downstream seats (block and bleed).
stem.
Simultaneous seating of both discs can be used to check body seat integrity without
line pressure by pressurizing the body between the seats.
It is easier to repair seat faces in-line than with the solid wedge because the splitwedge design can tolerate more angular mismatch.
Disadvantages:
Both wedge pieces can seat simultaneously, thus trapping pressure in the body. This
can cause inadvertent overpressure in the body during thermal transients and an
increase in the thrust required to open the valve due to the combined friction from
the two wedge pieces, in some cases rendering the valve inoperable. This condition
is often referred to as double disc drag.
The two-piece construction is more expensive and somewhat more complex than a
solid wedge. It also has the potential for allowing disengagement between the gate
pieces and the stem.
Depending on the clearance in the gate guide area, it is possible for the gate to tilt
under flow forces and create galling or high wear at the disc/seat faces.
5.2.4 Flexible-Wedge Gate

Flexible-wedge gate design (see Figure 5-5) was introduced to overcome leakage or gate
binding and sticking problems caused by distortion of the valve body due to thermal
and pipeline stresses transmitted to the valve ends. The flexible-wedge design, a simple
variation of the solid wedge, is constructed in one piece composed of two discs that are
connected with an integral boss that permits independent flexure of the discs. Because
the flexible wedge is simple and has no separate components that could become loose
inservice, it is widely used in power plants.
5-7

Yoke
Pressure Seal
Bonnet
Stem
Seat Ring
Flexible
Wedge
Body
Figure 5-5
Flex-Wedge Gate Valve [13]
5-8

The following list identifies some of the advantages and disadvantages of flexiblewedge gates:
Advantages:
Flexible-wedge gates have better immunity to line loads than the solid-wedge design, minimizing sticking and leakage.
They are simpler in construction than split-wedge gates.
Seating effectiveness can be increased by application of additional force to the stem.
Simultaneous seating of both discs can be used to check body seat integrity, without
line pressure, by pressurizing the body between the seats.
It is easier to repair seat faces in-line than with the solid wedge because the flexiblewedge design can tolerate more angular mismatch.
Disadvantages:
Both wedge pieces can independently seat simultaneously, thus trapping pressure in
the body. This can cause inadvertent overpressure in the body during thermal transients and an increase in thrust required to open the valve due to the combined
friction from the two wedge pieces, in some cases rendering the valve inoperable.
This condition is often referred to as double-disc drag.
Depending on the clearance in the gate guide area, it is possible for the gate to tilt
under flow forces and create galling or high wear at the disc/seat faces.
5.2.5 Double-Disc Gate

Double-disc gate valves (see Figure 5-6) are of multiple-piece construction with the
faces of the gate pieces contacting the seat parallel to each other. When going from the
open to closed position, the wedge pieces move down together as an assembly without
any relative motion between them until, at the very end of the stroke, one of the pieces
contacts the bottom stop. Continued motion of the stem after this position causes a
climbing action of one wedge piece on the other at the inclined plane interface between
them, which in turn expands them laterally against their respective seats. Double-disc
gate valve design can provide simultaneous seating against both the upstream and
downstream side pressures. This can be an advantage because of the redundancy in
seating available in such a design. However, the double seating feature can also be a
disadvantage because the body can trap fluid, which can cause inadvertent high pressure during thermal transients.
5-9

Stem
Upper Wedge
Mechanism
Wedge Pin
Disk
Retainer
Lower Wedge
Disk
Wedge
Spring
Figure 5-6
Double-Disc Gate Valve [13]
Some double-disc expanding gate valve designs employ special mechanisms that kinematically prevent premature gate expansion when the gate assembly is in the mid-travel
position. Expansion of the gate before reaching the end of the stroke can prevent the gate
from closing completely. This design is also made in a through-conduit, double-wedge
arrangement that permits expansion of the gate in the open position, as well as the closed
position (see Figure 5-7). The design is extensively used in applications where a pig is
run through the pipeline to isolate a pipe section for testing or repair.
5-10

Stem
Body
Seat
Segment
Gate
Figure 5-7
Through-Conduit, Double-Disc Gate Valve [8]
The following list identifies some of the advantages and disadvantages of parallel
expanding gates:
Advantages:
Double-disc gates can provide a positive simultaneous shut-off against pressure on
both the upstream and the downstream seats.
Through-conduit, double-wedge design can double block and bleed, that is, provide
block and bleed in the closed position and also prevent the line pressure from entering the body cavity through both seats simultaneously in the open position.
stem.
Double-disc seating can be used to check the integrity of both seats simultaneously
by pressurizing the body between the seats.
5-11

Disadvantages:
Depending on the actual gate construction and its stiffness, parallel-expanding gate
design can be very intolerant of line loads and thermal transients.
This type of gate is normally unidirectional or has a preferred flow direction for best
performance. The two wedge pieces are usually asymmetrical, and one of the two
pieces has the better ability to self-align with respect to the seat face.
Both wedge pieces can independently seat simultaneously, thus trapping pressure in
the body, causing inadvertent overpressure in the body during thermal transients
and an increase in thrust required to open the valve due to the combined friction
from the two wedge pieces, in some cases rendering the valve inoperable. This
condition is often referred to as double-disc drag.
This type of gate is more complex and requires a special mechanism to prevent inadvertent mid-travel expanding movement of the discs towards the seating surfaces.
Depending on the clearance in the gate guide area, it is possible for the non-throughconduit gate designs to tilt under flow forces and create galling or high wear at the
disc and seat faces. The through-conduit gate design, shown in Figure 5-7, is not
susceptible to this problem.
5.2.6 Parallel-Slide Gate

The parallel-slide gate, also called a parallel-expanding, double-disc gate (see Figure
5-8), is constructed in two pieces, with each disc allowed to float independently and
mate with its seat. The individual pieces are not mechanically wedged against their
respective seat, but are pre-loaded by a spring between them that provides initial seating force. The flexibility of the spring allows distortion and changes in dimensions
between the seat faces to be easily accommodated without pinching the gate, which
provides complete immunity from sticking and binding under line loads and thermal
transients. The pressure differential across the gate increases the seat contact force and
provides a tighter seal. Parallel-slide, double-disc gates can provide only a downstream
seat and are most effective in the larger valve sizes in applications where at least moderate differential pressure exists.
5-12

Stem
Disc Retaining
Pins
Disc
Disc Carrier
Seat
Preload Spring
Figure 5-8
Parallel-Slide Gate Valve [8]
Self-wiping action of the gate against the seat during operation keeps the seat faces
clean of any foreign material and provides good sealing action over a long period time,
especially in clean fluid service.
The following list identifies some of the advantages and disadvantages of the parallelslide, double-disc gate valve:
Advantages:
Of all the gate valve designs discussed, parallel-slide double-discs are the most
tolerant of line loads due to the ability of the spring between the gate pieces to
absorb large seat deflections with virtually no change in seat contact force.
They are tolerant of temperature changes during operation. The gate does not bind
due to the differential thermal expansion effects because of the resilient spring
between the discs.
5-13

They are tolerant of a lack of parallelism between the two seat faces because of the
ability of the two independent gate pieces to align themselves. This feature also
provides a good shut-off under bending moments transmitted to the valve ends by
the adjacent pipe, which causes tilting of the seat faces. The ability to absorb large
variations in dimensions between the seat faces, without any adverse effect on the
valve performance, allows more economical fabrication tolerances to be used than in
wedge gate valves.
There is less tendency for galling, due to smaller changes in seat loading under line
loads and thermal transients.
These gates can be used bi-directionally, due to their symmetrical design.
The dual-disc seating can be used to check body seat integrity without line pressure
by pressurizing the body between the seats.
Disadvantages:
Seating effectiveness cannot be increased by the application of additional force to the
stem as in wedge-gate valves.
Parallel-slide, double-disc gates provide downstream seating only; the upstream
disc does not seat against line pressure.
Floating gate pieces can trap body pressure and affect double-disc seating, allowing
inadvertent overpressure in the body during thermal transients.
This type of gate has a constant spring load over the entire stroke, creating a nominally higher running torque.
Depending on the clearance in the gate guide area, it is possible for the non-throughconduit gate designs to tilt under flow forces and create galling or high wear at the
disc and seat faces. The through-conduit gate design, shown in Figure 5-9, is not
susceptible to this problem.
5-14

Stem
Body
Seat
ThroughConduit
Slide
Gate
Figure 5-9
Through-Conduit, Parallel-Slide Gate Valve [8]
5.2.7 Slab Gate

The slab gate design features a very simple one-piece parallel gate (see Figure 5-10),
which is matched flat on both sides. The slab type of gate requires axially movable seats
between the seat and body, and a soft-type seat insert to allow seating without the high
contact stresses required in metal-to-metal seats. Seating between the gate and seat faces
is accomplished in both upstream and downstream locations. Both seats are designed to
float freely in their respective seat pockets which are machined into the valve body, and
the seats are forced against the gate by springs. When the gate is closed, the upstream
seat is axially forced against the gate by the springs, and the differential pressure is
5-15

acting on the unbalanced annular area of the seat. The downstream seating is achieved
by floating the gate against the downstream seat, due to the differential pressure acting
across the entire area defined by the seat bore.
Preload Spring
O-Ring Seal
Seat Ring Insert
Stem
Preload
Spring
Movable
Seat
Gate
Body
Figure 5-10
Slab Gate Valve [8]
5-16

The following list identifies some of the advantages and disadvantages of slab gate
valves:
Advantages:
Slab gates can tolerate line loads better than wedge-type gate valves without binding
or seating degradation. They are virtually immune to line loads if sufficient clearances are present, due to the spring-loaded seat design that can absorb large changes
in dimensions of the seat pocket area caused by line loads transmitted to the valve
ends by the adjacent pipe.
These gates are easy to maintain because of the removable seat design.
Slab gates will self-relieve body overpressure to the low pressure side by pushing
the spring energized seats away from the gate. This eliminates the high pressure
buildup in the body cavity associated with most of the other gate valves under
temperature increases.
Disadvantages:
Seating effectiveness cannot be increased by applying additional force to the stem as
in wedge gate valves.
Service conditions are limited to 400F with conventional soft seating materials made
of elastomers and plastics. Some designs utilize higher temperature packing materials,
for example, carbon, graphite, or asbestos for higher temperature applications.
Slab-gate valves cannot compete with butterfly valves in size and cost.
5.2.8 Knife Gate

Knife-gate valves (see Figure 5-11) are similar to conventional gate valves, except that
they use a relatively thin plate for a disc, similar to a guillotine. Only the plate, which
extends through the bonnet, is exposed to the fluid. In this design, the stem and threads
are protected from the fluid medium.
5-17

Body
Knife
Gate
Figure 5-11
Knife-Gate Valve [8]
Knife-gate valves can be provided with metal seats or soft seats, and can be made in
almost any size, because these valves lend themselves to economical fabrication from
plates. They are normally available in pressure ratings no higher than Class 125/150.
Knife-gate seat tightness can be good, but would not be expected to be comparable to a
wedge gate, ball, or butterfly valve. Because of the rectangular-shaped packing gland
geometry and its high stuffing box cross-sectional area, packing maintenance/tightness
is not expected to be as good as a conventionally packed stem.
Knife-gate valves can be used in low pressure service at moderate and low temperatures, where abrasive particulates are in the flow stream, or where clogging of piping/
valve might be expected due to a high percentage of solids in the fluid.
5-18

The following list identifies some of the advantages and disadvantages of knife-gate
valves:
Advantages:
Knife-gate valves have an economical construction for low pressure service.
They are suitable for contaminant-laden (dirty) service.
These valves are compact and lightweight.
The stem and thread are not exposed to the fluid medium.
Disadvantages:
Knife-gate valves are less reliable in preventing leakage to the environment due to a
large rectangular geometry stuffing box design.
They are not suitable for high pressure service because of the flat body design,
which is not an efficient geometry for pressure containment.
5.3 Repair Issues
5.3.1 Leakage Past the In-Body Seat

Leakage past the seats can be the result of corrosion products on the disc/wedge and
seat, incomplete contact between the seat and disc, scratches, pits, cuts, and erosion on
the disc and/or seat, or an obstruction lodged across or between the seats preventing
the gate from closing. This section addresses the typical problems that require more
attention than the typical maintenance activities, such as cleaning, inspection, and
lapping or polishing. The two types of seat rings discussed herein include integral-type
seats and welded-in seat rings (Figure 5-12).
5-19

Gate Valve Body
Seat Ring
Seal Weld
Figure 5-12
Welded-In Gate Valve Seat Ring
5.3.1.1 Damage Assessment (DA) and Repair Options (RO)
DA: Valve disc and seat have foreign material and corrosion products that are preventing full closure.
RO: Polish the seat and disc with emery cloth in accordance with standard maintenance
procedures. If the corrosion products are still attached or surface scratches are present,
lap the seat and disc per Section 9.3. Seat contact can then be verified by performing a
bluing evaluation to ensure 360 contact on the disc face, as discussed in Section 8.3.
DA: A bluing test reveals less than 360 surface contact between the wedge and seats.
RO: Verify that sufficient stem stroke and pressure are available to fully close the valve.
RO: Verify that the wedge is not seating too low in the seats.
RO: Verify that the clearance between the wedge guide and wedge guide slots are sufficient to allow for proper movement of the wedge. Repair in accordance with Section 8.8.
RO: Lap the seats and wedge per Section 9.3 to ensure that they are flat. Perform a blue
check. If 360 contact is not achieved, a well qualified machinist/valve technician is
needed to properly shim and fit the disc per Section 8.11.
5-20

DA: A bluing test reveals 360contact between the seats and wedge/disc, but the valve
is still leaking.
RO: Verify that the width of the seat contact surface is appropriate for the size and
pressure rating of the valve. If the contact surface is too wide, the seating surface should
be narrowed by lapping the relief angle of the seat per Section 8.3. The suggested seat
width should be obtained from the valve manufacturer or design drawings.
DA: A bluing test reveals that the wedge is seating too low in the seats (see Figure 5-13).
Wedge
Seat
Normal Seating
Position
Figure 5-13
Gate Valve Wedge Seating Too Low in Seats [16]
RO: Procure a new wedge and fit it as discussed in Section 8.11.
RO: On double-disc valves (Anchor Darling Valve Company), a new disc can be procured.
RO: On Equiwedge Valves (Edward Valve Company), a thicker spacer ring can be
installed between the gate halves (see Figure 5-14).
5-21

Stem
Gate Half
Gate Half
Spacer Ring
Two-Piece Wedge
Note: Halves held together by
parallel guide ribs
Hardfaced Wedge Guide

Rails
Wedge Halves
Body
Groove
Body
Hardfaced
Wedge Seat
Figure 5-14
Split-Wedge Gate with Spacer Ring [17]
RO: Re-hardface the wedge and fit per Section 8.11.
DA: The seat ring has cuts and/or erosion damage beyond what can be lapped out.
5-22

RO: If the damage is isolated to some small local areas and does not extend well into the
seat ring base material, a repair to the seat ring can be performed per Section 8.3 provided that the existing hardfacing is of a repairable type. This is a challenging repair
that requires very skilled welding personnel who are experienced in welding
hardfacing materials.
RO: If the damage to the seat ring is severe, the seat ring should be replaced in accordance with Section 8.4. In situ seat ring replacement is generally restricted to valves
12 inches (305 mm) and larger due to the limited development of welding and machining systems.
RO: Except for some very specific circumstances, valves less than 12 inches (305 mm)
should be removed from the line and repaired in a shop. Generally, valves less than
6 inches (152 mm) can be replaced at a cost that is comparable to the repair cost.
DA: The integral hardfacing seat has cuts and/or erosion beyond what can be lapped
out.
valve body base material, a repair to the hardfaced seat can be performed per Section
8.5 if the existing hardfacing is of a repairable type. This is a challenging repair that
requires very skilled welding personnel who are experienced in welding hardfacing
materials.
RO: If the damage to the hardfacing is extensive or protrudes into the base material, the
hardfaced seat should be replaced in accordance with Section 8.6. In situ replacement of
integral seats is generally restricted to valves 12 inches (305 mm) and larger, due to the
limited development of welding and machining systems.
should be removed from the line and repaired in a shop. Valves less than 6 inches
(152 mm) can generally be replaced at a cost that is comparable to the repair cost.
DA: The wedge/disc is found to have cuts and/or erosion beyond what can be lapped
out.
RO: Procure a replacement wedge or pair of discs. The new components will have to be
fitted to the valve as detailed in Section 8.11.
RO: If the wedge or disc has an isolated crack or cut and the valve technician determines that the wedge has enough material on it so that it will not drop through the seat
after repair, a localized repair can be attempted as described in Section 8.11.
RO: Remove the existing hardfacing and repair per Section 8.11. This approach is generally more effective than the localized repair option.
5-23

5.3.2 Leakage Past the Pressure Seal Ring

Leaks past the pressure seal ring (see Figure 5-15) are commonly the result of insufficient bolt tension on the bonnet. The bolt tension can be lost due to vibration, temperature and pressure fluctuations, or by creep in high temperature applications. Corrosion
products and other foreign material between the body bore and seal ring can also contribute to leaking. Other contributors to leaking body-to-bonnet seals include cuts,
scratches, other defects in the mating surfaces of the body seal area, the bonnet seal
surface, and the replaceable seal ring.
1 Packing Flange Nut
2 Packing Flange Washer
3 Packing Flange
4 Packing Flange Eye Bolt
5 Gland Bushing
6 Gland Bolt Clamp
7 Clamp Bolt
8 Clamp Jam Nut
9 Bonnet Retaining Ring

10 Packing Ring
11 Yoke
12 Half Dog Set Screw
13 Bonnet
14 Seal Ring
15 Stem
Figure 5-15
Typical Pressure Seal Bonnet Configuration [18]
The type and extent of damage can be determined after the valve bonnet is removed
and the seal areas inspected utilizing standard maintenance practices. Critical dimensions should be compared to manufacturer drawings and specifications prior to initiating any repair activity.
5-24

5.3.2.1 Damage Assessment and Repair Options

DA: Minor scratches and cutting are found in the body sealing surfaces of the body
and/or bonnet seal area.
RO: Determine the depth of the imperfections. Flaws less than .010 inch can be removed
by polishing with a fine emery cloth or buffing wheel.
RO: If flaws are deeper than .010 inch (.25 mm) on the body seal, the complete inside
diameter of the contact area should be honed per Section 9.4 until the flaw is removed.
The bore should then be measured and an oversized seal ring selected, as discussed in
Section 8.7.
RO: If flaws are deeper than .010 inch (.25 mm) on the bonnet angular surface, the
sealing surface can be repaired by taking a skim cut with a lathe as described in Section
8.7. The critical angle must be maintained.
DA: Deep cuts, porosity, and erosion are found on the body sealing area.
RO: If the flaw is isolated, a localized repair can be performed by grinding out the
defect area, rewelding, and finish machining and lapping as detailed in Section 8.7. An
oversized seal ring might be required based on the finished inside diameter measurements.
RO: If the flaws are numerous about the diameter of the bore, the complete inside
diameter of the seal area should be machined to remove all of the cladding, and the seal
area should be rewelded, machined, and honed to blend with the surrounding bore
diameter as detailed in Section 8.2.
DA: Deep cuts, porosity, and erosion are found on the bonnet sealing surface
(see Figure 5-16).
5-25

Pressure Seal
Bonnet Sealing
Surface
Pressure
Seal Gasket
Bonnet Backseat
Figure 5-16
Pressure Seal Bonnet [18]
RO: Procure a replacement bonnet.
RO: Verify the dimensional tolerances from the manufacturer and remove the defects
by machining.
RO: Rebuild the sealing surface and large diameter by welding and remachining it to
the manufactured dimensions.
5.3.3 Valve Stem Leaks

Two areas on the valve stem contribute to leakage of steam or process. The valve stem
provides a sealing surface for the packing to seal against in the bonnet, preventing
process leakage to the atmosphere, and a stem backseat that seals against the bonnet
backseat to allow for packing replacement under system pressure (see Figure 5-17).
Valves stems are generally made of hardened steels such as quenched and tempered
410 stainless or precipitation-hardened superalloysmaterials that are not suitable for
weld repair. Except for cosmetic repairs, damaged or bent stems should be replaced.
5-26

Valve Stem
Hardfaced Bonnet
Backseat
Figure 5-17
Typical Valve Stem/Bonnet Backseat
DA: The valve stem has scratches and pitting.
RO: If the scratches and pitting are just at the surface, they can be removed by polishing
the surface with an emery cloth or buffing wheel.
RO: If the scratches and pitting are numerous, the stem can be chucked in a lathe and
turned while applying an emery cloth.
RO: If the scratches or pits are few but less than .005 inch (.13 mm), they can be ground
out and blended.
RO: If the scratches, pits, or cuts are less than .005 inch (.13 mm), they can be removed
by taking a machine cut with a lathe about the diameter of the stem, and then blended
and polished to remove the edges and cold work. Total removal should not exceed
.010 inch on the diameter measurement.
RO: If any defects are determined to be deeper than .005 inch (.13 mm), the stem should
be replaced.
DA: The stem backseat has scratches, cutting, erosion, or pitting.
RO: If the damage is very minimal, the stem backseat should be lapped against the
bonnet backseat as presented in Section 8.7.
RO: The stem can be chucked into a lathe and skim cuts taken on the seat angle until the
flaw is removed per Section 8.13. The manufacturer should be consulted for the proper
angle and tolerances. The mating seats should then be lapped together as presented in
Section 8.7.
5-27

RO: If the stem backseat is extensively damaged, the stem should be replaced. It should
be noted that the stem designs generally provide a considerable amount of extra material in the stem backseat area to accommodate extensive sealing face material removal.
DA: The bonnet backseat has scratches, cutting, erosion, or pitting.
RO: The bonnet can be chucked into a lathe and skim cuts taken on the hardfaced seat
angle until the flaw is removed. The manufacturer should be consulted for the proper
Section 8.7.
RO: If the integral hardfaced bonnet backseat is extensively damaged, the seat should
be weld-repaired per Section 8.7.
RO: If the replaceable hardfaced seat ring is extensively damaged, the seat ring should
be replaced per Section 8.7.
5.3.4 Valve Body Damage

The need for valve body repairs is generally the result of trim components improperly
installed or foreign materials not allowing the internal sealing components to fully
close. Except for cases of casting defects that lead to through wall weeping, most body
repairs are performed in conjunction with trim repairs, such as seats or pressure seal
bores. The valve body (see Figure 5-18) is a pressure boundary and thus must be repaired in accordance with the rules of the jurisdictional code. Generally, this is either
the ASME or NBIC.
5-28

Body Flange
Pressure Seal
Hardfacing/Bore
Guide Rib
Seat Ring
Flow Bore
Figure 5-18
Typical Gate Valve Body
DA: A deep groove is found in the body flow path just beyond the integral seat ring.
RO: If the defect is away from the seat and sufficient wall thickness is available after the
flaw has been removed, the area can be blended into the surrounding base material by
grinding and flapping per Section 9.1.
RO: Determine if the erosion is related to a crack in the hardfaced seat that is contributing to high velocity flow. If the seat is damaged, the base material flaw should be repaired in accordance with Section 8.1, and then the seat repaired in accordance with
Section 8.5 or 8.6, depending on the extent of the damage.
RO: If erosion damage is confined to the body flow area, the body should be repaired in
accordance with Section 8.1. Except for cases where the repair area is easily accessible
from the bonnet bore, the valves will have to be removed from the line to allow access
from the butt-welded end.
5-29

DA: A crack or deep groove cuts into or through the integral hardfaced seat and into
the body material.
RO: If the flaw is a narrow crack, the flaw could be ground out manually, and the crack
weld-repaired as discussed in Section 8.5, utilizing a butter material followed by a
hardfacing repair.
RO: If, after removing a narrow crack, it was determined that sufficient minimum wall
was not available, a base metal repair would be required per Section 8.1, followed by a
hardfacing repair per Section 8.5.
RO: If a large section of the seat is damaged due to erosion, the integral hardfaced seat
should be removed, the base material repaired or restored in accordance with Section
8.1, and the seat restored in accordance with Section 8.6.
DA: A deep groove is found in the body flow path just beyond the seat ring.
RO: If the defect is away from the seat and sufficient wall thickness is available after the
flaw has been removed, the area can be blended into the surrounding base material by
grinding and flapping per Section 9.1.
RO: Determine if there is a crack in the seat hardfacing or a flaw in the seat ring seal weld
that is contributing to high velocity flow and erosion. If the seat ring is damaged, the base
material flaw should be repaired in accordance with Section 8.1, and then the seat repaired in accordance with Section 8.5 or 8.6, depending on the extent of the damage.
RO: If erosion damage is confined to the body flow area, the body should be repaired in
accordance with Section 8.1. Except for cases where the repair area is easily accessible
from the bonnet bore, the valves will have to be removed from the line to allow access
from the butt-welded end.
DA: A deep groove from erosion is found under the seat ring and protruding into the
downstream base material.
RO: If accessible, the eroded area can be repaired by welding from the downstream side
of the seat ring. This option presents a risk of the seat warping. The more welding
required, the greater the risk.
RO: The seat ring should be removed per Section 8.4. The eroded base material should
then be restored per Section 8.2. The weld prep for the replacement seat ring should be
established and the seat ring installed per Section 8.4.
DA: A deep groove or cut penetrates into or through the seat ring and into the downstream base material.
RO: The seat ring should be removed per Section 8.4. The eroded base material should
then be restored per Section 8.2. The weld prep for the replacement seat ring should be
established and the seat ring installed per Section 8.4.
5-30

DA: The bonnet bore has pitting, erosion, and corrosion (below the pressure seal area).
RO: The defects should be removed by grinding or machining, and blended into the
surrounding base material. If the minimum wall thickness is violated, the wall thickness
should be restored by welding per Section 8.1.
DA: The bonnet bore is cracked below the pressure seal area.
RO: The crack should be completely removed by machining or grinding. If the minimum wall thickness is not violated, the area should be blended into the surrounding
base material.
RO: The defects should be removed by grinding or machining. If the minimum wall
thickness is violated, the wall thickness should be restored by welding per Section 8.1.
5.3.5 Valve Bonnet Leaks

Leaks to the atmosphere because of bonnet problems can generally be prevented by good
maintenance practices. Adherence to recommended bolting, packing, and gasket selection
guidelines developed by EPRI and others have led to substantially improved reliability of
valves. Repairs to body-to-bonnet flanges, packing chambers, and backseats (see Figure
5-19) are quite uncommon but are addressed here along with casting defects.
Gland
Gland Nut
Gland Flange
Upper Packing
End Ring
Packing Ring
Lower Packing
End Ring
Gland Bolt
Gland Rretainer
Capscrew
Body/Bonnet
Stud and Nut
Bonnet
Body
Body/Bonnet
Gasket
Backseat
Stem
Figure 5-19
Typical Bolted Bonnet Components [8]
5-31


DA: A weep hole in the bonnet casting is allowing process to escape to the atmosphere.
RO: If the valve is less than 6 inches (152 mm), it might be more cost effective to replace
the bonnet or the complete valve than to repair it.
RO: Remove the bonnet from the valve and repair it as if it were a valve body crack per
Section 8.1. The flaw should be ground out to approximately mid-wall and welded out,
and then ground from the opposite side of the bonnet until weld metal is revealed. The
second side should then be welded out and blended.
DA: Inspection of the packing chamber reveals steam cuts into the base material.
RO: If the valve is less than 6 inches (152 mm), it might be more cost effective to replace
the bonnet or the complete valve than to repair it.
RO: If the cut is less than .010 inch (.25 mm) deep, a burr grinder can be utilized to
remove the defect and blend into the surrounding base material.
RO: If the flaws are deeper than .010 inch (.25 mm) on the packing chamber, the complete inside diameter of the chamber should be honed per Section 9.4 until the flaw is
removed. The bore should then be measured and larger packing rings installed.
RO: If the defect must be weld-repaired, it should be performed in the same manner as
a pressure seal bore repair discussed in Section 8.2.
DA: Erosion is found on the body or bonnet flange.
RO: Determine the minimum flange thickness to see if the flange can be machined to
remove the defect area per Section 9.2. Care must be taken to ensure that all critical
dimensions are within tolerance. This is extremely critical to valves with ring gaskets.
RO: If the minimum flange thickness cannot be maintained by re-machining the flange
face, a localized weld repair should be performed by grinding and welding per Section
9.2, and the final surface remachined to obtain flatness for gasket sealing.
RO: On very critical valves where flange thickness must be restored, the complete
flange face can be built up by welding and remachining per Section 8.1.
DA: The bonnet backseat has scratches, cutting, erosion, or pitting.
RO: The bonnet can be chucked into a lathe and skim cuts taken on the hardfaced seat
angle until the flaw is removed. The manufacturer should be consulted for the proper
5-32

Section 8.7.
RO: If the integral hardfaced bonnet backseat is extensively damaged, the seat should
be weld-repaired per Section 8.7.
RO: If the replaceable hardfaced seat ring is extensively damaged, the seat ring should
be replaced per Section 8.7.
5.3.6 Wedge Guides

Wedge guides accurately control the alignment of the wedge assembly into the seats to
minimize unnecessary contact stresses and galling wear between the hardfaced surfaces. Repair to the guides requires precision machining to maintain the critical tolerances commonly ignored. If the guides are too tight, they can restrict movement and
possibly sealing; if they are too loose, the wedge can flutter when the valve is almost
closed, causing severe damage to the wedge and seats.
Two designs of guides are used by gate valve manufacturers, the single guide (see
Figure 5-20) and the parallel guides (see Figure 5-21). Neither has a real performance
advantage over the other, but maintenance and repair of the single guide is somewhat
easier, due to the accessibility of both contact faces.
5-33

Gate
Gate Guide
Figure 5-20
Single Guide Design for Gate Valves [8]
5-34

Guide Slot
Guide Rib
Figure 5-21
Parallel Guide Design for Gate Valves
DA: Inspection reveals that the guide rib is preventing the wedge from fully closing.
RO: The guide(s) should be blued and the wedge assembly installed and stroked to determine if and where contact is being made between the wedge slots and the guide. When
the area is determined, the guide should be machined or ground to provide clearance.
DA: The wedge is fluttering while opening/closing and during operation, causing
severe vibration and damage to the sealing faces.
RO: Tighten the clearances by building up the hardfacing on the wedge slot faces and
machining per Section 8.8.
RO: Tighten the clearances by building up the hardfacing on the guide(s) and machining per Section 8.8. NOTE: Valve manufacturers vary as to which surfaces of the wedge
guide(s) and guide slots they hardsurface. Check with the valve manufacturers for the
specific valve type.
DA: The seal weld that connects the guide rib to the body is cracked.
RO: The crack should be ground out and a repair weld performed in accordance with
Section 8.8.
DA: A critical section of the guide is missing.
RO: Fit a replacement section into the valve and weld per Section 8.8.
RO: Remove the valve from the line and install a replacement guide.
RO: Place the wedge in the seats and fit a replacement guide into the valve body per
Section 8.8, using the wedge as a fit-up tool.
5-35

6
GLOBE VALVES

Globe valves are the most extensively used valves for modulating (throttling) service,
due in part to the adaptability of the basic design to accommodate difficult conditions,
such as high pressure, temperature, and differential pressure. To a lesser extent, globe
valves can be used in shutoff applications. The streamlined surface that the plug presents to the flow minimizes turbulence and permits reliable control of the flow rate.
Compared to ball and butterfly valves, globe valves present a high flow resistance. Flow
capacity of globe valves is about one third that of low resistance valves such as ball and
butterfly. However, as flow capacity decreases, resistance to cavitation and noise increases [8, 13, 19].
Globe valves are unidirectional. When used in throttling applications, they should be
installed with flow under the seat. The configuration of the disc is such that only the
bottom presents a smooth profile to the flow. The sharp profile of the top of the disc,
when exposed to high velocity fluids, causes turbulence. This not only creates problems
with obtaining reliable throttling but also can damage the valve. For shutoff applications where a tight seal is desired, the valve should be installed with flow over the disc.
With flow under the disc, the actuator has to provide a force equal to the full differential
plus an additional amount to provide a sufficient unit load in the seat to achieve a seal.
This force must be maintained if the valve is to remain tight. Any relaxation of the stem
thrust due to material deformation or actuator tolerances will cause the valve to leak.
With flow over the disc, the pressure acts as the sealing force and the problem is eliminated. In this situation, the actuator is required only to overcome the differential pressure force when the valve is operated.
The unidirectional nature of the globe valve for throttling and shut off is the source of
many problems. In an attempt to combine two functions in one valve, globe valves are
frequently required to seal and throttle in the same direction. When this occurs, one
function or the other is not going to be properly taken care of and damage to the disc or
seat can occur due to cavitation or erosion. When the throttling function is required in
one direction and shutoff is desired in the other, a globe valve is an ideal choice.
6-1

6.2 Design
6.2.1 General
In contrast to the gate valves disc-to-seat sealing action, which is accompanied by
sliding and friction, the globe-valve plug or disc approaches, or moves away from, the
seat in a direction perpendicular to the seat plane without sliding. Thus, relatively high
seat contact stresses can be developed to get very tight shutoff without galling the
seating surfaces.
Globe valve stems are either a rising and nonrotating design or a rising and rotating
design. Some rotating and rising stem globe valves have an integral stem-to-disc connection that causes sliding at the seat face during the final closing action.
Globe valves are available in a wide variety of materials with both soft seating options
and metal-to-metal seating components. Due to their relatively short stroke to achieve
the full open position (as compared to gate valves), globe valves can easily incorporate
diaphragm or bellows-type stem seals to provide zero external leakage design. Metalto-metal seating allows valves to operate at higher temperatures than elastomeric- or
polymeric-type seat materials.
Variations of two basic disc (poppet) designs are utilized in globe-type valves. Plugtype discs (see Figure 6-1) are generally supplied for normal service applications on
standard globe valves. These include isolation and limited throttling service. For severe
throttling service, a special throttling, or cage, disc (see Figure 6-2) should be used. A
severe application is any application where the pressure is reduced across the valve by
20% or more. For example, for an upstream pressure of 100 psi, any throttling that
would reduce downstream pressure to less than 80 psi should be done with a special
disc. The actual configuration of the disc and the sophistication of the design depend on
the size of the pressure drop.
Figure 6-1
Plug-Type Disc [19]
6-2

Figure 6-2
Cage-Type Disc [19]
Aside from the different types of discs supplied, standard globe valves are supplied in
four different body configurations. The most common is the standard pattern (also
called the horizontal or tee pattern). The other configurations include the Y-pattern (or
wye), the angle pattern, and the Y-angle (or elbow down). When a system designer
specifies a globe valve for a particular application, careful consideration must be given
to the specific function and operating conditions. A valve that is perfectly suited for one
application might not perform reliably in another.
These repair guidelines are intended to be used as general criteria. The system designer
should consult with a valve engineer prior to selecting a valve for a particular service.
This is extremely important for critical service and throttling applications.
6.2.2 Horizontal Globe

The horizontal globe (see Figure 6-3) is most commonly used, although it has the greatest flow resistance of any of the globes. When it is installed with the stem in the vertical
position, it is easiest to maintain. It can be installed in either horizontal or vertical lines
with flow in either direction.
6-3

Operator
Yoke
Stem
Pressure Seal
Bonnet
Disk/Poppet
Body
Seat Ring
Figure 6-3
Horizontal Globe Valve [13]
6-4

6.2.3 Y-Globe
The Y-globe (see Figure 6-4) is designed for use where throttling capability is required,
but lower flow resistance is desired. The inclined stem angle makes maintenance more
difficult than with a regular globe. It can also be installed in either horizontal or vertical
lines. In vertical lines, it is not recommended for installation with the stem angled
down. The Y-globe has been widely used for main steam isolation service, providing
low pressure drop capability under full flow with no throttling.
Pressure Seal Bonnet
Disk/Poppet
Operator
Seat Ring
Yoke
Body
Figure 6-4
Y-Globe Valve [13]
6-5

6.2.4 Angle Globe

The angle globe (see Figure 6-5) allows a designer to take advantage of a 90 bend in the
piping and replace the elbow with a throttling valve. This eliminates extra welds, reduces system pressure drop, and permits the most efficient use of available space.
When used as a throttling valve, the flow in the vertical leg should be upward under the
disc. For isolation service, the flow should be downward over the disc.
Operator
Yoke
Bonnet
Disk
Seat Ring
Body
Figure 6-5
Angle Globe Valve [13]
6-6

6.2.5 Y-Angle Globe

The Y-angle globe (see Figure 6-6) combines the installation versatility of the angle
valve with the lower pressure drop of the Y-globe. The installation limitations of the Yangle globe are the opposite of those for a regular angle valve. When used for throttling,
the flow in the vertical leg should be downward, and in isolation application the flow
should be upward or over the disc.
Operator
Stem
Pressure Seal
Bonnet
Yoke
Disk
Seat Ring
Body
Figure 6-6
Y-Angle Globe Valve [13]
6-7

6.2.6 Control Valves

In order to meet the demands of fluid control, several styles of globe valves have been
developed. The following sections describe the globe-type valves; most are of the horizontal body style, with modifications to the inlet ports, discs, and guides.
6.2.6.1 Single-Port Valve
The most common control valve is a single-port, top-guided design in which the valve
disc is guided with the lower portion of the valve bonnet (see Figure 6-7). The singleport valve is generally specified for applications where tight shutoff is required.
Diaphragm
Actuator
Actuator Stem
Packing
Valve Stem
Bonnet
Body
Plug
Seat
Figure 6-7
Single-Port Control Valve [8]
6-8

Because the high pressure fluid acts across the entire area of the disc defined by the seat
port diameter, the resultant unbalanced force on the disc can be quite large and is the
dominant component in sizing the actuator. Because of relatively high actuator thrust
requirements, single-port globe valves are most commonly used in a smaller size
[3 inches (76 mm) or less], even though they can also be used in 4-inches to 8-inches
(102-mm to 203-mm) sizes with high thrust actuators.
6.2.6.2 Double-Port (Double-Seated) Valves
Double-port valve bodies, shown in Figure 6-8, are used to balance the forces acting on
the disc because high pressure fluid tends to exert opening force on one seat, and closing force on the other. The net force is lower than in single-port valves, which permits a
smaller actuator to be used for a given size valve. The smaller actuator also provides for
more stable control operation due to the absence of large plug force versus travel gradients. Double-port valves are most commonly used in sizes of 6 inches (152 mm) or
larger, and are generally of top and bottom guided construction. Because it is difficult to
close the two seats simultaneously, particularly due to differential thermal expansion
effects in operation, double-port valves should not be required to perform a shutoff
function. It should be pointed out that the double-seated valves use slightly different
diameters for the top and bottom seat to allow assembly and removal of the smaller disc
through the larger seat.
6-9

Seat Ring
Valve Disc/Plug
Seat Ring
Guide
Bushing
Body
Bottom
Cap
Figure 6-8
Double-Port Control Valve [8]
6.2.6.3 Three-Way Valves
Three-way valves, as shown in Figure 6-9, use a double-port body construction for
diverting or mixing service, and require three pipeline connections. Because the pressure differentials across the two seats are different, actuator selection requires careful
consideration, especially when unbalanced valve construction, as shown in Figure 6-7,
is used. To remove the disc, the upper valve seat, which is generally threaded-in, must
be removed.
6-10

Stem
Bonnet
Seat
Disc
Body
Seat
Figure 6-9
Three-Way Valve [8]
6.3 Repair Issues
Repair issues addressed in this section pertain to fixed components such as valve bodies, bonnets, valve seats, and pressure seal areas. Repair of control valve disc packs and
actuators should be referred to the OEM.
6.3.1 Leakage Past the In-Body Seats

Leakage past the seats can be the result of corrosion products on the poppet and seat;
incomplete contact between the seat and disc; scratches, pits, cuts, and erosion on the
disc and/or seat; or an obstruction lodged across or between the seats preventing the
gate from closing. This section addresses the typical problems that require more attention than the typical maintenance activities, such as cleaning, inspection, and lapping or
polishing. The three types of seat rings discussed herein include integral-type seats,
threaded-in seat rings, and welded-in seat rings.
6-11


DA: Valve disc and seat has foreign material and corrosion products that are preventing full closure.
procedures. If the corrosion products are still attached or if surface scratches are
present, lap the seat and disc per Section 9.3. Seat contact can then be verified by performing a bluing evaluation to ensure 360 contact on the disc face, as discussed in
Section 8.3.
DA: A bluing test reveals less than 360 surface contact between the disc and seats.
RO: Verify that the disc is not seating too low in the seat ring by measuring the inner
diameter (ID) of the seat ring and the outer diameter (OD) of the poppet.
RO: Verify that the guide ribs are in alignment with the seat and that clearances between the poppet wear rings and the guide ribs are in tolerance. Excessive clearance can
result in improper seating. Repair in accordance with Section 8.9.
RO: Lap the seats and disc per Section 9.3. Perform a blue check. If 360 contact is not
achieved, a well qualified machinist/valve technician is needed to properly fit the disc
per Section 8.12.
RO: Measure the poppet and seat angles. The poppet angle should be a minimum of 1
less than the seat angle. If the dimensions are not in tolerance, a well qualified machinist/valve technician is needed to properly fit the disc per Section 8.12.
DA: A bluing test reveals 360 contact between the seats and poppet/disc, but the
valve is still leaking.
RO: If the seat ring is a threaded-in type with a gasket under it, tighten the seat ring or
remove the seat ring and replace the gasket.
RO: If the seat ring is welded-in, check to see if the valve is leaking past the seal weld of
the seat ring. If so, repair in accordance with Section 8.3.
DA: A bluing test reveals that the disc is seating too low in the seats (see Figure 6-10).
RO: Procure a new poppet and fit it, as discussed in Section 8.12.
RO: Re-hardface the disc/poppet and fit it, per Section 8.12.
6-12

Body Seat
Disk Seat
Disk
Body
Body Seat
Figure 6-10
Disc Seating Too Low in Seat
seat ring base material, a repair to the seat ring can be performed per Section 8.3 if the
existing hardfacing is of a repairable type.
6 inches (152 mm) and larger due to the limited development of welding and machining
systems.
6-13

out.
requires very skilled welding personnel experienced in welding hardfacing materials.
integral seats are generally restricted to valves 6 inches (152 mm) and larger, due to the
DA: The poppet is found to have cuts and/or erosion beyond what can be lapped out.
RO: Procure a replacement poppet. The new components must be fitted to the valve as
detailed in Section 8.12.
RO: If the poppet has an isolated crack or cut and the valve technician determines that
the poppet has enough hardfacing material on it so that it will not drop through the seat
RO: Remove the existing hardfacing and repair the poppet per Section 8.12. This approach is generally more effective than the localized repair option.

Damage and associated repair of pressure seal bodies are the same for gate and globe
valves. See Section 5.3.2.

Damage and associated repair of valve stems is the same for gate and globe valves. See
Section 5.3.3.
6-14


close. The result is erosion or wire drawing in leakage areas to high velocity flow in a
concentrated area. Except for cases of casting defects that lead to through-wall weeping,
most body repairs are performed in conjunction with trim repairs, such as seats or
pressure seal bores. The valve body (see Figure 6-11) is a pressure boundary and thus
must be repaired in accordance with the rules of the jurisdictional code. Generally, this
is either ASME or NBIC.
Bonnet
Disc
Pressure Seal Area

Guide Rib
Body
Flow Bore
Seat Area
Figure 6-11
Valve Body [19]
See Section 5.3.4.1.
6-15


Damage and associated repair of gate and globe valve bonnets are the same. See Section
5.3.5.
6.3.6 Poppet (Disc) Guide Ribs
Guide ribs accurately control the alignment of the poppet assembly into the seat to
minimize potential hardfacing damage or bending of a stem. Repair to the guide ribs
and poppet guide rings require precision machining to maintain the critical tolerances.
If the guides are too tight, movement and sealing can possibly be restricted. If they are
too loose, the poppet can hit low in the seats and give a false closure, or the poppet can
vibrate during operation, causing severe damage to the guide ribs.
Guide ribs are most commonly found in Y-type globe valves, where alignment is hampered by the heavy disc sliding at an angle. Guide ribs are also found in critical service,
high flow applications, where high side loads can effect the seating in horizontal or teetype globe valves.
DA: Inspection of the valve reveals that the guide rib is preventing the poppet from
fully closing.
RO: The guide rib should be blued, and the poppet assembly installed and stroked to
determine if and where the contact is being made between the poppet wear rings and the
guide ribs. After determining the clearance problem, a decision should be made about
machining the poppet wear rings per Section 8.12 or the guide ribs per Section 8.9.
DA: The poppet is fluttering while opening/closing and during operation, causing
RO: Tighten the clearances by building up the hardfacing on the poppet wear rings and
RO: Tighten the clearances by building up the hardfacing on the guide rib and machining per Section 8.9. NOTE: The first option is to repair the poppet.
DA: The fillet weld that connects the guide rib to the body is cracked.
RO: The crack should be ground out and repair weld performed, as presented in Section
8.9 for guide repair.
DA: A section of the guide rib hardfacing is missing.
6-16

RO: Perform a guide rib hardfacing repair per Section 8.9 by removing all of the remaining hardfacing material and rewelding new material.
DA: Cracks are found in the guide rib hardfacing.
RO: If the cracks are shallow and isolated, they can be ground out and blended to a 3:1
minimum taper.
RO: If the cracks are extensive or in a critical area that can impact the position of the
poppet as it approaches the seat, the crack should be removed and hardfacing repair
performed per Section 8.9.
6-17

7
CHECK VALVES

Check (or non-return) valves are designed to automatically prevent the reversal of flow in
a piping system without mechanical assistance. Where the flow in a line is in one direction
and isolation is required in the opposite direction, the ability of a check valve to close
independently can be very useful. When time is critical or complex control systems are
impractical, the automatic operation of a check valve offers a significant advantage.
The primary functions of a check valve are:
Minimizing reverse flow
Keeping lines full of fluid
Preventing fluid loss when the system is not in operation
Preventing reverse rotation of pumps
Preventing fluid outflow from vessel
Preventing water column separation
The operation of the check valve is dependent on the type of check valve, flow velocity,
flow turbulence, fluid medium, operating conditions, and upstream components. Check
valves are available in many types and sizes and are selected based on size, closure
speed, flow conditions, pressure drop, durability and ease of maintenance, seat tightness, and process. EPRI Application Guidelines for Check Valves in Nuclear Power Plants,
NP-5479, Revision 1, provides a comprehensive discussion of check valve application
disturbances.
Typical applications of check valves are at the discharge of multiple pumps that provide
flow and pressure head to a common manifold. If one of the pumps ceases to produce
flow and pressure head, the non-return valve at its discharge prevents a flow reversal
through that pump caused by the pressure head produced by the other pumps. Other
applications include feedwater lines to boilers and, in general, a means to minimize the
loss of process media in the event of a pipeline rupture.
7-1

One of the major drawbacks to check valves is their susceptibility to seat damage as a result
of water hammer and high flow reversal. Because the disc impacts directly on the seating
surface during closure, high force impacts (slamming) can quickly destroy the sealing
surfaces. Other repair issues of concern are corrosion, hinge wear, and hinge pin wear.
7.2 Design
7.2.1 General
Non-return valves are designed to function by swinging a disc or lifting a poppet. These
valves are best installed in a horizontal line and are opened by the velocity head of the
flowing fluid. In almost all cases, the impetus to close the disc is initiated by the weight
of the valve disc or by springs with the primary seating force generated by the system
differential pressure. In some instances, auxiliary external weights, springs, dashpots, or
other actuation means are used to aid closing, decrease slamming action against the
seats, or to prevent closing when servicing.
Because the sealing force in a check valve is obtained solely as a result of pressure,
problems can be encountered in obtaining a tight seal at low differentials. This is particularly true with metal-seated valves. The large unit loading necessary for a tight seal
is not present at low pressures in a check valve. When environmental conditions permit
the use of a resilient seat material, the weight of the disc can sometimes provide enough
force to seal. Because resilient seating materials require very little unit stress to provide
tight shutoff, they perform well in low pressure applications. Most check valves are
available with either metal or resilient seats.
There are four basic types of check valves available: swing, lift, tilting disc, and in-line
checks. There are many varieties and options available for each of these four types. Selecting the best design for a particular application tends to be challenging to even the most
experienced engineer. Basically, check valves are selected for their ability to close quickly
before a significant reverse flow velocity develops. The consensus among check valve
manufacturers, architect engineers, and users regarding the closure speed of check
valvesin order of performance from slowest to fastestlists lift, tilting disc, and swing.
However, this is a rule of thumb and does not take system characteristics into account.
As with other types of valves, the perfect valve for one application might not be the
correct valve for a somewhat similar application. For specific applications, the system
designer should consult with a valve engineer qualified in valve selection prior to
specifying a valve.
7.2.2 Swing Check

The swing check valve (see Figure 7-1) is the most widely used type of check valve in
power plant applications due to its relatively simple design, low pressure drop, good
seat tightness, ease of maintenance, and low cost. It offers the least flow resistance and
is generally provided with a bonnet so that the internals are accessible when the valve is
welded in-line.
7-2

Arm
Hinge
Pin
Back Stop
Disc Assembly
Normal
Flow
Seat
62 REF
Checking Member
Figure 7-1
Swing Check Valve [9, 13]
7-3

The checking member in a swing check valve (see Figure 7-1) is a disc supported by a
hinge arm, which in turn is free to swing about a hinge pin pivot point located outside
the diameter of the disc. The clearances at the hinge pin and the hinge arm to disc
connection are critical to providing proper articulation for the disc to align itself with
respect to the seat face, thus providing a good seat.
The seat face is usually inclined at a certain angle with respect to vertical to ensure disc
contact against the seat face and provide sufficient contact force to initiate a seal.
The angle through which the disc swings to go from the fully closed to fully open position ranges from about 45 to 80 for design variations supplied by different manufacturers. In certain designs, the disc moves completely out of the main flow area when the
valve is in the fully open position. Such designs are called clearway swing check
valves, which offer the lowest pressure drop during fluid flow conditions. However,
clearway design swing checks are also most susceptible to accelerated wear and degradation of the internals because their discs are more unstable and experience higher
fluctuation when flow disturbances are present upstream of these valves.
In some designs, the complete disc, hinge pin, and hinge arm assembly are hung from
the bonnet for ease of maintenance. Variations in the alignment of the bonnet with the
valve body could, however, adversely effect the performance of the valve.
In a majority of the designs similar to that depicted in Figure 7-1, the disc stud connecting the disc to the hinge arm serves as a full-open stop by contacting a stop pad either
on the valve body or the bonnet. The common variations in disc stop arrangement are
(a) a hinge arm extension beyond the disc stud, which hits a stop pad in the valve body,
(b) an extension on the hinge arm near the hinge pin location, which hits a stop pad in
the valve body, and (c) an area near the outer diameter of the disc, which directly hits a
stop pad in the valve body.
Advantages and disadvantages of the basic swing check valve configuration are:
Advantages:
Swing check valves are the simplest and most economical to construct of all check
valves.
They are available in line sizes exceeding 48 inches (122 mm).
Swing check valves have the least resistance to flow and cause the lowest pressure
drop of all check valves.
Seating is easily done due to the self-aligning design of the disc-to-hinge arm connection.
They are easy to maintain and repair seat face in situ due to relatively low accuracy
requirements in seat plane orientation.
7-4

Disadvantages:
Swing check valves have the slowest dynamic response due to the long pendulum
length (the distance between the hinge pin and the disc assembly center of gravity)
and relatively long stroke. This creates higher pressure surges (resulting from a flow
reversal) than other types of check valves.
They require more frequent maintenance if used for continuous operation at velocities less than the velocity required for full opening. Oscillation of the disc in the flow
stream, in some cases accompanied by tapping against the backstop, can result in
accelerated wear or fatigue of the hinge pin and the disc stud area. This can lead to
premature failure of the valve if the maintenance frequency is not adequate.
They have higher wear than other types due to disc oscillation under variable flow
conditions.
7.2.3 Lift Check

Lift check valves are available in T-pattern (see Figure 7-2), Y-pattern (see Figure 7-3), or
angle (see Figure 7-4) configurations. The closure element has a relatively short distance
to travel to its seat, so lift check valves are less likely to slam or cause water hammer
compared with a swing check.
Figure 7-2
Lift Check Valve, T-Pattern [13]
7-5

Figure 7-3
Lift Check Valve, Y-Pattern [13]
Figure 7-4
Lift Check Valve, Angle Configuration [13]
7-6

Two of the most common types of lift check valves are disc-type (see Figure 7-5) and
piston-type (see Figure 7-6). Ball-type lift check valves are sometimes used in small
sizes. In disc-type lift check valves, the disc is guided by a smaller diameter pin,
whereas guiding in piston-type lift check valves is done at the outside diameter of the
piston, which provides more guiding surface area, resulting in less wear when operating in a less than full open position.
Seat
Disc
Guide Pin
Figure 7-5
Disc-Type Lift Check Valve [8]
Spring
Body
Piston
Figure 7-6
Piston-Type Lift Check Valve [8]
7-7

The lift check valve can also be equipped with auxiliary devices, such as springs to
accelerate closure and dashpots to slow the valve down in the final stages of travel, just
before seat contact.
Advantages and disadvantages of lift check valves compared to other types of check
valves are:
Advantages:
Lift check valves have fast response due to the short stroke from the fully open to
closed position.
They are suitable for operation at less than full open velocities.
Small size spring-assisted designs can be mounted either horizontally or vertically.
Ball-type valves are good for viscous fluids.
Piston-type valves are good for pulsating flow, because dashpots can be incorporated.
Piston-type valves are also available in Y-pattern body, which has a lower pressure
drop.
Disadvantages:
Lift check valves have a higher pressure drop under fluid flow conditions than other
types of check valves.
Piston-type valves should not be used where solid contaminants are present, which
could cause sticking.
7.2.4 Tilting Disc

The tilting disc check valve (see Figure 7-7) is similar in operation to the swing check
valve, except the disc pivots about an axis located between the disc centerline and the
outside diameter of the disc. The pivot axis (the distance between the pivot point and
center of gravity of the disc) is axially offset from the face of the seat, which minimizes
the pendulum length and provides faster closing action than the swing check. Due to its
faster response and shorter travel, the tilting disc valve is less susceptible to slamming
than the swing check valve because it closes before significant reverse flow velocity is
allowed to develop. Some larger size tilting disc check valve designs incorporate torsional springs inside the hinge pin to assist the disc closing action.
7-8

Disc
Disc Stop
Seat
Body
Figure 7-7
Tilting Disc Check Valve [8]
The tilting disc designs come in several disc shapes. Smoothly contoured disc profiles
have been developed by some manufacturers to minimize turbulence in the valve body
and to improve disc stability. Because the entire disc remains in the flow stream, even in
the fully open position, the stability of the disc and the resulting hinge pin wear is
dependent upon the actual shape of the disc and flow path through the valve body.
Advantages and disadvantages of tilting disc check valves, compared to other check
valves, are:
Advantages:
Tilting disc check valves eliminate fatigue problems associated with the disc-tohinge arm connections in swing check valves.
They have faster response than swing check valves.
They are less susceptible to degradation caused by variable flow than swing check
valves.
They are less susceptible to slamming than swing check valves.
Disadvantages:
Tilting disc check valves have a somewhat higher pressure drop than swing check
valves.
They are more expensive than swing check valves.
They are more difficult to repair because of the need for tighter dimensional control
for proper operation.
7-9

Seat tightness is hardest to achieve due to the precise alignment required between
the disc and seat because of the lack of articulation.
High hinge pin wear might prevent full disc closure into its seat.
7.3 Repair Issues
Repair issues addressed in this section pertain to fixed components, such as valve
bodies, bonnets, valve seats, and pressure seal areas.
7.3.1 Leakage Past the In-Body Seats

Leakage past the seats can be the result of corrosion products on the disc/poppet and
seat; incomplete contact between the seat and disc; scratches, pits, cuts, and erosion on
the disc and/or seat; or an obstruction lodged across or between the seats that prevents
the gate from closing. This section addresses the typical problems that require more
attention than the typical maintenance activities, such as cleaning, inspection, and
lapping or polishing. The three types of seat rings discussed herein include integraltype seats, threaded-in seat rings, and welded-in seat rings.
DA: Valve disc and seat has foreign material and corrosion products that are preventing full closure.
procedures. If the corrosion products are still attached or if surface scratches are
present, lap the seat and disc per Section 9.3. Seat contact can then be verified by performing a bluing evaluation to ensure 360 contact on the disc face as discussed in
Section 8.3.
RO: For disc-type lift check valves with a center guide pin, check the pin and guide bore
for corrosion, debris, or galling. Polish or machine the guide pin, and hone the guide
bore per Section 9.4.
RO: For piston-type check valves, check the guide rings and guide ribs for interference.
Repair the poppet per Section 8.12 and the guide ribs per Section 8.9.
DA: A bluing test reveals less than 360 surface contact between the disc and seats.
RO: Verify that the disc is not seating too low in the seat ring by measuring the ID of the
seat ring and the OD of the poppet.
7-10

RO: Verify that the guide ribs are in alignment with the seat and that clearances between the poppet wear rings and the guide ribs are in tolerance. Excessive clearance can
result in improper seating. Repair in accordance with Section 8.9.
RO: Lap the seats and disc per Section 9.3. Perform blue check. If 360 contact is not
achieved, a well qualified machinist/valve technician is needed to properly shim and/
or fit the disc per Section 8.11 for swing check valves and Section 8.12 for tilting disc
and lift check valves.
RO: Measure the poppet and seat angles of the lift and tilting disc-type check valves.
The poppet angle should be a minimum of 1 less than the seat angle. If the dimensions
are not in tolerance, a well qualified machinist/valve technician is needed to properly
fit the disc per Section 8.12.
RO: Tilting discExamine the hinge, hinge pin, and hinge pin bushings for wear. If
excessive wear is found, repair as directed by the manufacturer. Machine the new
bushing with a portable boring bar per Section 8.10.
RO: Swing checkCheck the alignment of the disc with the seat. Make adjustments as
necessary per the manufacturers directions.
DA: A bluing test reveals 360 contact between the seats and poppet/disc, but the
valve is still leaking.
RO: If the seat ring is a threaded-in type with a gasket under it, tighten the seat ring or
remove the seat ring and replace the gasket.
RO: If the seat ring is welded-in, check to see if the valve is leaking past the seal weld of
the seat ring. If so, repair in accordance with Section 8.3.
RO: Verify that the width of the seat contact surface is appropriate for the size and
pressure rating of the valve. If the contact surface is too wide, the seating surface should
be narrowed by lapping the relief angle of the seat per Section 8.3. The suggested seat
width should be obtained from the valve manufacturer or design drawings.
DA: A bluing test reveals that the disc is seating too low in the seats (see Figure 7-8).
7-11

Figure 7-8
Disc Seating Too Low in Seats [21]
RO: Procure a new poppet and fit it as discussed in Section 8.12.
RO: Re-hardface the disc/poppet and fit it per Section 8.12.
seat ring base material, a repair to the seat ring can be performed per Section 8.3 if the
existing hardfacing is of a repairable type.
7-12

6 inches (152 mm) and larger due to the limited development of welding and machining
systems.
out.
requires very skilled welding personnel who are experienced in welding hardfacing
materials.
integral seats is generally restricted to valves 6 inches (152 mm) and larger, due to the
DA: The poppet is found to have cuts and/or erosion beyond what can be lapped out.
RO: Procure a replacement poppet. The new components will have to be fitted to the
valve as detailed in Section 8.12.
RO: If the poppet has an isolated crack or cut, and the valve technician determines that
the poppet has enough hardfacing material on it so it will not drop through the seat
RO: Remove the existing hardfacing and repair per Section 8.12. This approach is generally more effective than the localized repair option.

Damage and the associated repair of pressure seal bodies are the same for gate- and
check-type valves. See Section 5.3.2.
7-13


Valves stems are found on stop check valves. Damage and the associated repair of valve
stems are the same for gate and globe (stop check) valves. See Section 5.3.3.

close. The result is erosion or wire drawing in leakage areas to high velocity flow in a
concentrated area. Except for cases of casting defects that lead to through-wall weeping,
most body repairs are performed in conjunction with trim repairs, such as seats or
pressure seal bores. The valve body is a pressure boundary and thus must be repaired
in accordance with the rules of the jurisdictional code. Generally, this is either the
ASME or NBIC.
See Section 5.3.4.1.

Damage and the associated repair of gate and check valve bonnets are the same. See
Section 5.3.5.
7.3.6 Poppet (Disc) Guide Ribs

Guide ribs accurately control the alignment of the poppet assembly into the seat to
minimize potential hardfacing damage or bending of a stem. Repair to the guide ribs
and poppet guide rings requires precision machining to maintain the critical tolerances.
If the guides are too tight, they can restrict movement and possibly sealing. If they are
too loose, the poppet can hit low in the seats and give a false closure, or the poppet can
vibrate during operation, causing severe damage to the guide ribs.
Guide ribs are most commonly found in Y-type lift check and stop check valves where
alignment is hampered by the heavy disc sliding at an angle. Guide ribs are also found
in critical service, high flow applications where high side loads can effect the seating in
horizontal lift and angle lift check valves.
DA: Inspection of the valve reveals that the guide rib is preventing the poppet from
fully closing.
7-14

RO: The guide rib should be blued, and the poppet assembly installed and stroked to
determine if and where contact is being made between the poppet wear rings and the
guide ribs. After determining the clearance problem, a decision should be made as to
machining the poppet wear rings per Section 8.12 or the guide ribs per Section 8.9.
DA: The poppet is fluttering while opening/closing and during operation, causing
RO: Tighten the clearances by building up the hardfacing on the poppet wear rings and
RO: Tighten the clearances by building up the hardfacing on the guide rib and machining per Section 8.9. NOTE: The first option is to repair the poppet.
DA: The fillet weld that connects the guide rib to the body is cracked.
RO: The crack should be ground out and a repair weld performed as presented in
Section 8.9 for guide repair.
DA: A section of the guide rib hardfacing is missing.
RO: Perform a guide rib hardfacing repair per Section 8.9 by removing all of the remaining hardfacing material and rewelding new material.
DA: Cracks are found in the guide rib hardfacing.
RO: If the cracks are shallow and isolated, they can be ground out and blended to a 3:1
minimum taper.
RO: If the cracks are extensive or in a critical area that can impact the position of the
poppet as it approaches the seat, the crack should be removed and hardfacing repair
performed per Section 8.9.
7.3.7 Leakage Past the Hinge Pin Cover

Swing check and tilting disc check valves are designed with standard compression
flange and gasket joints (see Figure 7-9) and pressure seal joints (see Figure 7-10). Leaks
are typically the result of insufficient gasket or seal ring compression as a result of
reduced bolt tension lost due to vibration, temperature, and pressure fluctuations.
Other contributors to leaking joints include improper bolting, corrosion and foreign
materials between the valve body and gaskets, scratches, cuts, erosion, and steam cuts.
7-15

Spiral Wound Gasket
Hinge Pin
Roll Pin
Cover
Cover Nuts
Figure 7-9
Swing Check and Tilting Disc Check Valve, Standard Compression
Flange and Gasket Joints [21]
7-16

Hinge Pin Bonnet

Studs
Hinge Pin
Metal Gasket
Hinge Pin Cover
Nuts
Figure 7-10
Swing Check and Tilting Disc Check Valve, Pressure Seal Joints [21]
The type and extent of damage can be determined after the hinge pin cover is removed
and the seal areas inspected utilizing standard maintenance practices. Critical dimensions should be compared to manufacturer drawings and specifications prior to initiating any repair activity.
7-17


DA: Minor scratches and cutting are found in the body sealing surfaces of the body
and/or bonnet seal area.
RO: Determine the depth of the imperfections. Flaws less than .010 inch (.25 mm) can be
removed by polishing with a fine emery cloth or buffing wheel.
RO: If flaws are deeper than .010 inch (.25 mm) on the body seal, the complete inside
diameter of the contact area should be honed per Section 9.4 until the flaw is removed.
The bore should then be measured, and an oversized seal ring selected as discussed in
Section 8.10.
RO: If flaws are deeper than .010 inch (.25 mm) on the bonnet angular surface, the
sealing surface can be repaired by taking a skim cut with a lathe as described in Section
8.10. The critical angle must be maintained.
DA: Deep cuts, porosity, and erosion are found on the body sealing area.
RO: If the flaw is isolated, a localized repair can be performed by grinding out the defect
area, rewelding, and finish machining and honing as detailed in Section 8.10. An oversized seal ring might be required, based on the finished inside diameter measurements.
RO: If the flaws are numerous about the diameter of the bore, the complete inside
diameter of the seal area should be machined to remove all of the cladding, and the seal
area rewelded, machined, and honed to blend with the surrounding bore diameter as
detailed in Section 8.10.
DA: Deep cuts, porosity, and erosion are found on the hinge pin bonnet sealing
surface.
RO: Procure a replacement bonnet.
RO: Verify the dimensional tolerances from the manufacturer and remove the defects
by machining.
DA: Deep cuts, porosity, and erosion are found on the valve body flange sealing
surface.
RO: Machine the surface to the suggested finish, removing the defects as presented in
Section 8.10.
RO: Weld buildup the damaged area and re-machine the pocket and sealing surface as
presented in Section 8.10.
7-18

8
VALVE COMPONENT REPAIRS
8.1 Valve Body Repair

This section presents the practices necessary to repair flaws in the pressure-retaining
bodies, bonnets, and flanges of in-line welded valves (see Figure 8-1a).
Body Flange
Pressure Seal Area

Bonnet Bore
Guide Ribs
Seat Hardfacing
Seat Ring
Flow Bore
Figure 8-1a
Typical Body Repair Locations [13]
8-1

Cracks in the cast or forged bodies of valves are generally the result of manufacturing
defects. The most common type of crack in a valve body is the result of a shrink cavity
or other void in a casting. These types of cracks can also be seen in bonnets and flanges.
Cracks are also found in the heat-affected zones (HAZ) of fabrication welds that join
bonnet flanges to the body and weld joints that join the valve to the process line.
Repairs to valve bodies can be performed with the same practices and procedures
utilized to repair piping and pressure vessels of similar materials. The restricted access
due to size and configuration makes repairs to valve internals quite challenging. The
use of cast materials can also present welding challenges.
Crack repairs are successfully completed when skilled personnel are provided the
proper training and tools and the repair area is accessible. The biggest challenge is
making repairs on P-Nos. 4 and 5 valve bodies (see Table 11-1 for P-Number material
classification), which require elevated preheats and post-weld heat treatment (PWHT).
Current EPRI research is aimed at reducing these high PWHT temperatures through the
use of temperbead welding techniques.
The valve body, bonnet, and flanges are recognized as pressure-retaining materials. As
a result, these components must be repaired in accordance with the rules of ASME and
ANSI, and by ASME or NBBI (National Board of Boiler & Pressure Vessel Inspectors)
manufacturer or repair certificate holders. All welding must be performed by qualified
welders and procedures in accordance with the rules of ASME Section IX.
8.1.1 Repair Strategy

A thorough evaluation of the crack or defect should be made prior to performing an
in situ repair of a valve body. Access to the defect location, the size of the defect, the
materials involved, the final machining tolerances, and the repair window (schedule)
should be reviewed. As a result of this review, the owner must decide whether to perform the repair with a vendor or with in-house personnel, to replace the valve, or to
remove it from the line and send it to a shop for repair.
The following questions should be asked in the process of developing a repair strategy:
Can the indication be removed by grinding without encroaching upon the design
minimal wall, thus avoiding a weld repair?
Does the indication or crack go through the wall requiring a system hydrostatic test
after completion?
Will the repair encroach upon an area that requires precise tolerances and finishes
such as hardfaced seats or pressure seal inlay areas, which would be altered by
welding stresses and heat from the repair?
Is the repair area accessible through the bonnet bore for manual repair techniques?
Is machining and welding equipment available to perform the repair?
Is PWHT equipment available, along with knowledgeable personnel?
8-2

If the indication was found by UT or RT, are the equipment and personnel available
to perform this inspection after the repair is completed?
Are sufficient qualified and experienced personnel available to perform this replacement?
Are sufficient rigging points and space available to move equipment in and out of
the valve?
What are the preheat and PWHT requirements for performing this replacement? If
required, can the welding and machining equipment withstand these elevated
temperatures?
Is a replacement valve available in the time frame necessary, without impacting
plant availability?
8.1.2 Repair Prerequisites

The following should be considered prior to initiating a repair:
Record the manufacturers name, size, pressure rating, valve type, body style, body
material, and trim material data from the valve nameplate.
Obtain drawings and material specifications from the manufacturer.
Obtain and review the maintenance and repair history to see if there have been any
changes to the original design.
Procure a replacement pressure seal ring and an oversize ring if the valve has a
pressure seal bonnet.
Prepare a repair traveler or work instruction that outlines the repair sequence and
inspection hold points. All measurements and findings should be recorded for a
final report.
Install clean plugs in the upstream and downstream bores of the valve to prevent
chips and foreign materials from getting down the line.
Install a protective liner over the pressure seal bore area and in-body seats.
Qualify the necessary welding procedures for hardfacing and base material buildup
and repairs.
If the repair requires unique welding or machining applications or if it might have
adverse effects on seat dimensions, the full repair sequence should be demonstrated
on a mockup. This includes both machining and welding operations.
Measure and record critical dimensions such as guide bores, distances between
seats, pressure seal bores, etc., to monitor any distortion due to welding and PWHT.
8-3

8.1.3 Flaw Removal

The method of flaw removal is based on the size, depth, and location of the flaw.
If a small localized area is to be repaired inside the valve due to a casting flaw, erosion,
or a crack, the area can be manually ground out as discussed in Section 9.1. Examples of
repairs in which manual grinding might be employed to remove localized flaws include
casting pores, a pin hole or minor erosion on the down stream side of a seat ring, steam
cuts at turns in globe and control valves, or steam cuts across flange faces.
A portable boring bar or milling machine would be utilized to remove a circumferential
crack in a seat ring-to-body weld or a flange-to-body weld. If a seat ring is removed and
there is major damage to the seat ring pocket, a boring bar or gate valve seat repair
machine similar to those shown in Section 9.2 would be utilized. Although quite rare, a
flange facer can be utilized if a flange has numerous cuts that would require weld
buildup of the flange to maintain acceptable thickness.
After removing the flaw, the repair area should be tapered away from the flaw to allow for
easy access and welder visibility. Material removal should always be kept to a minimum.
A liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination must be performed after machining
to ensure that no unacceptable indications remain. The acceptance criteria for rounded
indications can found in ASME Section XI, Article 4000.
8.1.4 Filler Material Selection

Filler material selection is dictated by base material compatibility, process selection, and
position as presented in Section 11. The filler material should match the base material
chemistry with properties comparable to the base material. See Table 11-4 for guidance
in selecting the proper filler materials.
8.1.5 Preheat and Post-Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) Requirements

Preheating and PWHT should be performed as presented in Section 13. Preheating
provides very positive benefits to the welding application and final product. Preheating
is employed to reduce the tendency for cold cracking (or hydrogen-assisted cracking),
to reduce the hardening of the heat-affected zone (HAZ), to reduce the residual stresses,
and to decrease component distortion.
Although preheating is not a regulatory requirement, the benefits far outweigh the
potential problems of not using it as shown in Section 13.1. When welding on low
carbon steel P-No. 1 materials greater than 1-1/2 inches (38-mm) thick, a PWHT exemption can be gained by utilizing a 200F (93C) preheat. When welding on low alloy steels
such as the P-No. 4 (WC6) and P-No. 5 (WC9), 300F (482C) and 400F (662C) respective preheats are suggested. A minimum preheat of 100F (38C) is suggested for welding on P-No. 8 (CF3 & CF8) substrates.
8-4

When welding in confined locations, the recommended preheats might not be conducive to productivity. In these cases, the preheat should be lowered to a workable level.
Unless previously qualified at the lower temperatures, a new welding procedure will be
required for the lower preheat.
Castings that have been in service might have water in the defect and surrounding area.
This water/moisture needs to be driven off with local heating to eliminate the potential
for porosity. This localized preheating can be performed with an oxyacetylene torch.
Post-weld heat treating is required for all weld repairs performed on P-Nos. 4 and 5 substrates (see Table 11-1). As mentioned earlier, exemptions to PWHT are available for PNo. 1 materials based on the thickness and preheat temperature as provided in Table 13-4.
8.1.6 Welding Repair

Valve body welding repair can be performed with the gas tungsten arc welding
(GTAW), shielded metal arc welding (SMAW), gas metal arc welding (GMAW), or fluxcored arc welding (FCAW) processes. The process should be selected based on accessibility, quality of weldment required, and productivity. The various processes are described in Section 10. The GTAW process is generally used where critical control is
needed around a valve seat or where radiation levels require remote welding. Very
localized repairs or configurations that are not readily achievable by automated systems
are normally repaired with the SMAW process. Large repairs can be performed with
manual or automated GMAW processes. Repairs to flanges can be performed with any
of the processes, and should be selected based on the amount of material to be deposited. Figure 10-1 presents a productivity comparison of the various welding processes.
Valve body repairs should be completed with the following steps:
After excavating the repair cavity, the repair area should be thoroughly cleaned and
inspected using either the MT or PT examination method. The flaw must be totally
removed from the repair cavity.
Preheat the valve body or localized area as described in Section 13.
Perform the repair weld with the selected process, monitoring frequently for distortion.
If required, perform a post-weld heat treatment using the guidelines established in
Section 13.
Cool to the ambient temperature.
Because of the variety of valve locations and types of damage possible to a valve body,
it would be difficult to provide definitive repair techniques and sequences. Other techniques utilizing sound welding practices and minimal heat input have been used with
much success. The following temperbead repair concept provides some general guidance pertinent to a valve body repair:
Establish welding parameters prior to initiating a weld in the component.
Lay out the weld sequence such that the first layer of weld metal covers the total
repair cavity and onto the finished surface as shown in Figure 8-1b.
8-5

Figure 8-1b
Recommended First Layer Weld Repair Bead Placement for
Valve Body Base Material Repairs [22]
If SMAW welding is employed, a 3/32-inch (24-mm) electrode should be used on
the first two layers. If additional layers are required, larger electrodes can be used.
Stringer beads should be employed to reduce heat input and lower residual stresses.
Welding of second and subsequent layers should be deposited in a manner that aims
to control residual stresses. Weld beads should tie into previously deposited weld
metal and not onto base material. See Figure 8-1c.
Figure 8-1c
Recommended Second Layer Weld Repair Bead Placement for
Cap out the weld approximately 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch (1.6 mm to 3.2 mm) above the
parent metal surface as checked with a straight edge. Do not add excessive layers as
this contributes to higher residual stresses. See Figure 8-1d.
8-6

Figure 8-1d
Recommended Cavity Fill Weld Repair Bead Placement for
8.1.7 Final Machining

The purpose of final machining is to restore the valve body to its original dimensions so
that the valve can function as designed. Manufacturers design drawings should be
available to refer to body bore clearances or flange face dimensions and finishes. The
final machining step should include a thorough comparison of critical dimensions with
those taken before the welding and PWHT operations. It is easy to remove material but
very difficult to put it back. All machinists must know where they are and what their
machining plan is at all times.
In most cases involving valve body repair, the final machining step is a grinding operation. If machining with a boring bar, flange facer, or valve seat repair machine is required to restore critical dimensions, minor grinding might be employed to reduce the
major buildup.
When the bonnet bore has been repaired near the pressure seal area or the poppet is
guided by the bonnet bore, the bore should be checked by taking ID measurements at
various locations in the bore. If there is any question as to concentricity, the bonnet bore
should be honed as presented in Section 9.4. As a final check, the poppet should be
installed and moved up and down to make sure that it is free. The typical clearance is
.020 inches to .030 inches (0.5 mm to 0.8 mm) on the diameter.
It is recommended that the seat and disc be checked by bluing for distortion. If necessary, they should be lapped as presented in Section 9.3. If weld repairs have been made
to the valve bonnet, a blue check should be performed between the stem and backseat
as discussed in Section 8.7.7.
8.1.8 Inspection
The ASME Section XI Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and the ANSI/ASME B31.1
Power Piping Code provide guidance for the repair and inspection of valve materials
defined as pressure-retaining. ASME Section XI, Subarticle IWA-4400 requires that the
8-7

repair welding be performed by qualified welders and procedures in accordance with

Section IX. It also requires that the repair cavity (pressure-retaining base material) shall
be examined by the liquid penetrant (PT) or magnetic particle (MT) method. A final
examination of the finished repair must be performed and documented utilizing the
inspection process that was used to find the indication originally.
8.1.9 Testing
Pre-service testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of ASME/
ANSI OM, Part 10, when the owner determines that the repair activity effects the
valves performance or designed function. This could include a local leak rate test
(LLRT), an integrated leak rate test (ILRT), or a operability/functional test. If the pressure boundary has been penetrated, a hydrostatic test is required.
8.2 Pressure Seal Area Repair
This section presents the practices necessary to repair the body bore area, which serves
as a corrosion-resistant sealing surface for the valve bonnet seal ring. This section also
addresses the repair of the valve bonnet seal area (see Figure 8-2a).
8-8

Figure 8-2a
Pressure Seal Repair Location [18]

Leaking of a pressure seal joint can be the result of insufficient load on the pressure seal
gasket; corrosion, chips, or other foreign matter on the sealing surfaces; damage to the
pressure seal gasket itself; or surface imperfections in the body wall in the form of pin
holes, cracks, erosion, or indentations from assembly. Only the surface imperfections
require repair techniques. The other issues can be resolved with standard maintenance
practices.
An evaluation of the body bore and bonnet sealing surface is required to understand
why the bonnet is leaking. If the defects in the body bore are less than .010-inch
(.25-mm) deep, the bore can be honed using a portable hone (such as equipment
8-9

available from Sunnen) as shown in Section 9.4. If the defects are greater than .010 inch
(.25 mm), a weld repair should be performed. If the leak is the result of a flaw on the
bonnet sealing surface, the flaws can be removed by machining the angled sealing
surface in a lathe and polishing it with an emery cloth. Larger defects up to .020 inch
(.20 mm) might be scalable using a graphite pressure seal ring.
The following questions should be asked in developing a repair strategy for the repair
of the pressure body bore:
Does the bore have a welded inlay of corrosion-resistant weld metal? Many manufacturers do not deposit an inlay on forged stainless steel valves but do on cast
stainless steel.
Is the flaw or crack localized such that it could be removed by grinding? If so, machining might not be required.
Does the flaw or crack encroach upon the retaining ring groove such that machining
of the groove will be required after repair? If so, a boring bar will be required.
Is the flaw or crack deep enough that weld repair would cause distortion to the
valve body bore? If so, a boring bar will be required.
Will removal of the crack or flaw violate minimum design wall thickness? If so, can
a qualified base metal repair be performed? The base metal repair should be performed as presented in Section 8.1.
Are sufficient qualified and experienced personnel available to perform this repair?
Does the owner or repair vendor possess the proper NBIC repair certifications and
ASME Section IX qualified welding procedures?
the valve?
Is equipment available to preheat the repair area? If required, can the welding and
machining equipment withstand elevated temperatures?

Obtain the original design minimum wall thickness from the manufacturer.
Procure a replacement pressure seal ring and an oversize ring.
8-10

final report.
Install a protective liner over the in-body seats.
and repairs.
Demonstrate the machining and welding sequence on a full-scale mockup to familiarize personnel with the work sequence and requirements.
Measure and record critical dimensions, such as guide bores, distances between
seats, retainer ring groove diameter and depth, diameter at the top of the body bore,
and the pressure seal bore, to monitor distortion due to welding.
8.2.3 Flaw Removal

The flaw should be removed by grinding or machining.
If grinding is being utilized to remove a flaw, liquid penetrant should be applied to the
area to help identify the crack location. After completely removing the flaw, the area
should be smoothed and tapered to provide good welding visibility and access.
If the flaw distribution is extensive or if orbital welding equipment is going to be utilized for welding, a boring bar should be utilized to remove material about the complete bore area as shown in Figure 8-2b. A 2:1 or 3:1 transition should be employed at
the upper and lower end of the weld preparation groove.
8-11

Chuck Module
End View
Tool Head
Stand Off
Figure 8-2b
Example of Pressure Seal Area Boring [23]
After completing the grinding or machining operation, an MT or PT examination of the
weld preparation area must be performed to ensure that no unacceptable indications
remain prior to welding.

An austenitic stainless steel wire or electrode is the filler material for pressure seal
inlays that is specified by the valve manufacturers. Alloys typically referred to by valve
manufacturer include 18-8, Types 302, 304, 308, 309, and 316. The Type 309L is most
commonly used by the valve manufacturers.
8.2.5 Preheat and Post-Weld Heat Treatment Requirements

8-12

Because of the differences in coefficient of thermal expansion between the stainless steel
filler materials and the carbon or low-alloy steel substrates, high residual stresses,
which promote distortion and cracking, are very common. As a result, a 400F (204C)
preheat is strongly recommended when performing this repair to P-Nos. 1, 4, and 5
valve bodies (see Table 11-1). If necessary, the preheat can be lowered to the temperatures suggested in Table 13-1. If a repair is made to a cast stainless steel valve body (CF3
or CF8), a minimum preheat of 100F (38C) is suggested.
Castings that have been inservice might have water in the defect and surrounding area.
Except as required by Code, stress relieving should be avoided. Post-weld heat treating
is required for all weld repairs performed on P-Nos. 4 and 5 substrates. Exemptions to
PWHT are available for P-No. 1 materials, based on the thickness and preheat temperatures, as provided in Table 13-4.

Repair welding of pressure seal bores falls into two categories; local cladding and base
metal repair, and bore buildup. Local repairs are generally performed with the GTAW
and SMAW processes where weld quality and control is most important. The GTAW,
SMAW, GMAW, and FCAW processes have been used for full diameter bore buildups.
The automatic GTAW and SMAW processes are generally used for large repairs, or
where radiation levels require remote welding. Several automated systems, as shown in
Appendix B, are commercially available to perform overlay welding.
Localized base metal repairs and deposition of corrosion-resistant cladding require
special attention in order to ensure a successful repair. The following steps should be
considered when making these high stress weldments:
1. Establish welding parameters prior to initiating a weld in the component.
2. Establish the weld sequence such that the first layer of weld metal covers the total
repair cavity.
3. If SMAW is employed, use a 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) electrode on the first two layers. If
additional layers are required, larger electrodes can be used.
4. Use thin stringer beads to reduce heat input and lower residual stresses.
5. Deposit welding on second and subsequent layers in a manner that controls residual
stresses. Weld beads should tie into previously deposited weld metal and not onto
base material.
6. Cap out the weld approximately 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch (1.6 mm to 3.2 mm) above the
parent metal surface as checked with a straight edge. Do not add excessive layers
because this contributes to higher residual stresses.
8-13


The extent of the weld repair dictates the type of machining to be performed. In the case
of small localized repair, the controlled grinding approach can be utilized. A hand
grinder and a thin template cut from shim stock of .010-inch (.25-mm) thickness or less,
having the same radius as the body bore diameter, can be used to reduce the weld
buildup to the height of the shim stock above the bore. A flapper wheel can then be
used to blend the weld buildup to just below the body bore. A straight edge and feeler
gauges can ensure that the repair area is no more than .010 inch (.25 mm) below the
surrounding material. A hone can then be used to finish the bore and blend the repair.
Where major welding has been performed, or where the welding has impacted critical
dimensions at the top of the bore or retainer ring, a boring bar similar to that shown in
Figure 8-2b should be used. Regardless of the machining technique, a hone should be used
to finish the sealing area (see Section 9.4). A finish of 32 rms or finer is recommended.
Dimensional tolerances of .005 inch (.13 mm) on the diameter are required to obtain a
good seal with an iron seal ring. The recent development and use of graphite seal rings
have provided tolerances of up to .010 inch (.25 mm). These new rings also provide
some tolerance for finish and small scratches up to about .010-inch (.25-mm) deep.
8.2.8 Inspection
be examined by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle method. A final PT must also
be performed after final machining.
8.2.9 Testing
ANSI OM, Part 10, when the owner determines that the repair activity affects the valves
performance or designed function. This could include a local leak rate test (LLRT), an
integrated leak rate test (ILRT), or a operability/functional test. If the pressure boundary has been penetrated, a hydrostatic test is required.
8.3 Seat Ring Repair
This section focuses on the repair of welded seat rings and the hardfacing material
applied to them. See Figure 8-3a. Replacement of seat rings is covered in Section 8.4.
8-14

Gate Valve Body
Seat Ring
Seal Weld
Figure 8-3a
Seat Ring Configuration [11]
Seat rings are found in most gate, swing check, and tilting disc check valves in which the
seat is 90 to the bonnet bore. They are also found in globe, angle, lift checks, and Y-type
valves. However, the globe-type configurations also utilize the integral seats in many
applications. Most repairs performed on seat rings are the result of cracks or wear in the
hardfacing materials. Left unrepaired, erosion will eventually penetrate completely
through the seat ring and into the pressure-retaining base material.
Repairs to seat rings can be completed successfully with the proper knowledge, tools,
and trained personnel. Machining and welding technology for in situ repair of gate
valve seats has advanced significantly since the early 1990s. Several field service companies can repair or replace seat rings of pressure Class 300 and above with a minimum
nominal diameter of eight to ten inches (203 mm to 254 mm). Smaller gate valves should
be removed from the line and repaired in the shop or replaced. Under extreme circumstances, seat ring repairs have been performed on valves as small as 2-inches (51-mm)
nominal diameter.
Repairing globe valve seat rings (parallel to the bonnet bore) is easier than repairing
gate valve seat rings (perpendicular to the bonnet bore), due to the accessibility of the
seat straight down the bonnet bore. Machine and lapping tools are available for all sizes
and pressure ratings. Because of the straight-in approach to the seat, welding can be
performed with either machine or manual welding processes.
8-15

8.3.1 Repair Assessment and Strategy

A thorough evaluation should be performed prior to committing to a seat ring repair.
Minimal tolerances are often employed, making material removal or distortion from
welding very critical to obtaining a leak-free seat. In many cases, seat ring removal and
replacement is a more cost-effective repair option. When hardfacing materials such as
Stellite 1, 6, and 12, or the nickel-based alloys are encountered, strong consideration
should be given to removing the existing hardfacing material and completely rewelding
or replacing the seat ring. In evaluating the repair/replacement option, the following
questions should be asked:
Can the defect be removed by grinding without impacting the sealing area, thus
avoiding a weld repair?
Does the crack or defect penetrate into the seat ring base material such that a welded
repair activity could significantly deform the ring? If so, the ring should be replaced.
Does the crack or defect penetrate into the valve body such that a welded repair of
the pressure boundary material will be required? If so, the ring should be replaced
in conjunction with the valve body repair.
Review the valve inspection report and determine if enough hardfacing material
exists on the seat ring to perform a repair and still achieve acceptable seating contact. If not, can the disc or wedge be built up or adjusted to compensate for the
material loss? If the hardfacing on the seat ring must be built up, the owner should
also consider the option of seat ring replacement.
the valve?
Is the existing hardfacing material repairable without the use of elevated preheat
temperatures?

8.3.2.1 Generic Prerequisites
8-16

final report.
Install a protective liner over the pressure seal bore area.
8.3.2.2 Gate Valve Specific Prerequisites
Establish match marks on both sides of the wedge with respect to the matching seat,
prior to removing the wedge from the valve body. This ensures that the wedge is reinstalled in the same direction.
Perform a blue check (see Section 15.3) and record the seating location on the wedge
as shown in Figure 8-3b.
Figure 8-3b
Blue Check for Seating Location [16]
8-17

Measure and record the wedge dimensions as shown in Figure 8-3c.
Dia. C
Dim. A
Dim. B
Figure 8-3c
Typical Wedge Dimensions [16]
8-18

Measure and record the minimum distances between the valve seats at the locations
shown on Figure 8-3d.
Gate Valve Body

Dim. A
Seat Ring
Dim. C
Ref. Point
Seal Weld
Dim. B
Figure 8-3d
Gate Valve Seat Measurements [11]
8-19

Measure and record the seat width on both seats as shown in Figure 8-3e.
Partial Penetration
Groove Weld
Seat Ring
Seat Contact
Width
15
Figure 8-3e
Reference Dimensions for Gate/Check Valve Seat Width [13]
Utilizing a low stress punch, establish two reference points on the seat ring as shown
in Figure 8-3d and record the reference dimensions. These are used later to establish
the final hardfacing thickness.
8.3.2.3 Swing Check Valve Specific Prerequisites
Remove the disc assembly and record any damage. Particular attention should be
given to the seat, hinge pins, and hinge pin bushings.
Perform a blue check and record the seating location of the disc.
Measure and record the seat width as shown in Figure 8-3e.
8-20

Seat
Contact
Width
15
Reference Marks
62 Ref.
Figure 8-3f
Reference Points on the Seat Ring of Swing Check Valve [13]
Utilizing a low stress punch, establish three reference points on the seat ring as
shown in Figure 8-3f and record the reference dimensions. These are used later to
establish the final hardfacing thickness.
8-21

8.3.2.4 Tilting Disc Check Valve Specific Prerequisites

Perform a blue check and record the seating location on the disc as shown in Figure
8-3g. When working with large valves, a light check might be just as appropriate
and work equally welI.
Bonnet
Disc
Body
Disc
Seat Ring
Seating
Diameter
Figure 8-3g
Seating Location on Tilting Disc [24, 28]
8-22

shown in Figure 8-3h and record the reference dimensions. These are used later to
establish the final hardfacing thickness.
A
0
240
120
A
Reference Mark
Figure 8-3h
Reference Mark Locations on Tilting Disc [28]
8.3.2.5 Horizontal Globe, Angle Globe, and Lift Check Valve Specific Prerequisites
Remove the poppet (plug) and record any damage. Particular attention should be
given to the seat ring, poppet seat, body guides, and poppet guides.
Perform a blue check and record the seating location on the poppet as shown in
Figure 8-3i. This should be a thin line of contact.
8-23

Seating Location
Original
Stem-Disc
Assembly
Figure 8-3i
Seat Location on Poppet [13, 16]
Measure and record the inside diameter of the seat ring, the outside diameter of the
seat angle, the distance from the top of the seat to the bonnet flange surface, and the
body bore diameter as shown in Figure 8-3j.
8-24

Poppet
OD
ID
Body Seat
Bore Diameter
Flange To Seat
Figure 8-3j
Typical Body Dimensions, Globe Valve [28]
Measure and record the ID and OD of the poppet seat and the OD of the poppet
wear ring. See Figure 8-3j.
8-25

8.3.2.6 Y-Type Globe and Lift Check Valve Specific Prerequisites

Perform a blue check and record the seating location of the poppet. This should be a
thin line of contact.
body bore diameter as shown in Figure 8-3k.
Flange to Seat
Body Bore
Diameter
OD Seat
Ring
ID
Figure 8-3k
Typical Body Dimensions, Y-Type Globe and Lift Check Valve [13]
wear ring.
8-26

8.3.3 Defect Removal

The method of flaw removal is based on the number of flaws, their distribution, and the
overall amount of material to be removed. If a small localized area is going to be repaired due to a corrosion pit, stress crack across the seat, or a deep wear scar, the defect
should be removed by manual grinding as discussed in Section 9.1. In applications
where the repair to the seat ring hardfacing is extensive, all of the hardfacing should be
removed from the face of the seat ring by machining with a portable lathe as shown in
Figure 8-3l for gate-type valves and Figure 8-3m for globe configurations. If the flaws
propagate into the seat base material, a manual grinding method should be employed
to remove the remaining flaw leaving a 3:1 tapered weld preparation cavity (see Section
9.1). A verification should then be performed with an etchant to verify complete removal of all hardfacing material and a liquid penetrant examination performed to
verify that no cracks or defects exist in the area to be repair welded.
Guide
Rib
Drive
Motors
Hardfacing
Material
Cutting
Tool
Figure 8-3l
Gate Valve Seat Machining [26]
8-27

Drive Motor
Upper Chuck
Boring Bar
Lower Chuck
Clean Plug
Cutting Tool
Inflatable
Bladder
Figure 8-3m
Globe Valve Seat Machining [26]

Filler material selection is dictated by base material compatibility and position as presented in Section 11. Except for the rare case where a repair is made to seat ring base
material, the filler material will be a hardfacing alloy such as ASME Section II, SFA 5.13,
RCoCr-A (Alloy 6), Alloy 21, or NOREM 02A (see Table 11-10 ). If the hardfacing is a
repairable type, such as Alloy 21 or NOREM 02A, the repair can be performed with
matching hardfacing material. If the existing hardfacing is a much harder material, such
as Alloy 1 (RCoCr-C), Alloy 6 (RCoCr-A), or one of the nickel alloys (RNiCr-A or B), a
softer repair material should be utilized. If a base metal repair or buildup is required, a
Type E309 or ER309 for P-No. 1 or P-No. 8 substrates, or ER70S-3 for A106 (P-No. 1) seat
rings, can be selected.
8-28


As presented in Section 13, PWHT is not required (see Table 11-1 for P-Number specifications) for depositing hardfacing on P-Nos. 1 and 8 substrates, but is required for
P-Nos. 4 and 5 substrates; however, different rules apply to the repair of the base materials. The PWHT requirements and exemptions are listed in Tables 13-2, 13-3, and 13-4.
While not required, a moderate preheat is suggested when depositing any hardfacing
material on a uniform surface and is strongly recommended when performing localized
repair. The preheat reduces the potential for microcracking in the fusion zone of the
dissimilar materials. A 250F (121C) minimum preheat is suggested when applying
hardfacing materials to forged P-No. 1 seat rings, and a 300F (149C) preheat for cast
P-No. 1 substrates. A 200F (93C) preheat is suggested for both forged and cast P-No. 8
substrates.
When performing localized welding repairs of existing hardfacing deposits on seat rings,
a 250F (121C) to 400F (204C) preheat is recommended. The higher preheat temperatures might not be feasible due to their effect on remote equipment or personnel.
8.3.6 Repair Welding

Repair welding of seat rings in gate-type configurations is generally performed with the
machine GTAW process (see Figure 8-3n) due to the difficult welding positions encountered and the lack of accessibility. The accessibility is much improved in check valves,
but the variety of welding positions make this repair also challenging. Machine GTAW
also offers superior welding controls for bead placement and heat input, which are
critical to the successful application of a crack-free hardfacing deposit.
8-29

Control
Handle
Weld
Head
Wire
Spool
Video
Camera
AVC
Unit
Weld
Wire
Mounting
Chuck
Figure 8-3n
Gate Valve Hardfacing Application, Machine GTAW [26]
Repair welding of seat rings in globe-type valves is routinely performed with the machine GTAW process (see Figure 8-3o). The most common applications have been the
large Y-type main steam isolation valves (MSIV) and feedwater regulator valves. The
manual GTAW process can also be utilized in applications where the valve is large
enough and the seat close enough to the valve opening to allow the welder to get both
hands (arms) into the valve.
8-30

Wire
Spool
Guide
Track
Frame
Wire
Guide
Video
Camera
Weld
Head
Figure 8-3o
Globe Valve Hardfacing Application, Machine GTAW [26]
The shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) process with coated electrodes has been successfully utilized in both gate and globe applications, especially for localized repairs.
Welding control can be compromised, compared to the machine process, resulting in
stress cracking. Spatter is another concern for the SMAW process, which requires protection of other hardfaced surfaces prior to welding. The shielded metal arc process can
be employed as a repair process for GTA-welded hardfacing deposits.
A welding sequence should be developed prior to initiating the weld repair. Because
the seat ring is a thin cylinder, extreme care should be exercised to minimize distortion
from the heat input. A minimum of two hardfacing layers should be applied. If the
repair requires more than three layers or 0.250 inch (6.3 mm) of deposited filler material,
a butter layer should be utilized prior to depositing the hardfacing. After welding, a
measurement should be taken to ensure that sufficient material has been applied to
8-31

allow for machining and lapping to final dimensions. If a stress crack is encountered at
any time during the hardfacing application, a repair should be completed prior to
applying additional material.
Localized hardfacing repairs are quite challenging and should be performed as presented in Section 14.2. The defect should be completely removed and the repair area
preheated to a minimum of 250F (121C). Thin layers should be deposited until the
deposit is approximately 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above the original surface.

8.3.7.1 Gate-Type Configurations
Remachining of seat rings to their original dimensions can be quite challenging in the
machine shop and even more challenging in situ. This step is by far the most difficult
and critical step in repairing or resurfacing a seat ring. Obtaining accurate information
and dimensions from the OEMs and having good references and data prior to welding
will pay great dividends in the final machining operation. The data recorded prior to
machining and welding, along with the manufacturers drawings, should be used to
develop the finished seat thickness and width. Once the seat has been re-established,
the final adjustments necessary to get a 360 blue check are made by machining, grinding, or lapping the wedge as presented in Section 8.11.
In situ machining of the seat ring is performed with special boring bars developed specifically for gate valve-type seats. These machines are designed to align off the seat ring bore,
off the guide ribs (see Figure 8-3p), or off the opposite seat and bore (gate valves).
Throughout the machining operation, visual examinations should be performed to verify
that the hardfacing is free of surface cracks. After machining, there should be sufficient
material to finish the surface by lapping. For gate and swing check valve seats, the machining operation should also put the relief angle on the seat to narrow the seat width to
that recommended by the valve manufacturer. The seat surface should be finished with a
gate valve lapping machine such as that shown in Section 9.3.
8-32

Radial Feed
Mounting Fixture
Chuck Module
Tool Head
Figure 8-3p
Globe Valve Seat Final Machining [23]
For local seat repair applications, the seat can be remachined with a machine tool and
lapped as in the same manner as the total resurfacing repair method, or the repair can
be ground and blended with a flapper wheel, followed by lapping.
8.3.7.2 Globe-Type Configurations
The final machining step plays the biggest role in achieving minimal leakage past the
seat. The primary goal of the final machining operation is to have a finished seat that is
very accurately aligned with the bore, perpendicular to the bore, and has a precise and
consistent angle. Maintaining the proper seat angle within tolerance is extremely critical
to achieving a good seal. The seat angle is typically 1 different than that of the poppet
as shown in Figure 8-3q. The data recorded prior to machining and welding, along with
the manufacturers drawings, should be used to establish the target dimensions needed
to locate the seat. After machining, the seat should be lapped to blend any remnant tool
marks. Lapping should be minimized in order to maintain the sharp angle and concentricity resulting from the machining operation. The acceptable blue check will be a 360
fine line around the poppet seat.
8-33

Figure 8-3q
Typical Globe Valve Seat Angle Differential [13]
8.3.8 Inspection
Power Piping Code do not provide repair and inspection requirements for the seat ring
and hardfacing because they are not defined as pressure-retaining components. However, ASME Section XI does require that the repair welding be performed by qualified
welders and procedures in accordance with Section IX. As a matter of good practice, the
repair cavity should be examined by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle method.
These same methods should be used after completing the repair. It is essential that the
sealing surface of the hardfacing be free of any linear indications to ensure leak-tightness across the seat.
8.3.9 Testing
Testing shall be performed in accordance with plant design requirements. This could
include a local leak rate test (LLRT), an integrated leak rate test (ILRT), or in some cases
no leak rate test at all. Because the pressure boundary has not been penetrated, no
hydrostatic test is required.
8-34

8.4 Seat Ring Replacement

This section focuses on the replacement of welded-in and threaded seat rings. Repair of
seat rings is addressed in Section 8.3.
Seat rings are found in most gate, swing check, and tilting disc check valves in which
the seat is 90 to the bonnet bore. Seat rings are found in about half of the globe valves,
angle valves, lift checks, and Y-type valves, with the balance being manufactured with
integral seats.
Welded seat rings are installed with a partial penetration seal weld joining the seat ring
to the valve body. In gate-type configurations, the weld is located in the flow stream
area of the valve as shown in Figure 8-4a. In globe-type valves, the seal weld is found
either above or below the seat at the discretion of the manufacturer (see Figure 8-4b).
These welds are typically 1/8 inch to 3/8 inch (3.2 to 9.6 mm) deep, providing a seal to
the leak path under the seat ring. This weld is not considered a structural weld.
Seal Weld
Figure 8-4a
Typical Gate Valve Seat Ring Seal Weld [27]
8-35

Seal Weld
Figure 8-4b
Typical Seal Weld Locations for Globe-Type Seat Rings [28]
Threaded seat rings are generally found in control and safety valves of all pressure classes
and in Class 150 and Class 300 pound gate, globe, and check valves. Threaded seat rings
are designed to stay in by preloading like a bolt thread or by welding. These can be either
tack welds or a full diameter seal weld located on the upstream side of the seat ring.
8-36

There are two basic seat ring configurations for gate valves. The most common configuration has the seat ring pocket that is machined parallel to the flow bore as shown in
Figure 8-4a. If the seat is at an angle from the bonnet bore centerline to accommodate a
wedge, the angle is machined into the seating end of the ring prior to applying
hardfacing. In the second seat ring configuration, the seat ring pocket is machined into
the valve body at an angle to the flow bore (see Figure 8-4c). This design allows for a
uniform length seat ring, which makes in situ machining more difficult but makes
alignment of the new ring much easier. All threaded-type gate valve seat rings are also
made in this configuration.
Gate Valve Body

Seat Ring Angle
(Typically 5)
Seat Ring Pocket
Figure 8-4c
Seat Ring Angle Generated by the Angle in the Seat Pocket [14]
Globe valve seats rings, welded-in and threaded (see Figure 8-4d), are installed parallel
to the bonnet bore. This is true for horizontal, angle, Y, and, Y-angle designs.
8-37

Lower Stem
Packing
Stuffing Box
Packing
Top Closure
(Bonnet)
Gasket
Guide Bushing
Inner Valve
Seat Ring
Body
Guide Bushing
Gasket
Bottom Closure
Drain Plug
Figure 8-4d
Example of Globe Valve with a Threaded Seat Ring
(Courtesy of Anchor/Darlington Valve Company)
In situ seat ring replacement is quite common in most globe-type valve applications.
Only recently, with the advances of in situ machining and welding equipment, have
some of the valve manufacturers and service companies been able to replace welded-in
gate valve seat rings in a cost-effective manner. Several field service companies can
replace seat rings in most gate-type valves 8 inches to 10 inches (203 mm to 254 mm)
nominal size and larger. Smaller gate valves should be removed from the line and
repaired in the shop or replaced. Under extreme circumstances, welded-in seat ring
repairs have been performed on valves as small as 2 inches (51 mm) nominal diameter.
8-38

Replacing globe valve seat rings (perpendicular to the bonnet bore axis) is easier than
replacing gate-type valve seat rings (parallel to the bonnet bore axis), due to the accessibility of the seat straight down the bonnet bore. Welding, machining, and lapping
equipment is available for all sizes and pressure ratings. Because of the straight-in
approach to the seat, welding and machining can be performed with either machine or
manual repair processes.
The replacement of threaded seat rings is much more common, even in situations where
the valve is welded in-line. Simple replacement due to a damaged ring can be performed
with grinders and special spanner wrenches. The repair challenge for valves with
threaded-in seat rings is when the body threads have been damaged or eroded away. Like
that of valves with welded-in seat rings, the globe-type configuration is quite repairable
with the portable boring bars currently available. In situ repair of gate valve body threads
is limited to very special one-off applications above 12-inches (305-mm) diameter.
This section simply addresses the replacement of welded-in and threaded seat rings.
After the seat ring is replaced, the mating disc or poppet must be fitted to the new seat
ring to achieve the desired seal. In many cases, particularly with the tilting disc and
swing check valves, the fitting operation can be just as difficult as the seat ring repair.

In cases where the hardfacing material is thin, has multiple indications, or is of a
hardenable type, seat ring replacement is generally the proper approach. This approach
avoids the potential welding problems associated with hardfacing materials. The replacement ring is already hardfaced and, therefore, the only welding required is that of
the ring to the valve body, utilizing a compatible filler material.
A thorough evaluation should be performed prior to committing to a seat ring replacement. Minimal tolerances are often employed, making material removal or distortion
from welding in the seat ring critical to obtaining a leak-free seat. This operation requires significant resources and management support to ensure that mockup training is
performed and that the necessary equipment is available.
When evaluating the option of seat ring replacement versus valve replacement, the
following questions should be asked:
Can the flaw be removed by grinding without impacting the sealing area, thus
avoiding a seat ring repair or replacement?
Does the crack or flaw penetrate into the valve body or threaded area such that a
welded repair of this pressure boundary material will be required? If so, are the proper
welding procedures qualified and materials available to do a base metal repair?
Is there enough hardfacing material on the seat ring, based on the valve inspection
report, to allow for reconditioning to the proper seat configuration? If so, can the
disc or wedge be built up or adjusted to compensate for the material loss and thus
avoid seat ring replacement?
Is machining, welding, and lapping equipment available to perform the replacement?
8-39

Are qualified and experienced welding, machining, and valve repair personnel
available to properly support the repair?
the valve?
Are replacement seat rings available?
If needed, are replacement wedges, discs, or poppets available?
If body threads are damaged, can the valve design be changed to accomodate a
drop-in seat ring that is seal-welded?

Record the manufacturer name, size, pressure rating, valve type, body style, body
Procure replacement seat rings and have the supplier ready to finish machining
them after taking final measurements in the field. If the plant has machining capability, the rings can be shipped to the job site for final machining.
Procure a replacement wedge or disc if required.
Prepare a repair traveler or work instruction that outlines the repair sequence and inspection hold points. All measurements and findings should be recorded for a final report.
Determine if PWHT equipment and personnel are available for replacing seat rings
in valve bodies fabricated from P-Nos. 4 or 5 materials.
Establish match marks on both sides of the wedge with respect to the matching seat
prior to removing the wedge from the valve body. This will ensure that the wedge is
re-installed in the same direction.
8-40

Perform a blue check and record the seating location on the wedge as shown in
Figure 8-3b. The blue check will provide the valve repair technician with the information necessary to determine what type of repair or adjustments will be required
for the wedge to seat properly upon re-installation.
shown as shown in Figure 8-3d.
Utilizing a low stress punch, establish two reference points behind each seat ring as
shown in Figure 8-3d. and record the reference dimensions from the seat ring face to
the reference mark. These will be used to re-establish the seat face location when
fitting the new seat rings.
Locate and establish the seal weld centerline. Compare with the manufacturers
drawings and establish the cut line.
given to the seat, disc, hinge pins, and hinge pin bushings.
Perform a blue check and record the seating location of the disc. The blue check will
provide the valve repair technician with the information necessary to determine
what type of repair or adjustments will be required for the disc to seat properly
upon re-installation.
Measure and record the seat width as shown in Figure 8-3f.
Utilizing a low stress punch, establish three reference points on the seat ring 120
apart as shown in Figure 8-3f and record the reference dimensions. These will be
used later to re-establish final seat face location when fitting the new seat ring.
8-3g. Measure the poppet seat angle and verify with the manufacturers drawing.
The blue check will provide the valve repair technician with the information necessary to determine what type of repair or adjustments will be required for the disc to
seat properly upon re-installation.
shown in Figure 8-3h and record the reference dimensions. These will be used later
to establish the final hardfacing thickness.
Measure the disc seat angle and verify with the manufacturers drawings.
8-41

8.4.2.5 Horizontal Globe, Angle Globe, and Lift Check Valve Specific Prerequisites
Measure and record the ID and OD of the poppet seat, and the OD of the poppet
wear ring.
Measure the poppet seat angle and verify with the manufacturers drawings.
8.4.2.6 Y-Type Globe and Lift Check Valve Specific Prerequisites
Perform a blue check and record the seating location of the poppet. This should be a
thin line of contact.
wear ring.
Measure the poppet seat angle and verify with the manufacturers drawings.
8.4.3 Seat Ring Removal

Seat ring removal is performed by several methods. When selecting a removal process,
issues such as accessibility, time/schedule constraints, radiation levels, and air quality
should be considered. The methods most commonly used include:
Manually grinding out the seal weld
Grinding out the seal weld with automatic systems
Machining out the seal weld with a single point tool (see Figure 8-4e)
8-42

Rotational Drive
Weld Torch
Mounting Fixture
Figure 8-4e
Split View of Valve Body (In-Line) Exhibiting the Seal Weld Fixture [27]
Machining out the complete seat ring
Removing the threaded-in seat ring by grinding out the tack or seal weld and unscrewing it with a special spanner wrench
Grinding is a time-consuming process that also presents radiation exposure and air
quality concerns. Several companies have developed manipulators that get the maintenance personnel out of the valve (thereby reducing the overall radiation exposure) and
provide some time savings over the manual method. Grinding can also be used when
equipment or qualified machinists are not available.
Machining out the seal weld or complete seat ring is quick, clean, and precise when
performed by a qualified machinist with well-designed equipment. Globe valve seat
rings can be removed with a variety of commercially available boring bars, as well as
some special bars developed by repair organizations.
Machining out gate and check valve seat rings is performed very effectively with some
of the special machines developed by service companies specializing in field machining
and welding. Machines designed and manufactured for gate valve seat ring repair were
commercially available by mid-1996.
The sequence for removing a seat ring is the same for both gate and globe valves. Extreme
care should be taken to establish the cut location. This can be performed visually, by
etching, or by UT. The machine tool should be centered to the bore and aligned to the cut
line to minimize material removal. Review the drawings to verify the seal weld depth.
The seal welds are generally 3/16-inch to 1/4-inch (4.7-mm to 6.3-mm) deep. While
8-43

machining, the machinist should look for a crack in the machined groove indicating that
the seal weld has been penetrated. If the machined groove reaches a depth of 3/8 inch
(9.5 mm) and a crack is not visible, a determination should be made about going deeper
or adjusting the cut location. It is extremely important that the seat ring pocket depth is
not increased by cutting into the base material because this alters the seat ring reference.
After severing and removing the ring, the valve body should be prepped as shown in
Figure 8-4f to install the new ring.
Valve Body
Flow Bore
Finished Prep
Figure 8-4f
Valve Body Preparation for Replacement Seat Ring [11]
During service, the crevice between the seat ring pocket and the seat ring (or the seat
ring threads) can fill with corrosion particulate and other materials resulting in a stuck
seat ring. Methods that can be used to remove the seat ring include:
Welding lugs on the ID bore and pulling and rotating the ring
Run weld beads along the ID of seat ring to shrink the ID
Heat valve body around seat ring to expand the pocket
8-44

Cool the seat ring with dry ice

Sever axially with a grinder to remove segments (extreme care should be taken to
minimize the damage to the in-body threads)
In those applications where the body threads of a threaded-in seat ring have been damaged, the threads should be removed completely with a boring bar. Care must be taken
to ensure that all base metal defects have been removed by performing a PT of the
machined surface. If a design change is authorized for a welded-in seat ring, the new
pocket diameter and depth must be achieved by precision machining.

Filler materials selection is dictated by base material compatibility and position as
presented in Section 11. For stainless steel valves, a Type E309 or ER308 filler material
should be selected for stainless steel (P-No. 8) substrates, and a 7018 or ER70S-3 for
carbon steel (P-No. 1) substrates.

As presented in Section 13, PWHT is not required for joining P-No. 8 substrates; is
conditional, based on thickness and carbon levels in the P-No. 1 substrates; and is required for P-Nos. 4 and 5 substrates (see Table 11-1 for P-Number specifications). The
PWHT requirements and exemptions are listed in Tables 13-2, 13-3, and 13-4.
Preheat and PWHT should be applied by placing heating mats on the outside surface of
the valve body in the area opposite the weld. The heating mats should be wrapped with
insulation and the temperature controlled as described in Section 13.
8.4.6 Seat Ring Installation and Welding

Installation of seat rings should be performed by a qualified valve technician or under
the direction of a manufacturers representative. Proper seat ring installation significantly reduces the time and effort needed to fit the disc or wedge to the new seat. Except for some gate valves and check valves with tapered seats, seat ring installation for
both gate- and globe-type configurations is basically the same.
If the damaged threads have been machined out and are going to be restored, the machined area should be built up with weld metal per Section 14.1 or 14.2 as shown on
Figure 8-4g. If required by the qualified welding procedure, preheat the repair area of
the valve prior to welding. The new threads can then be machined into the body with a
special threading attachment available for some portable boring bars (see Figure 8-4h).
If the new seat ring must be tack or seal welded, follow steps 5 through 8 of the Seat
Ring Installation Sequence on page 8-49.
8-45

Weld Buildup
Seat Ring
Figure 8-4g
Typical Weld Buildup for Repair of Threaded Globe Valve Seat Ring Pocket
8-46

Radial Feed Control
Axial Feed Control
Machine Tool Body
Rotating Bar
Mounting Plate
Valve Body
Tool Head
Figure 8-4h
Valve Boring System with Thread Attachment for Restoration
of Threads in the Seat Ring Pocket [23]
Seat Ring Installation Sequence
1. Verify the critical dimensions of the replacement seat ring and pocket. The new ring
should match the OD and length of the removed ring.
2. If required, machine the OD and length of the replacement seat ring. It should be
noted that the valve manufacturers produce these components to very strict tolerances; therefore, field machining is a rare occurrence and should be avoided.
3. Rig the seat ring into the valve body and fit it into the pocket. The seat ring should
bottom out in the pocket. Extreme care should be taken to ensure that the pressure
seal bore is not nicked or scratched.
4. Verify that the seat ring is properly seated in the bottom of the pocket and properly
aligned with the bore.
8-47

NOTE: If the welded-in type seat ring is tapered (see Figure 8-4i), it must be clocked in to
the proper orientation. Some manufacturers provide a match mark at the 12 oclock position
for alignment. Valve manufacturers can also provide critical reference measurement locations to ensure proper seat ring orientation.
Body Match Mark
Seat Ring
Match Mark
Figure 8-4i
Example of Tapered Seat Ring [16]
8-48

5. Tack weld the seat ring into position per Section 14.1.
6. Install the welding system into the valve body and align the weld joint.
7. If required by the qualified welding procedure, preheat the seal weld area of the
valve to the required temperature.
8. Perform the seat ring to body seal weld (partial penetration groove weld) per Section 14.1 (manual process) or 14.2 (machine process). This is generally a two- or
three-pass weld.
CAUTION: Welding heat input should be minimized to reduce the potential for seat ring
distortion.
In situ seat ring replacement in gate-type configurations is generally performed with the
machine GTAW process (see Figure 8-4j) due to the difficult welding positions encountered and the lack of accessibility. The accessibility is much improved in check valves
but the variety of welding positions make this repair challenging.
Weld
Head
Seal
Welds
Torch
Extended
To Perform
Weld
Figure 8-4j
Split View of Valve Body (In-Line) Exhibiting Seal Weld Head Setup [27]
Replacement of seat rings in globe-type valves is performed routinely with the machine
GTAW process (see Figure 8-3o). The manual GTAW process can also be utilized in
applications where the valve is large enough and the seat close enough to the valve
opening to allow the welder to get both hands (arms) into the valve.
8-49

The shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) process is frequently utilized to install seat
rings in globe valves, but is extremely difficult to use in gate applications. Welding
control can be compromised, compared to the machine process resulting in stress cracking. Spatter is another concern for the SMAW process, which requires protection of
finished hardfaced and sealing surfaces prior to welding. The shielded metal arc process can be employed as a repair process for GTA-welded hardfacing deposits.
A welding sequence should be developed prior to initiating the weld repair. Because
the seat ring is a thin cylinder, extreme care should be exercised to minimize distortion
due to heat input.
If hardfacing repairs are required after installing the seat ring, they should be performed as presented in Section 8.3 and the welding guidelines provided in Section 14.3.
The defect should be completely removed and the repair area preheated to a minimum
of 250F (392C). Thin layers should be deposited until the deposit is approximately
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above the original surface.
8.4.7 Machining
No machining is required of the seal weld. Because welding stresses and heat can affect
the seat ring, post-weld lapping is required. Machining is required only in cases where
the seat ring has warped considerably due to excessive heat input. Machining of the seat
ring hardfacing should be performed as described in Section 8.3.7. Because replacement
seat rings come from the manufacturer with a ground, not lapped, sealing surface, a
minimal amount of lapping as described in Section 9.3 is necessary.
The condition of the installed seat ring on gate valves can be determined by applying a
thin layer of bluing to the hardsurfaced seat and lightly lapping to locate low spots on
the ring. If low spots are found, continue to lap until all bluing is removed from the
sealing surface. The last step is to establish the correct seat width on the gate and swing
check seats by grinding the relief angle on the outer edge of the hardfaced face (see
Figure 8-4k). Refer to the valve manufacturers specification and/or drawings to obtain
this dimension, which is based on ring size and pressure rating.
8-50

Grind/Machine Outside Angle

To Narrow Seat Width
Figure 8-4k
Gate Valve Seat Narrowing [13]
For globe-type valves, the seat or seat ring should be blued and a plug-type lap machined to the exact conical angle of the seat ring, and used to check for concentricity and
low spots (see Figure 8-4l). Lapping should continue until all of the bluing is removed.
The ideal seat shall be concentric to the bore, perpendicular to the bonnet flange, with a
crisp angle at the intermost seat dimension. The well-defined angle provides a thin, 360
contact line between the poppet and seat.
8-51

Plug O.D. to Fit Seat I.D.
Figure 8-4l
Typical Lapping Fixture for Globe-Type Seat Ring [13]
8.4.8 Inspection
The ASME Section XI Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and the ANSI/ASME B31.1 Power
Piping Code require that the seal weld be inspected by either the liquid penetrant (PT) or
magnetic particle (MT) process as discussed in Section 15.1. A PT should also be performed on the hardfaced seat to verify that welding stresses have not cracked the seat.
8.4.9 Testing
8.5 Integral Seat Repair
This section presents the operations and requirements necessary to perform a repair of
integral in-body valve seat. An integral seat is hardfacing material welded directly onto
the pressure-retaining valve body. Replacement of the complete integral seat is presented in Section 8.6.
Integral seats are primarily found in globe, angle, lift check, and Y-type valves. Integral
seats are rarely found in gate and swing check valves with a pressure Class of 600 and
8-52

higher. The exception is an occasional tilting disc check valve and some 2 inches
(51 mm) nominal pipe size (NPS ) and smaller gate valves. Because integral seats are
basically non-existent in nuclear valves of the gate-type configuration, this discussion is
limited to the globe-type valves. In cases where a utility does come in contact with one
of these gate-type valves, the repair can be addressed similarly to that of a gate valve
seat ring hardfacing repair. Welding would be performed in the same manner with a
butter layer of weld material that is compatible with the base material applied over the
base material. This ensures a sound substrate for the hardfacing material.
Integral seat repair is extremely challenging to the most experienced valve repair experts.
However, they can be completed successfully with the proper knowledge, equipment,
welding materials, and trained personnel. Machining and welding technology for in situ
repair of globe valve seats has advanced significantly since the early 1980s. Machining
and lapping tools, as well as automatic GTAW and GMAW systems, are commercially
available for all sizes and pressure ratings. Because of the straight-in approach to the seat,
welding can be performed with either machine or manual welding processes.
In situ hardfacing repairs are readily performed by field service companies for globe
valves 10 inches (254 mm) and larger. Under extreme circumstances, seat repairs have
been performed on valves as small as 2 inches (51 mm) nominal diameter.

Developing a repair strategy with backup positions is essential prior to committing to a
seat ring repair. Due to the inherent high residual stresses and low ductility of the
hardfacing materials, a small pit can become long multiple cracks after grinding or
welding is initiated. Because of the tight tolerances required to obtain a leak-free seal,
excessive material removal or distortion from welding could result in the need for a
larger scope repair or complete replacement. The type of hardfacing on the seat, as well
as the base material, must also be considered. The less forgiving hardfacing materials,
such as those commonly referred to as Stellite 1 (ASME SFA 5.13, RCoCr-C), 6 (ASME
SFA 5.13, RCoCr-A), and 12 (ASME SFA 5.13, RCoCr-B), and the nickel-based alloys,
such as Colmony 4 and 5, and Deloro 40 and 50 (ASME SFA 5.13, RNiCr-A and B), are
extremely difficult to repair. If the base material is a P-No. 4 or P-No. 5 (see Table 11-1)
and the hardfacing is thin, a preheat and post-weld heat treatment is required.
When evaluating the hardfacing repair/replacement option, the following questions
should be asked:
Can the flaws be removed by machining a thin layer off the complete seat surface
and maintain required hardfacing thickness, thus avoiding a weld repair?
Does the crack or flaw penetrate into the valve body such that a welded repair of
this pressure boundary material will be required?
8-53

report, to perform a repair and still achieve acceptable seating contact? If not, can the
disk or wedge be built up or adjusted to compensate for the material loss? If the
hardsurfacing on the complete seat diameter must be built up, the owner should
also consider the option of complete seat replacement.
the valve?
temperatures? Can the welding and machining equipment withstand these elevated
temperatures?

final report.
Qualify the necessary welding procedures for hardfacing and base material repairs.
Demonstrate the full repair sequence on a mockup. This includes both machining
and welding operations.
given to the in-body seat, poppet seat, body guides, and poppet guides.
Perform a blue check and record the seating location of the poppet as shown in
Measure and record the inside diameter of the seat, the outside diameter of the seat
angle, the distance from the top of the seat to the bonnet flange surface, and the
wear ring(s).
8-54

8.5.3 Defect Removal

The method of flaw removal should be based on the number of flaws, their distribution,
and the overall amount of material to be removed. If a small localized area is going to
be repaired due to a corrosion pit, stress crack across the seat, or a deep wear scar, the
defect should be removed by manual grinding as discussed in Section 9.1. In applications where numerous shallow indications are on the seating surface and a sufficient
hardfacing thickness remains, a surface cut across the seat at the proper angle should be
performed with a portable lathe as shown in Figure 8-3p. If the flaws propagate into the
base material, a manual grinding method or a portable lathe should be employed to
remove the remaining flaw leaving a 3:1 tapered weld prep (see Section 9.1). A liquid
penetrant (PT) examination should be performed to verify that no cracks or indications
exist in the area to be repair welded.

Filler materials selection is dictated by base material compatibility, welding position, and
process as presented in Section 11. Except for the case where a repair or buildup of the
base material is required, the filler material is a matching hardfacing alloy such as Alloy
21. If the existing hardfacing material is one of the more hardenable materials, such as
Alloy 1 (ASME SFA 5.13, RCoCr-C), 6 (ASME SFA 5.13, RCoCr-A), or 12 (ASME SFA 5.13,
RCoCr-B), a more forgiving material, such as Alloy 21, NOREM 02A, should be selected.
In some cases, a stainless material, such as ASME SFA 5.9, ER309 or ASME SFA 5.9,
ER308, has been selected because the repair area is just a small portion of the overall seat
area and would have little effect on the distribution of load across the seating surface.
When a base metal repair or buildup is required or if the weldment is for structural
restoration (minimum wall), the selection must be based on the base material and operating temperatures. For structural restoration of all base materials and for high temperature applications on P-Nos. 4 and 5 substrates, a compatible filler material must be
utilized (see Table 11-4). For non-structural buildups, a Type 309 stainless filler material
can be utilized. An austenitic filler material, such as ER309, provides a more forgiving
substrate for depositing hardfacing than the carbon steel filler materials, due to their
similar coefficients of thermal expansion.

As presented in Section 13, PWHT is not required for depositing hardfacing on P-Nos. 1
and 8 substrates, but is required for P-Nos. 4 and 5 substrates (see Table 11-1 for PNumber specifications). However, different rules apply to the repair of the base materials. The PWHT requirements and exemptions are listed in Tables 13-2, 13-3, and 13-4.
While not required, a minimum 200F to 400F (93C to 204C) preheat is essential to
performing any localized repair. The lower preheats can be utilized when repairing
Alloy 21 or NOREM 02A on stainless substrates, and increasing to 450F to 550F (232C
to 288C) for P-No. 5 substrates. Successful repairs to the more hardenable hardfacing
8-55

materials often require preheats in excess of 800F (427C). The suggested preheat temperature also varies based on the quality and technique of the welder, the quality of
filler material, and the method of base metal fabrication.
8.5.6 Repair Welding

Localized welding repair of an integral seat in globe-type valves is generally performed
with the machine GTAW process and the manual SMAW process. The most common
applications have been the large Y-type main steam isolation valves (MSIV) and turbine
throttle valves (see Figure 8-5a). The manual GTAW process can also be utilized in
applications where the valve is large enough and the seat close enough to the valve
opening to allow the welder to get both hands (arms) into the valve.
Figure 8-5a
Turbine Throttle Valve
8-56

The shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) process with coated electrodes has been successfully utilized on large and small valves where radiation exposure is not a concern.
A drawback to the SMAW process is that it produces spatter and compromises welding
control; however, both can be overcome with good practices. In some cases, the position
or weldment configuration dictates the SMAW process as the only viable repair process.
Localized hardfacing repairs are quite challenging and should be performed as presented in Section 14.2. Experience has shown that a tapered repair cavity that provides
access and visibility to the welder, a well planned and proven welding sequence, and a
welder experienced with welding hardfacing materials greatly enhance the potential for
a crack-free repair.
After welding, a measurement should be taken to ensure that there is a minimum of
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of hardfacing material above the original surface and surrounding
hardfacing to allow for machining and lapping to the final dimensions. If a stress crack
is encountered at any time during the hardfacing application, the crack should be
ground out prior to applying additional material. The finished weld should be wrapped
in insulation to allow for slow cooling.
8.5.7 Machining
For local seat repair applications, the seat can be remachined with a machine tool and
lapped, or the repair can be ground and blended with a flapper wheel, followed by additional grinding and lapping with a lapping machine, such as that shown in Figure 8-5b.
8-57

Mounting Plate
Valve Seat
Lapping Plate
Figure 8-5b
Swing Check Valve Lapping Machine [Courtesy of EFCO]
If the entire seat was built up with additional hardfacing, which is not recommended,
remachining with an in situ boring bar is required. These machines are designed to align
off the guide ribs and flange face (see Figure 8-3p) in order to maintain concentricity
with the bore. This step is critical in performing a successful seat repair. Obtaining
accurate information and dimensions from the OEMs and having good references and
data prior to welding will pay great dividends in the final machining operation. The
data that are recorded prior to machining and welding, along with the manufacturers
drawings, should be used to develop the finished seat thickness and width. Throughout
the machining operation, visual examinations should be performed to verify that the
hardfacing is free of surface cracks. After machining, the seat should be lapped to blend
any remnant tool marks. Lapping should be minimized to maintain the sharp angle and
concentricity resulting from the machining operation.
8-58

After the in-body seat has been re-established, the final adjustments necessary to get a 360
blue check are made by machining and lapping the poppet as presented in Section 8.12.
8.5.8 Inspection
Power Piping Code do not provide repair and inspection requirements for the seat ring
and hardfacing because they are not defined as pressure-retaining components. However, ASME Section XI does require that the repair welding be performed by qualified
welders and procedures in accordance with Section IX. As a matter of good practice, the
repair cavity should be examined by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle method.
These same methods should be used after completing the repair. It is essential that the
sealing surface of the hardfacing be free of any linear indications to ensure leak-tightness across the seat.
8.5.9 Testing
8.6 Integral Seat Replacement
This section presents the operations and requirements necessary to replace integral inbody valve seats. An integral seat is hardfacing material welded directly onto the pressure-retaining valve body. Repair of integral seats is presented in Section 8.5. Full seat
replacement has become quite common in the nuclear industry as utilities replace their
cobalt bearing hardfacing alloys with the non-cobalt bearing types. Other typical reasons for seat replacement include insufficient thickness of the remaining hardfacing due
to several repair or maintenance operations, and cracking of the hardfacing types that
are very difficult to repair. This would include the cobalt-based Alloys 1, 6, and 12
(ASME SFA 5.13, RCoCr-C, A, B, respectively), and the nickel-based alloys, Deloro 40
and 50 and Colmonoy 4 and 5 (ASME SFA 5.13, NiCr-A and B).
Integral seats are primarily found in globe, angle, lift check, and Y-type valves. Integral
seats are rarely found in gate and swing check valves with a pressure Class of 600 and
higher. The exception is an occasional tilting disc check valve and some 2 inches
(51 mm) NPS and smaller gate valves. Because integral seats are basically non-existent
in nuclear valves of the gate-type configuration, this discussion is limited to the globetype valves. In cases where a utility does come in contact with a gate-type valve, the
repair is very similar to that of a gate valve seat ring hardfacing replacement. Welding
would be performed in the same manner with a butter layer of weld material that is
compatible to the base material applied over the base material. This ensures a sound
substrate for the hardfacing material.
8-59

Integral seat replacement is extremely challenging to the most experienced valve repair
experts. However, it can be completed successfully with the proper knowledge, equipment, welding materials, and trained personnel. Machining and welding technology for
in situ repair of globe valve seats has advanced significantly since the early 1980s. Machining and lapping tools, as well as automatic GTAW and GMAW systems, are commercially available for all sizes and pressure ratings. Because of the straight-in approach to
the seat, welding can be performed with either machine or manual welding processes.
In situ hardfacing repairs are readily performed by field service companies for globe
valves 10 inches (254 mm) and larger. Under extreme circumstances, seat replacements
have been performed on valves as small as 2-inches (51-mm) nominal diameter.

In cases where the hardfacing material is thin, has multiple indications, or is of a
hardenable type, complete seat replacement is generally the most cost-effective approach.
Developing a repair strategy is essential prior to initiating a integral seat replacement.
The potential for schedule setbacks is high due to the difficulty in machining hardfacing
materials and the sensitivity of these materials to cracking. When the schedule is critical,
mockup training in every aspect of the replacement should be performed. The activity
that is taken for granted or overlooked will become a lesson learned for others to avoid.
An equally important issue essential to that of a repair strategy is management support.
The successful replacements have been those that had quality equipment, experienced
machining and welding personnel, manufacturers support, training, and an organization with recognized, responsible, and empowered personnel.
When evaluating an in situ seat hardfacing replacement, the following questions should
be asked:
Can the flaws be removed by machining a thin layer off the complete seat surface
and maintain required hardfacing thickness, thus avoiding a weld repair?
Does the crack or flaw penetrate into the valve body such that a welded repair of
this pressure boundary material will be required?
Is there enough hardfacing material on the seat, based on the valve inspection report,
to perform a repair and still achieve acceptable seating contact? If not, can the disk or
wedge be built up or adjusted to compensate for the material loss?
Can the indication be repaired more easily with a localized repair method? Should
that be the initial repair method with replacement as a backup approach?
Are sufficient qualified and experienced personnel available to perform this replacement?
8-60

the valve?
What are the preheat and PWHT requirements for performing this replacement?
Can the welding and machining equipment withstand these elevated temperatures?
8.6.2 Seat Hardfacing Replacement Prerequisites

final report.
and repairs.
Demonstrate the full repair sequence on a mockup. This includes both machining
and welding operations.
given to the in-body seat, poppet seat, body guides, and poppet guides.
Perform a blue check (see Section 15.3) and record the seating location of the poppet
as shown in Figure 8-3i. This should be a thin line of contact.
Measure and record the inside diameter of the seat, the outside diameter of the seat
angle, the distance from the top of the seat to the bonnet flange surface, and the
wear ring(s).
Based on the measurements of the poppet seat, determine whether the poppet seat
hardfacing will be replaced.
8.6.3 Seat Removal and Weld Preparation

Seat removal can be performed by several methods. When selecting a removal process,
issues such as accessibility, time and schedule constraints, amount of material to be
8-61

removed, size of valve, radiation levels, and air quality should be considered. The
methods most commonly used include:
Manually grinding out the seat
Grinding out the seat with automatic systems (see Figure 8-6a)
Figure 8-6a
Seat Removal with Automatic Grinding System
Machining out the seat with a single point tool (see Figure 8-3p)
Milling out the seat
Grinding is a time consuming process that also presents radiation exposure and air
quality concerns. Several companies have developed manipulators that get the maintenance personnel out of the valve (thereby reducing the overall radiation exposure) and
provide some time savings over the manual method. Grinding can also be used when
machining equipment or qualified machinists are not available.
Machining the seat out is quick, clean, and precise when performed by a qualified
machinist with well-designed equipment. Globe valve seats can be removed with a
variety of commercially available boring bars, as well as some special bars developed by
repair organizations. Several service companies have developed globe valve machining
systems that mill out most of the material and then finish the job with a single point
turning method.
8-62

The machining sequence incorporates both hardfacing removal and weld preparation
for the build up material and hardfacing. The repair procedure should explicitly detail
the machining operation. It should include drawings of the prep configuration, with
dimensions, of the weld prep for the buildup or butter layer, and the weld prep for the
hardfacing deposit if a two-step method is selected. Because of dilution into the original
base material when the hardfacing was deposited initially, as much as 1/8 inch to
3/16 inch (3.1 mm to 4.8 mm) of additional material has to be removed to get rid of the
hardfacing material. This additional material removed must be replaced with buildup
layers if minimum wall thickness is violated or seat support is reduced, or with a butter
layer if the original base material dimensions must be re-established.
It is extremely crucial that the machine tool be centered to the bore and aligned to the
cut line to minimize material removal. Axial and radial reference points must be established for monitoring material thickness removal, for position referencing when tooling
is broken, and for final machining.
Hardfacing removal is a time consuming operation. Because the material is extremely
hard, slow travel speeds and feed rates are utilized. Tooling wears quickly and tool bits
have a tendency to break, thus requiring frequent tool bit changeouts. This can be
reduced by utilizing carbide tooling and very rigid machine tools.
A liquid penetrant (PT) exam must be performed on the pressure-retaining base material after machining or prior to welding. A second PT should be performed on the
buildup or butter layer prior to depositing the hardfacing material.

Filler material selection is dictated by the purpose of the weldment, base material compatibility, process, and welding position as presented in Section 11.
As stated previously, seat replacement requires that some of the original base material
be removed in order to remove the hardfacing material that was diluted for some depth
into the original base material. Because hardfacing thickness should be minimized, the
base material must be replaced to re-establish the base material dimensions prior to
depositing the hardfacing material.
In cases where minimum wall thickness has been encroached upon or even violated, the
ASME Section XI requires that filler material matching the base material chemistry and
properties be used (see Table 11-4). If the weld is being treated as a non-structural
buildup or butter layer, a filler material more compatible with the hardfacing alloy can
be selected. As an example, filler metal ASME SFA 5.9, ER309 (stainless steel) is often
used on the P-No. 1 carbon steel substrates because of its similar coefficient of expansion to the cobalt and iron-based hardfacing alloys.
When a base metal repair or build up is required, or if the weldment is for structural
restoration (minimum wall), the selection must be based on the base material and operating temperatures. For structural restoration of all base materials and for high temperature
applications on P-Nos. 4 and 5 substrates, a compatible filler material must be utilized.
8-63

The less hardenable Alloy 21 or the NOREM 02A hardfacing materials should be selected for utilization on most globe-type seat applications. These materials are easier to
apply over most substrates with very little preheat (see Section 13) and provide the
properties necessary for impact and erosion applications. The galling wear properties of
the very hard materials are unnecessary in globe valves. For more information on
hardfacing selection, refer to the EPRI Cobalt Reduction Guidelines [29].

and 8 substrates, but is required for P-Nos. 4 and 5 substrates (see Table 11-1 for PNumber specifications). However, different rules apply to the repair of the base materials. The PWHT requirements and exemptions are listed in Tables 13-2, 13-3, and 14-4.
While not required, a minimum 200F to 400F (93C to 204 C) preheat is essential when
welding hardfacing materials. The lower preheats can be utilized when welding Alloy
21 or NOREM 02A on stainless substrates, and increasing to 450F to 550F (232C to
288C) for P-No. 5 substrates. Successful applications of the more hardenable hardfacing

Welding an integral seat into globe-type valves is generally performed with the machine GTAW process and the manual SMAW process. The most common applications
have been the large Y-type main steam isolation valves (MSIV) (see Figure 8-3o) and
turbine throttle valves. The manual GTAW process can also be utilized in applications
where the valve is large enough and the seat close enough to the valve opening to allow
the welder to get both hands (arms) into the valve. Suggested welding practices are
The shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) process with coated electrodes has been successfully utilized on large and small valves where radiation exposure is not a concern.
A drawback to the SMAW process is that it produces spatter and compromises welding
When welding on large valves or valves where a significant quantity of material was
removed to eliminate the original hardfacing material, a two-step welding application is
recommended. The base metal should be restored to its original position by building up
the area as shown in Figure 8-6b. This buildup can then be machined with the desired weld
prep or cavity to ensure that the hardfacing deposit does not exceed approximately
8-64

3/16 inch (4.8 mm). The hardfacing is then deposited into the prepared cavity. This methodology, similar to that used by the original manufacturer, ensures proper location and
thickness of the new seat, as well as ensuring a quality hardfacing deposit. After completing the hardfacing weldment, it should be wrapped in insulation to allow for slow cooling.
Figure 8-6b
Base Material Restoration for Seat Ring
8.6.7 Machining
Machining the seat to its original dimensions can be quite challenging in the machine
shop and even more challenging in situ. A good machining operation results in minimal
leakage past the seat at the completion of the job.
In situ machining to obtain a finished seat is performed with the same boring bar utilized to remove the hardfacing material and provide the weld prep in which the
hardfacing was deposited (see Figure 8-6c). The primary goal of the final machining
operation is to have a finished seat that is very accurately aligned with the bore, is
perpendicular to the bore, and has a precise and consistent angle. The data recorded
prior to machining and welding, along with the manufacturers drawings, should be
used to establish the target dimensions needed to locate the seat.
8-65

Figure 8-6c
In Situ Machining of MSIV Seat
After machining, the seat should be lapped to blend any remnant tool marks. Lapping
should be minimized in order to maintain the sharp angle and concentricity resulting
from the machining operation.
After the in-body seat has been re-established, the final adjustments necessary to get a 360
blue check are made by machining and lapping the poppet as presented in Section 8.12.
8.6.8 Inspection
Power Piping Code address repair of the base material but do not provide repair and
inspection requirements for the seat hardfacing because it is not defined as pressureretaining. ASME Section XI, Subarticle IWA-4400 requires that the repair welding be
performed by qualified welders and procedures in accordance with Section IX. It also
requires that the repair cavity (pressure-retaining base material) shall be examined by
liquid penetrant or magnetic particle method. As a matter of good practice, PT or MT
inspection should be used after completing the hardfacing deposit and final machining.
It is essential that the sealing surface of the hardfacing be free of any linear indications
to ensure leak-tightness across the seat.
8-66

8.6.9 Testing
8.7 Bonnet Backseat Repair and Replacement
This section provides the operations and requirements necessary to repair or replace
backseats in the bonnet of valves. Like in-body seats, manufacturers provide both
integral seats and replaceable seat rings. Both types are addressed here.
Because backseats are on the removable bonnet, these repairs should be performed in a
shop with either stationary or portable machining and welding equipment. As with any
hardfacing repair, proper training, equipment, and experienced personnel are needed to
complete a successful repair or replacement.

A thorough review of options should be considered prior to committing to a repair
approach. Very tight tolerances are required, making material removal or distortion
from welding very critical to obtaining a leak-free seat. In applications where there is a
seat ring, seat ring removal and replacement can be more cost-effective than the repair
option for a multitude of reasons. When cracks or flaws are encountered on integral
seats, and the hardfacing material is Alloy 1, 6, and 12 (ASME SFA 5.13, RCoCr-C, A,
and B, respectively), strong consideration should be given to removing the existing
hardfacing material and applying a new hardfacing deposit.
When evaluating the repair and replacement option, the following questions should be
asked:
Can the flaw be removed by grinding, thus avoiding any type of weld repair?
Can the flaw be removed by machining a thin layer off the complete seat surface and
still obtain a good blue check, thus avoiding a repair weld?
Does the crack or flaw penetrate into the seat ring base material such that a welded
repair activity could significantly deform the ring? If so, the ring should be replaced.
report, to perform a repair and still achieve acceptable seating contact? If the
hardsurfacing on the seat ring must be built up, the owner should consider seat ring
replacement.
Does the crack or flaw protrude into the valve body such that a welded repair of the
pressure boundary material is required? If so, the integral seat or seat ring, as appropriate, should be replaced in conjunction with the valve body repair described in
Section 8-1.
8-67

If this is a seat ring type, is a replacement seat ring available?

Is machining and welding equipment available to perform the repair in the machine
shop?
Is portable machining and welding equipment available to perform the repair if the
shop is not available or equipped?
Is the existing hardfacing material repairable without the use of a elevated preheat
temperature that might distort the bonnet or bonnet flange?
Is the base material a P-No. 4 or P-No. 5 Alloy (see Table 11-1) that requires a
PWHT? If so, machining of the bonnet flange is probably required due to distortion.

final report.
Qualify the necessary welding procedures for hardfacing and base material repairs.
Remove the valve stem from the bonnet and record any damage. Particular attention
should be given to the stem backseat shoulder.
Measure and record the bonnet seat inside diameter, outside diameter and seat angle.
Measure and record the stem backseat major diameter, minor diameter, and seat
angle.
Perform a blue check and record the seating location on the stem backseat shoulder
as shown in Figure 8-7a. This should be a thin line of contact.
8-68

Packing Ring
Bonnet
Stem
Figure 8-7a
Typical Bonnet Backseat/Stem Configuration for Blueing [16]
8.7.3 Flaw Removal

8.7.3.1 Localized Repair
If a small localized area is going to be repaired due to a corrosion pit, stress crack across
the seat, or a deep wear scar, the defect should be removed by manual grinding as
discussed in Section 9.1. The finished repair cavity should have a 3:1 taper into the
surrounding area to provide access and visibility to the welder. A liquid penetrant (PT)
examination should be performed to verify that no cracks or indications exist in the area
to be repair welded.
8.7.3.2 Integral Seat Replacement
Seat hardfacing removal can be performed by several methods. When selecting a removal process, issues such as machine tool availability, amount of material to be removed, material hardness, and radiological concerns should be considered. The methods most commonly used to remove bonnet backseats include:
Manually grinding out the seat hardfacing
Machining out the seat with a lathe
Machining out the seat with a portable boring bar
Manual grinding is a time consuming process that also presents radiological concerns
when the valve is contaminated. Grinding can be used successfully when machining
equipment or qualified machinists are not available.
8-69

Machining the seat out is quick, clean, and precise when performed by a qualified
machinist on a stationary lathe or mill. Seats can be removed with a variety of commercially available boring bars, as well as some special bars developed by repair organizations. Several service companies have developed globe valve machining systems that
mill out most of the material and then finish the job with a single point turning method.
The machining sequence incorporates both hardfacing removal and weld preparation
for the build up material and hardfacing. The repair procedure should explicitly detail
the machining operation. It should include drawings of the prep configuration, with
dimensions, of the weld prep for the buildup or butter layer, and the weld prep for the
hardfacing deposit if a two-step method is selected. Because of dilution into the original
base material when the hardfacing was deposited initially, as much as 1/8 inch to
3/16 inch (3.2 mm to 4.8 mm) of additional material has to be removed to get rid of the
hardfacing material. This additional material removed must be replaced with buildup
layers if minimum wall thickness is violated or seat support is reduced, or with a butter
layer if the original base material dimensions must be re-established.
Hardfacing removal is a time consuming operation. Because the material is extremely
hard, slow travel speeds and feed rates are utilized. Tooling wears quickly and tool bits
have a tendency to break, thus requiring frequent tool bit changeouts. This can be
reduced by utilizing carbide tooling and very rigid machine tools.
A liquid penetrant (PT) exam must be performed on the pressure-retaining base material after machining or prior to welding. An informational PT should be performed on
the buildup or butter layer prior to depositing the hardfacing material.
8.7.3.3 Seat Ring Removal
Bonnet backseat ring removal is performed by several methods. When selecting a removal process, issues such as machine tool availability, amount of material to be removed, material hardness, and radiological concerns should be considered. The methods most commonly used to remove bonnet backseat rings include:
Manually grinding out the seal weld
Machining out the seal weld with a lathe or portable boring bar
Machining out the complete seat ring with a lathe, mill, or portable boring bar
Machining of lock welds and unthreading the seat ring
Grinding is a time consuming process that also presents radiation exposure and air
quality concerns. Grinding can be used when machining equipment or qualified machinists are not available.
Machining out the seal weld or complete seat ring is quick, clean, and precise when
performed by a qualified machinist on a lathe or mill. Seat rings can be removed with a
variety of commercially available portable boring bars, as well as some special bars
developed by repair organizations.
8-70

Extreme care should be taken to establish the cut location. The machine tool should be
centered to the bore and aligned to the cut line to minimize material removal. Review
the drawings to verify the seal weld depth. The seal welds are generally 3/16-inch to
1/4-inch (4.8-mm to 6.4-mm) deep. While machining, the machinist should look for a
crack in the machined groove indicating that the seal weld has been penetrated. If the
machined groove reaches a depth of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) and a crack is not visible, a
determination should be made about going deeper or adjusting the cut location. It is
extremely important that the seat ring pocket depth is not increased by cutting into the
base material because this will alter the seat ring reference. After severing and removing
the ring, the valve body should be prepped to install the new ring.

Filler material selection is dictated by the purpose of the weldment, base material compatibility, process, and welding position, as presented in Section 11.
As stated previously, seat replacement requires that some of the original base material
In cases where minimum wall thickness has been encroached upon or even violated, the
used on the P-No. 1 carbon steel substrates because of its similar coefficient of expansion to the cobalt- and iron-based hardfacing alloys.
When a base metal repair or buildup is required, or if the weldment is for structural
utilized (see Table 11-4).
the very hard materials are unnecessary in backseat applications. For more information
on hardfacing selection, refer to the EPRI Cobalt Reduction Guidelines [29].

and 8 substrates, but is required for P-Nos. 4 and 5 substrates (see Table 11-1 for
8-71

P-Number specifications). With the exception of P-No. 1 materials, the PWHT requirements are the same for the partial penetration seal welds and the repair or buildup of the
base materials. The PWHT requirement can be eliminated on P-No. 1 substrates provided
a 200F (93C) preheat is utilized. The requirements and exemptions are listed in Tables
13-2, 13-3, and 14-4.
While not required, a minimum 200F to 400F (93C to 204C) preheat is essential when

Localized repair of bonnet backseat is performed with manual GTAW or SMAW processes. The GTAW process is preferred due to the welding control and quality desired
for this small but challenging application. The SMAW process provides a higher deposition rate but compromises control. A comprehensive discussion of seat ring repair
welding is presented in Section 8.3.6 and integral seat welding in Section 8.5.6.
Integral bonnet backseat repair in which all of the hardfacing material is replaced can be
performed quite efficiently with the manual GTAW or SMAW processes. Orbital GTAW
machines, as presented in Appendix B, have also been utilized to build up the substrate
and apply the hardfacing filler materials. A detailed discussion of integral seat replacement welding, which applies directly to this application, is presented in Section 8.6.6
Seat ring replacement of bonnet backseats is almost exclusively performed with the
manual GTAW process. This process provides the precision bead placement and heat
input controls that are necessary to control distortion to the ring. The drawback to the
SMAW process is the need to protect the hardfaced surface from the weld spatter generated. A detailed installation sequence and welding discussion is provided in Section 8.4.6.
If the SMAW process is selected, 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) diameter electrodes should be
utilized for the first two layers to minimize heat input and distortion.

The final machining step is critical to achieving minimal leakage past the seat. The
primary goal of the final machining operation is to have a finished seat that is very
accurately aligned with the stuffing box bore, is perpendicular to the bonnet face, and
has a precise and consistent angle. The seat angle must be held to very strict
manufacturers tolerances of less than 1/2 degree to ensure that the stem seat makes
contact at the bottom of the bonnet backseat as shown on Figure 8-7b.
8-72

Bonnet
Backseat
Stem Seat
Stem
Figure 8-7b
Proper Stem to Backseat Seating Configuration [13]
Machining of the seat must be performed on a lathe or with a portable boring bar that
has independent alignment capability. The data recorded prior to machining and welding, along with the manufacturers drawings, should be used to establish the target
dimensions needed to locate the seat.
After machining, the backseat should be lapped with the stem as shown on Figure 8-7c.
The bonnet and stem should be placed upside down and two or three packing rings
installed in the packing chamber. A very fine lapping compound should be placed
between the mating surfaces and the stem gently rotated circularly around the backseat.
Lapping should be minimized in order to maintain the sharp angle and concentricity
resulting from the machining operation. The acceptable blue check will be a 360 fine
line around the stem seat.
8-73

Rotate Back & Forth
Stem Seat
Lapping Compound
Between Seats
Stem
Bonnet
Packing Rings
Figure 8-7c
Lapping Bonnet Backseat to Stem [16]
On bolted bonnet-type valves that have a flange, a check should be made to see if the
flange has distorted due to welding and stress relieving. If the flange has distorted, it
must be machined back to the manufacturers tolerances and the requirements of
ANSI/ASME B16.5, Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
8.7.8 Inspection
Power Piping Code address repair of the base material but do not provide repair and
inspection requirements for the seat hardfacing because it is not defined as pressureretaining. ASME Section XI , Subarticle IWA-4400 requires that the repair welding be
performed by qualified welders and procedures in accordance with Section IX. It also
requires that the repair cavity (pressure retaining base material) shall be examined by
liquid penetrant or magnetic particle method. As a matter of good practice, PT or MT
inspection should be used after completing the hardfacing deposit and final machining.
It is essential that the sealing surface of the hardfacing be free of any linear indications
to ensure leak-tightness across the seat.
8-74

8.7.9 Testing
8.8 Guide Repair and Replacement
This section presents the guidelines necessary to repair or replace the body wedge
guides of gate valves.
Valve manufacturers produce gate valves with two typical styles of wedge guides. Flex
wedge, solid wedge, double disk, and parallel-slide gate valves use a single guide on
each side of the wedge, which protrudes from the valve body as shown in Figure 8-8a.
These guides are either cast with the valve body and machined to size, or are bar stock
machined to size and welded to the valve body. Although rare, some valve manufacturers machine grooves in the valve body. The second type of guide style used by manufacturers is a pair of guides on each side of the valve, which protrude from the valve
body forming a groove or slot for the wedge tabs to slide between (see Figure 8-8b).
These parallel guides are used primarily in split wedge and slab gate-type valves.
Guide Rib
Figure 8-8a
Typical Single Guide Configuration for Gate-Type Valves [16]
8-75

Guide Slot
Guide Rib
Figure 8-8b
Double-Guided Gate Configuration [17]
Welding repairs to gate valve guides are rarely necessary. When buildup is required to
tighten tolerances, the welding is generally performed on the wedge because it can be
removed from the valve and machined and welded in the repair shop. The most common guide repairs are limited to grinding and machining to remove gouges on the
mating surfaces, or to build up or replace guides due to erosion.
Welded repairs to guides must be performed with the same practices and procedures as
the pressure-retaining valve body (see Section 8.1). The lone exception is when the
repair is restricted to the repair or build up of a guide that is welded to the valve body
and the body is not a part of the repair. Like other valve repairs, skilled personnel with
the proper training and equipment are necessary to be successful. The biggest challenge
is making repairs on P-Nos. 4 and 5 valve bodies that require elevated preheats and
PWHT (see Table 13-1).
The valve body and integral guides are recognized as pressure-retaining materials. As a
result, these components must be repaired in accordance with the rules of ASME and
ANSI, and by an ASME or NBBI manufacturer or repair certificate holder. All welding
must be performed by qualified welders and procedures in accordance with the rules of
ASME Section IX.

The objective of any type of guide repair is to provide a low friction, non-interfering
path with lateral structural support for the wedge as it is directed into the seats. Guide
location and clearances between the guide slot and the wedge are critical.
8-76

A thorough understanding the valve guide design and the immediate problem must be
understood prior to developing a repair strategy. The following questions must be
answered:
Are the guides cast into the body?
Are the guides eroded or damaged on the contact surface requiring buildup, or are
they distorted or bent?
Are the guides welded in bar stock that can be replaced if eroded or bent, or if the
contact surface is cracked? If an attachment weld is cracked, what additional work is
required?
Can the indication be removed by grinding without encroaching upon the design
minimal wall, thus avoiding a weld repair?
Does the indication or crack go through the wall, requiring a system hydrostatic test
after completion?
Will the repair encroach upon tolerance-sensitive guide contact surfaces, which
would be altered by welding stresses and heat from the repair?
Is the repair area accessible through the bonnet bore for manual repair techniques?
Is PWHT equipment available, along with knowledgeable personnel?
If the indication was found by UT or RT, are the equipment and personnel available
to perform this inspection after the repair is completed?
Are sufficient qualified and experienced personnel available to perform a guide
repair or replacement?
the valve?
What are the preheat and PWHT requirements for performing this replacement? If
required, can the welding and machining equipment withstand these elevated
temperatures?
plant availability?
As a result of this review, the owner must decide whether to perform the repair with inhouse personnel, use contract valve repair services, replace the valve, or remove it from
the line and send it to a shop for repair.

8-77

Obtain drawings, material specifications, and clearance tolerances between the

wedge and guides from the manufacturer.
final report.
Match mark the wedge to the valve seat to ensure that the wedge is reinstalled in the
same direction.
Qualify the necessary welding procedures for base material and/or guide repairs, and
for hardfacing repairs if the guide has hardfacing material on the contact surface.
If the repair requires unique welding or machining applications or if weld stresses
might have adverse effects on alignment, the full repair sequence should be demonstrated on a mockup. This includes both machining and welding operations.
Measure and record critical dimensions, such as guide bores, distances between seats,
pressure seal bores, etc., to monitor distortion due to welding and PWHT.
8.8.3 Flaw Removal

If a small localized area is going to be repaired due to erosion, stress cracks across the
hardfacing, or a deep wear scar, the defect should be removed by manual grinding as
discussed in Section 9.1. The finished repair cavity should have a 3:1 taper into the
surrounding area to provide access and visibility to the welder. A liquid penetrant (PT)
examination must be performed to verify that no cracks or indications exist in the area
to be repair welded.
If a welded-in guide is to be replaced, it can be removed by grinding out the fillet welds
that attach it to the valve body, or it can be milled out with a portable milling machine.
A PT or MT examination must be performed to verify that no cracks or indications exist
in the area to be repair welded.
In those valves that have hardfacing applied to the contact surfaces, the hardfacing can
be removed with a portable milling machine. After machining, the surface should be
etched to verify that the hardfacing material has been removed and then PT or MT
inspected to verify base material integrity.
8-78


Please refer to Section 8.7.4.

Please refer to Section 8.1.5.

Repair welding of gate valve guides can be performed with the GTAW, SMAW,
GMAW, or FCAW processes The process should be selected based on accessibility and
the application (repair, replacement, or refurbishment). The various processes are described in Section 10. The GTAW process is generally used for localized repairs or
refurbishment of integral guides where size permits and where radiation levels require
remote welding. Replacement of welded-in guides, localized repairs in small or confined areas, or configurations that are not readily achievable by automated systems are
normally repaired with the SMAW process. Large repairs, material refurbishment, or
guide replacement can be performed with semi-automatic GMAW processes. Figure
10-1 presents a productivity comparison of the various welding processes.
Guide repairs and refurbishment should be completed with the following steps:
Welding should be performed in a manner that aims to control residual stresses.
Cap out the weld approximately 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch (1.6 mm to 3.2 mm) above the
parent metal surface as checked with a straight edge. Do not add excessive layers
because this contributes to higher residual stresses.
Section 13.
Perform a MT or PT examination of the repair area.
For replacement of welded-in guides, the following sequence is recommended:
Install the wedge into the valve body. Ensure proper orientation and seating contact.
8-79

Fit the replacement guides into the wedge guide slots and shim them equally with
the clearances specified by the valve manufacturer. Tack weld the guides to the
valve body.
Remove the wedge from the valve body, verifying clearances and alignment during
the removal operation. Refit as necessary.
Install protective covers on the seats and pressure seal bore.
Perform installation welding, monitoring frequently for distortion.
Section 13.
Perform a MT or PT examination of the repair area.

Final machining of the guides must be coordinated with the repair or refurbishment
effort on the wedge to ensure suggested manufacturing dimensions and tolerances
between the guides and guide slots. For localized repairs or replacement of welded-in
guides, the repair or attachment fillet welds can be ground and blended to the required
configuration. For larger repairs or restoration of integral guides, a milling machine
should be used to establish consistent dimensions. In many cases, the edges of the
guides are gound with a radius to reduce the possibility of the wedge getting hung on a
sharp corner.
8.8.8 Inspection
be examined by liquid penetrant or magnetic particle method. A final examination of
the finished repair must be performed and documented utilizing the inspection process
that was used to find the indication originally.
8.8.9 Testing
(LLRT), an integrated leak rate test (ILRT), or a operability/functional test. If the pressure boundary has been penetrated, a hydrostatic test is required.
8-80

8.9 Guide Rib Repair

This section presents the guidelines necessary to repair hardfaced guide ribs in large Ytype, and critical application globe valve configurations (see Figure 8-9a). Hardfaced
guide ribs are not necessary in most globe valves because the poppet is directed straight
down the body bore and the flow is from under the poppet. Globe valves designed for
flow over the seat or with side loads against the poppet often have hardfaced guide ribs.
Guide Rib
Figure 8-9a
Globe Valve Configuration Showing Guide Rib [19]
Guide ribs are used to reduce body wear from the poppet moving up and down, and to
reduce the friction coefficient of heavy poppets in large Y-type valves such as lift checks
and MSIVs. In Y-type designs, the ribs are built up above the bore, and positioned to
carry the load of the poppet.
Welding repairs to globe valve guides are rarely necessary. When buildup is required to
tighten tolerances, the welding is generally performed on the bottom rib (when looking
down the valve bore) because it carries the majority of the load. The most common
guide repairs are limited to grinding and machining to remove gouges on the surfaces.
In those valves that have a rib in the flow path, buildup of the base material and
hardfacing on the edges of the rib are also common due to erosion.
Welded repairs to guide ribs must be performed with the same practices and procedures as the integral seat repair (see Section 8.5). The single exception is when the repair
is restricted to the repair or build up of a guide rib that has a remaining hardfacing or
corrosion-resistant cladding thickness of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) or greater. Like other valve
repairs, skilled personnel with the proper training and equipment are necessary to be
successful. The biggest challenge is making repairs to guide ribs that have a P-Nos. 4
and 5 substrate (see Table 11-1). These substrate materials require elevated preheats and
PWHT temperatures as shown in Table 13-1.
8-81

Because the hardfacing alloy is welded directly to the pressure-retaining body, the guide
ribs must be repaired in accordance with the rules of ASME and ANSI and by an ASME
or NBBI manufacturer or repair certificate holder. All welding must be performed by
qualified welders and procedures in accordance with the rules of ASME Section IX.

Developing a repair strategy with backup positions is essential prior to committing to a
guide rib repair. Due to the inherent high residual stresses and low ductility of the
hardfacing materials, a small pit can become long multiple cracks when grinding or
welding is initiated. The type of hardfacing on the guide rib, as well as the base material,
must also be considered. The less forgiving hardfacing materials, such as those commonly
referred to as Stellite 1 (ASME SFA 5.13, RCoCr-C), 6 (ASME SFA 5.13, RCoCr-A), and 12
(ASME SFA 5.13, RCoCr-B), and the nickel-based alloys such as Colmony 4 and 5, and
Deloro 40 and 50 (ASME SFA 5.13, RNiCr-A and B) are extremely difficult to repair.
Although they are more welder friendly, repair with Stellite 21 (cobalt-base) and NOREM
(iron-base) can be challenging to repair. If the base material is a P-No. 4 or P-No. 5 and
the hardfacing is thin, a preheat and post-weld heat treatment are required.
The following questions should be asked when faced with a guide rib repair:
Can the flaw be removed by grinding without impacting the contact area, thus
Can the flaws be removed by machining a thin layer off the complete guide rib
surface and still maintain the required bore dimensions and hardfacing thickness,
thus avoiding a weld repair?
Are the guide ribs eroded or damaged on the contact surface requiring buildup, or
are they distorted or bent?
Are the guide ribs welded in bar stock that can be replaced if eroded or bent, or if
the hardfacing is cracked? If an attachment weld is cracked, what additional work is
required?
Does the crack or defect penetrate into the valve body such that a welded repair of
the pressure boundary material would be required?
Does the indication or crack go through the wall, requiring a system hydrostatic test
after completion?
the valve?
temperatures? Can the welding and machining equipment withstand these elevated
temperatures?
Are sufficient qualified and experienced personnel available to perform a guide
repair or replacement?
8-82


Obtain drawings, material specifications, and clearance tolerances between the
poppet and guide ribs from the manufacturer.
final report.
Qualify the necessary welding procedures for base material repair and hardfacing
repairs.
If the repair requires unique welding or machining applications, such as a guide rib
which is in the flow path or on spiraling rib designs, the full repair sequence should be
demonstrated on a mockup. This includes both machining and welding operations.
Measure and record critical dimensions, such as guide bore and pressure seal bore
diameters, to monitor distortion due to welding and PWHT.
8.9.3 Flaw Removal

If grinding is being utilized to remove a crack, liquid penetrant should be applied to the
area to help identify the crack location. After completely removing the crack, the area
If the flaw distribution is extensive and a decision is made to replace all of the
hardfacing on a rib or ribs, a boring bar or milling rail should be used to remove the
hardfacing material. Boring bars are available with adapter kits that will machine designated segments of a complete diameter. A 2:1 or 3:1 transition should be employed at
the upper and lower end of the weld preparation groove.
8-83


Filler material selection is dictated by the purpose of the weldment, base material compatibility, process, and welding position, as presented in Section 11.
Replacement of the guide rib hardfacing requires that some of the original base material
In cases where minimum wall thickness has been encroached upon or even violated,
used on the P-No. 1 carbon steel substrates because of its similar coefficient of expansion to the cobalt- and iron-based hardfacing alloys.
When a base metal repair or build up is required, or if the weldment is for structural
utilized (see Table 11-4).
the very hard materials are unnecessary in backseat applications. For more information
on hardfacing selection, refer to the EPRI Cobalt Reduction Guidelines [29].

and 8 substrates, but is required for P-Nos. 4 and 5 substrates (see Table 11-1 for PNumber specifications). With the exception of P-No. 1 materials, the PWHT requirements are the same for the partial penetration seal welds and the repair or build up of
the base materials. The PWHT requirement can be eliminated on P-No. 1 substrates
provided a 200F (93C) preheat is utilized. The requirements and exemptions are listed
in Tables 13-2, 13-3, and 14-4.
While not required, a minimum 200F to 400F (93C to 204C) preheat is essential when
8-84


Welding a guide rib in globe-type valves is generally performed with the machine
GTAW process and the manual SMAW process. The most common applications have
been the large Y-type main steam isolation valves (MSIV) (see Figure 8-9b) and
feedwater check valves. The manual GTAW process can also be utilized in applications
where the valve is large enough and the seat close enough to the valve opening to allow
the welder to get both hands (arms) into the valve. Suggested welding practices are
Body Flange
Pressure Seal Area

Bonnet Bore
Guide Ribs
Seat Hardfacing
Seat Ring
Flow Bore
Figure 8-9b
Y-Type MSIV [13]
The shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) process with coated electrodes has been successfully used on large and small valves where radiation exposure is not a concern. A
drawback to the SMAW process is that it produces spatter and compromises welding
8-85

When welding on large valves or valves where a significant quantity of material was
removed to eliminate the original hardfacing material, a two-step welding application is
recommended. The base metal should be restored to its original thickness by building
up the area with a matching filler material or butter layer (see Figure 8-9c). The buildup
can then be machined with the desired weld prep or cavity to ensure that the
hardfacing deposit has a uniform thickness and does not exceed approximately
3/16 inch (4.8 mm). The hardfacing is then deposited as described in Section 14. This
methodology, similar to that used by the original manufacturer, ensures the proper
location and thickness of the new guide rib wear surface, as well as ensuring a quality
hardfacing deposit. After completing the hardfacing weldment, it should be wrapped in
insulation to allow for slow cooling.
8-86

Original Base Metal
(Prior To Welding)
Hardfacing
Dilution
Hardfacing
Deposit
New Machined
Surface
Typical
Guide Rib
1
2
Build-Up
Material
New Machined
Weld Prep
Machined
Surface
Build-Up
Fusion Line
4
3
Machined
Weld Prep
Hardfacing
Deposit
Finished Machined
Hardfacing
Hardfacing
Fusion Line
Hardfacing
Build-Up
Fusion Line
5
Figure 8-9c
Guide Rib Hardfacing Refurbishment Sequence
8-87


Final machining of the guide ribs must be coordinated with the repair or refurbishment
effort on the poppet wear rings to ensure the suggested manufacturing dimensions and
tolerances between the components. For localized repairs, the repair welds can be
ground and blended to the required configuration.
For larger repairs or restoration of integral guide ribs, a boring bar should be utilized to
establish consistent dimensions parallel to the bore and seat. This ensures proper seating of the poppet into the seat. After machining, the hardfaced contact surface should be
ground or polished to remove any major tool marks.
8.9.8 Inspection
8.9.9 Testing
(LLRT), an integrated leak rate test (ILRT), or an operability/functional test. If the
pressure boundary has been penetrated, a hydrostatic test is required.
8.10
Hinge Pin Repair
This section focuses on the repair of the hinge pin body bore penetrations, hinge pin
cover pressure seal bores, and gasket seal faces of swing check and tilting disc check
valves (see Figure 8-10a). Repair of removable parts such as brackets, bushings, hinge
pin covers, and hinge pins should be repaired in the machine shop or the parts replaced
with original manufacturers equipment.
8-88

Bonnet Stops
Lifting Lugs
Internal Disc Hanger
Weld Ends
Body
Seat Ring
Disc Stop
Hinge Pin
Disc
Arm
Back Stop
Disc Assembly
Normal
Flow
Seat
Figure 8-10a
Swing Check and Tilting Disc Check Valves [9]
Manufacturers provide swing check valves with three typical hinge pin designs. In the
first design (see Figure 8-10b), the pin is supported in journals that are integrally cast in
the body neck above the seat ring. One journal is drilled through the body wall to
permit insertion of the pin and sealed with one of three gasket and flange configurations. A modified version of this design incorporates a single hinge pin passing through
both journals and having a flange on both ends. Repair of journal bores and gasket
sealing face could be performed in situ. The second design consists of a bracket
8-89

mounted on two pads located above the seat ring (see Figure 8-10c). No in situ hinge pin
repair is necessary for this design. The third design also requires no in situ repair of the
hinge pin assembly. In this design, the pin is supported in a bracket attached to the
bonnet (see Figure 8-10d).
Cover Plate
Pin
Hanger
Disc Nut
Journal
Bonnet Flange
Disc
Figure 8-10b
Swing Check Valve, Pin Supported in Cast Journals [21]
8-90

Bracket
Pinned Bracket Bolt
Bracket Pad
Disc
Figure 8-10c
Swing Check Valve, Bracket Mounted on Two Pads [21]
Bonnet Cover
Bracket
Disc Hangar
Disc
Figure 8-10d
Swing Check Valve, Pin Supported in Bracket Attached to Bonnet [21]
8-91

The hinge pin design is quite similar for all the manufacturers of tilting disc check
valves. Hinge pins and covers are installed on either side of the valve and inserted into
the bushings of the disc assembly (see Figure 8-10e). Repair of the hinge pin body penetration bore and gasket sealing face can be repaired in situ.
Hinge Pin
Hinge Pin
Hinge Pin Cover Bolt
Disc
Hinge Pin Bushing
Section A-A
Disc
Figure 8-10e
Hinge Pins and Covers Inserted into Disc Assembly Bushings [13]
Three types of hinge pin cover joints are provided by check valve manufacturers. They
include a pipe plug seal cover (see Figure 8-10f), a blind flange cover (see Figure 8-10g),
and a pressure seal cover as shown in Figure 8-10h.
8-92

Spiral Wound Gasket
Body
Hinge Pin
Figure 8-10f
Pipe Plug Seal Cover [16]
8-93

Hinge Pin Assembly
Hinge Pin
Cover
Spiral
Wound
Gasket
Bushing
Disc
Body
Hinge Pin
Figure 8-10g
Blind Flange Cover [16]
8-94

Hinge Pin
Hinge Pin Bonnet
Metal Gasket
Hinge Pin Cover
Nut
Stud
Hinge Pin
(Alternate Design)
Figure 8-10h
Pressure Seal Cover [16]
Because of the critical alignment needed for the disc to seal against the seat, repair of
hinge pin bores and gasket surface requires extremely knowledgeable and experienced
personnel. A repair should not be attempted without good drawings with dimensions
and tolerances. Repairs to tilting disc check valves (TDC) are extremely difficult and
should not be attempted without the manufacturers support. Where possible, critical
body bores, pressure seal bores, and bushings should be ground or honed and a new
hinge pin machined to size, instead of performing a welded repair.
Small automatic GTAW systems and line boring equipment is commercially available to
perform bore and gasket sealing face repairs. Accessories necessary to machine threads
are also available as attachments to boring bars. Once again, this equipment must be
used by qualified technicians to successfully complete these repairs.
The valve body and hinge pin covers are recognized as pressure-retaining materials. As
a result these components must be repaired in accordance with the rules of ASME and
ANSI and by an ASME or NBBI manufacturer or repair certificate holders. All welding
must be performed by qualified welders and procedures in accordance with the rules of
ASME Section IX.

Two specific repairs typical to hinge pins are addressed here: leakage at the hinge pin
cover and excessive clearances in the body bores due to wear. A brief discussion of
hinge pin repair is also presented.
Leakage of the hinge pin cover can be the result of insufficient load on the gasket, corrosion, wire drawing or steam cutting, foreign material between the sealing surface and
the gasket, and damage to the gasket. In the case of a pressure seal gasket configuration,
8-95

surface imperfections in the body bore, such as pin holes, cracks, or erosion, could be
the cause for a leak. Of all the possibilities, only surface imperfections such as cracks,
erosion, or pitting would be cause for repair. The other issues can be resolved with
good maintenance and assembly practices. In cases where the pressure seal bore is
damaged, refer to Section 8.2 for specific guidance.
Seating misalignment and play in the hinge pin can be the result of wear to the hinge
pin, bushings, or the body bores. A thorough inspection should be made to specifically
identify the out-of-tolerance component and, where possible, repair it with non-welding
and machining practices.
If a hinge pin bore requires repair, the following questions should be asked in developing a repair strategy:
Are detailed drawings and a manufacturers representative available for consultation? This is extremely important when repairing tilting disc check valves.
Is the flaw or crack localized such that it could be removed by grinding? If so, machining might not be required.
Is the bore or bushing worn out of round such that a new or oversized bushing
could be installed to resolve the problem? If there is a bushing already in place, is it
machined on center or was it machined after it was placed in the valve?
valve body bore? If so, a boring bar is required.
Will removal of the crack or flaw violate minimum design wall thickness? If so, can
a qualified base metal repair be performed? The base metal repair should be performed as presented in Section 8.1.
Is machining and welding equipment available to perform this repair?
Are sufficient qualified and experienced personnel available to perform this repair?
the valve?
Is equipment available to preheat the repair area? If required, can the welding and
machining equipment withstand elevated temperatures?
plant availability?
When considering the repair of a gasket seal area other than pressure seal-type joints,
the following additional questions should be asked:
Can the flaw or defect be removed by grinding or machining? If so, will a thicker gasket
or spacer be required for the hinge pin to eliminate the axial movement in the pin?
valve body bore? If so, a flange facer and boring bar is required.
8-96

When considering a hinge pin welded repair, refer to Section 8.13 and follow the guidelines presented there.

Obtain the original design minimum wall thickness from the manufacturer.
Procure a replacement pressure seal ring and an oversize ring for the valve bonnet
and hinge bores if the valve is so equipped.
final report.
Clearly identify both sides of the hinge pin bores and all parts associated with each
side.
Install a protective liner over the in-body seats.
and repairs.
Demonstrate the machining and welding sequence on a full scale mockup to familiarize personnel with the work sequence and requirements.
Measure and record critical dimensions such as hinge pin bore diameters and
length, and distances between hinge pin bores, to monitor distortion due to welding.
Verify seating alignment prior to performing any final boring or facing operations.
8.10.3 Flaw Removal

If grinding is being utilized to remove a crack, liquid penetrant should be applied to the
area to help identify the crack location. After completely removing the crack, the area
8-97

If the flaw distribution is extensive, the bore is worn out of round, or orbital welding
equipment is going to be utilized for welding, a boring bar should be used to remove
material about the complete bore area as shown in Figure 8-2b. A 2:1 or 3:1 transition
should be employed at the upper and lower end of the weld preparation groove.

Filler material selection is dictated by base material compatibility, process selection, and
position as presented in Section 11. The filler material should match the base material
chemistry with properties comparable to the base material. See Table 11-4 for guidance
in selecting the proper filler materials.

Although preheat is not a regulatory requirement, the benefits far outweigh the potential
problems of not using it as shown in Section 13.1. When welding on low-carbon steel
P-No. 1 materials greater than 1-1/2 inches (38-mm) thick, a PWHT exemption can be
gained by utilizing a 200F (93C) preheat. When welding on low-alloy steels such as the
P-No. 4 (WC6) and P-No. 5 (WC9), 300F and 400F (149C to 204C) respective preheats
are suggested. A minimum preheat of 100F (38C) is suggested for welding on P-No. 8
(CF3 and CF8) substrates.
When welding in confined locations, the recommended preheats might not be conducive to productivity. In these cases, the preheat should be lowered to a workable level.
Unless previously qualified at the lower temperatures, a new welding procedure is
required for the lower preheat.
Castings that have been inservice might have water in the defect and surrounding area.
Post-weld heat treating is required for all weld repairs performed on P4 and P5 substrates (see Table 11-1). As mentioned earlier, exemptions to PWHT are available for P1
materials based on the thickness and preheat temperatures as provided in Table 13-4.
8-98


Hinge pin, body bore, and gasket seal face welding repair can be performed with the
GTAW, SMAW, GMAW, or FCAW processes The process should be selected based on
accessibility and the quality of the weldment required. The various processes are described in Section 10.
Repair welding of the hinge pin bores is generally performed with the machine GTAW
process (see Figure 8-3n) due to the difficult welding positions encountered and the lack
of accessibility. Machine GTAW also offers superior welding controls for bead placement and heat input.
Very localized repairs or configurations that are not readily achievable by automated
systems are normally repaired with the SMAW process. Repairs to flanges can be performed with any of the processes and should be selected based on the amount of material to be deposited. Figure 10-1 presents a productivity comparison of the various
welding processes.
Hinge pin body bores and flange repairs should be completed with the following steps:
Section 13.

Final bore diameters, shoulder depths, and location are extremely critical to obtaining
the hinge pin location that results in proper seat alignment. Final machining must be
performed in conjunction with seat fitting.
The extent of the weld repair dictates the type of machining to be performed. In the case
of small localized repair, the controlled grinding approach can be utilized. A hand
grinder and a thin template cut from shim stock of .010-inch (.25 mm) thickness or less,
having the same radius as the body bore diameter, can be used to reduce the weld
buildup to the height of the shim stock above the bore. A flapper wheel can then be
used to blend the weld buildup to just below the body bore. A straight edge and feeler
gauges can ensure that the repair area is no more than .010 inch (.25 mm) below the
surrounding material. A hone can be used to finish the bore and blend the repair.
Where major welding has been performed, unmachined bushings installed, or where
the welding has impacted critical dimensions, a boring bar with flange facing capability
similar to that shown in Figure 8-10i should be used. Regardless of the machining
technique, a Sunnen hone or the equivalent should be used.
8-99

Figure 8-10i
Boring Bar with Flange Facing Capabilities
[Courtesy of Climax Portable Machine Tools]
8.10.8 Inspection
be examined by liquid penetrant or magnetic particle method. A final PT must also be
performed after final machining.
8.10.9 Testing
ANSI OM, Part 10, when the owner determines that the repair activity affects the
(LLRT), an integrated leak rate test (ILRT), or a operability/functional test.
If the pressure boundary has been penetrated, such that a full thickness weld repair was
performed, a hydrostatic test is required.
8.11
Wedge/Disc Repair (Gate, Swing Check, and TDC)
This section focuses on the base material and hardfacing repair or replacement of removable valve discs or wedges. See Figures 8-11a and 8-11b. These repairs are performed in
conjunction with the seat ring repairs and replacements discussed in Sections 8.3 and 8.4.
8-100

Dia. C
Dim. A
Dim. B
Figure 8-11a
Typical Wedge [16]
Hangar
Disc
Disc Nut
Figure 8-11b
Removable Valve Disc/Wedges [21]
8-101

Discs and wedges are found in most gate, swing check, and tilting disc check valves in
which the seat is 90 to the bonnet bore. Most repairs performed on discs and wedges
are the result of cracks or wear in the hardfacing materials. Left unrepaired, erosion will
eventually penetrate completely through the wedge and into the base material.
Repairs to discs and wedges are performed in a machine shop with the proper tools and
knowledgeable personnel. In many cases, replacement of the disc or wedge is far more
cost effective than performing a repair. This especially true of discs and wedges in
valves smaller than 8 inches (203 mm) nominal and a pressure Class of less than 600
pounds. Repairs to discs are also much easier than wedges because machining and
welding are performed on one side of the component.

An evaluation of valve size and pressure class, available replacement parts, and personnel should be performed prior to committing to a disc or wedge repair. Welding and
final machining is difficult and most challenging to even the most experienced valve
personnel. Minimal tolerances are often employed, making material removal or distortion from welding very critical. In many cases, valve disc replacement is a more costeffective repair option. Unless the disc has an abundant amount of hardfacing on it and
a flaw or crack is very small, the existing hardfacing material should be completely
removed and rewelded. When hardfacing materials such as Stellite 1, 6, and 12 or the
nickel- and iron-based alloys are encountered, they should always be completely removed and rewelded.
When evaluating the repair/replacement option, the following questions should be
asked:
What is the hardfacing material?
What is the nominal valve size and pressure class?
Can the flaw or crack be removed by grinding without impacting the sealing area,
If the flaw or crack is in the sealing area, can it be removed by surface grinding and
maintain adequate thickness to permit proper seating? This is most critical for
wedges.
Does the crack or defect penetrate into the wedge or disc base material such that a
welded repair activity could significantly deform the component? If so, the forged or
cast component wedge should be replaced.
Is the disc or wedge being built up or adjusted to compensate for the material loss of
the inbody seat or seat ring? Disc or wedge repair is much easier than seat repair. A
report detailing critical seat dimensions must be taken prior to performing a base
metal buildup and hardfacing deposit on the disc or wedge.
Is there machining, special fixturing, measuring, and welding equipment available
to perform the repair?
8-102

Does the owner or repair vendor posses the proper NBIC repair certifications and
Is preheat and post-weld heat treatment equipment available?
Are trained and qualified valve specialists familiar with the welding of hardfacing
and fitting of discs or wedges available? If proven specialists are not available, this
repair should not be performed.

final report.
Establish match marks on both sides of the wedge with respect to the matching seat,
prior to removing the wedge from the valve body. This ensures that the wedge is reinstalled in the same direction.
Perform a blue check (see Section 15.3) and record the seating location on the wedge
as shown in Figure 8-3b.
shown in Figure 8-3d.
Verify that the seat width is acceptable on both seats as shown in Figure 8-3e.
If the in-body seats were reworked or replaced, measure and record the dimensions
between the seats at the locations shown in Figure 8-3e. These dimensions must be
taken to perform the rough machining and fitting of the wedge.
8-103


Perform a blue check and record the seating location of the disc.
Measure and record the seat width as shown on Figure 8-3f.
Mark each of the hinge pin components in relation to each side so that the assembly
can be reassembled correctly.
Final machining of the disc is performed after all in-body seat repair or replacement
is completed.
given to the seat, hinge pins, and hinge pin bushings. Mark each of the hinge pin
components in relation to each side so that the assembly can be reassembled correctly.
8-3g.
Record the seat bore inside diameter, outside seat diameter, and depth as shown in
Figure 8-11c. If the in-body seat was repaired or replaced, these dimensions need to
be recorded after final seat finishing. These dimensions are used to machine the final
seat dimensions on the disc.
8-104

Inner Dia. A
Outer Dia. B
Seat Depth C
= arctan [(B - A)/2]C
Figure 8-11c
Seat Angle Determinations for Tilting Disc Check Valve
8.11.3 Flaw Removal

Prior to removing any hardfacing material, the wedge or disc should be mounted in a
fixture similar to that shown in Figure 8-11d and the machine tool squared to the
8-105

existing face. An index surface should then be machined on the casting or forging inside
the hardsurfacing material to use for future indexing operations.
Wedge Hardfacing
Mounting Clamp
Top View
Lathe Adaptor Plate
Side View
Figure 8-11d
Wedge or Disc Mounted in Fixture [26]
overall amount of material to be removed. If a small localized area is going to be
8-106

repaired due to a corrosion pit, stress crack, or a deep wear scar, the defect should be
removed by manual grinding as discussed in Section 9. In applications where the repair
to the hardfacing is extensive, all of the hardfacing should be removed from the face of
the disc by machining on a lathe or boring mill. If the flaw propagates into the base
material, a manual grinding method should be employed to remove the remaining flaw
leaving a 3:1 tapered weld preparation cavity (see Section 9.1). A verification should
then be performed with an etchant to verify complete removal of all hardfacing material, and a liquid penetrant examination performed to verify that no cracks or defects
exist in the area to be repair welded.

Filler material selection is dictated by base material compatibility and position as presented in Section 11. Except for the rare case where a repair is made to the disc or
wedge base material, the filler material will be a hardfacing alloy, such as ASME Section
II, SFA 5.13, RCoCr-A (Alloy 6), Alloy 21, or NOREM 02A (see Table 11-10 ). If the
hardfacing is a repairable type, such as Alloy 21 or NOREM 02A, the repair can be
performed with matching hardfacing material. If the existing hardfacing is a much
harder material, such as Alloy 1 (RCoCr-C), or Alloy 6 (RCoCr-A), or one of the nickel
alloys (RNiCr-A or B), a softer repair material should be utilized.
When refurbishing a disc or wedge, the original base metal thickness lost to remove all
of the hardfacing should be restored with a filler material compatible with the base
material and operating temperature. For structural restoration of all base materials and
for high temperature applications on P-Nos. 4 and 5 substrates, a compatible filler
material must be utilized (see Table 11-4). For non-structural buildups, a Type 309
stainless filler material can be utilized. An austenitic filler material, such as ER309,
provides a more forgiving substrate for depositing hardfacing than the carbon steel
filler materials, due to their similar coefficients of thermal expansion. Hardfacing materials should not be deposited directly on cast steel substrates.

and 8 substrates, but is required for P-Nos. 4 and 5 substrates (see Table 11-1 for PNumber specifications); however, different rules apply to the repair of the base materials. The PWHT requirements and exemptions are listed in Tables 13-2, 13-3, and 13-4.
to 288C) for P-No. 5 substrates. Successful repairs to the more hardenable hardfacing
8-107


Localized welding repair of valve discs and wedges is generally performed with the
manual GTAW process and the manual SMAW process. The GTAW process provides
the superior control and quality that are critical to depositing hardfacing materials in
confined repair cavities.
The shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) process with coated electrodes has been successfully utilized on large and small repair applications. A drawback to the SMAW
process is that it produces spatter and compromises welding control; however, both can
be overcome with good practices.
When total hardfacing refurbishment is performed, the manual or machine GTAW,
SMAW, GMAW, or PTAW processes can be utilized. In most applications, the selection
criteria are based on deposition rate, weld quality, and minimal heat input. The PTAW
process is most widely used by valve manufacturers but is rarely found in non-production facilities. The GMAW process is the second most common hardfacing method used
in production. However, welding control and quality is not as good as the GTAW and
PTAW processes. The GTAW process provides superior quality but has slow deposition
rates and high dilution.
When welding on discs and wedges where a significant quantity of material was removed to eliminate the original hardfacing material, a two-step welding application is
recommended. The base metal should be restored to its original thickness by building
up the area with a matching filler material or butter layer. The buildup can then be
machined with the desired weld prep or cavity to ensure that the hardfacing deposit
has a uniform thickness and does not exceed approximately 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) (see
Figure 8-11e). The hardfacing is then deposited as described in Section 14. This methodology, similar to that used by the original manufacturer, ensures the proper location
and thickness of the new guide rib wear surface, as well as ensuring a quality
8-108

Original Base Metal
(Prior To Welding)
Hardfacing Dilution
Hardfacing Deposit
New Machined
Surface
Disc/Wedge Half
Machined Surface
Build-Up Material
New Machined
Weld Prep
Build-Up Fusion Line
Machined Weld Prep
Hardfacing Deposit
Finished Machined
Hardfacing
Hardfacing Fusion Line
Build-Up Fusion Line
Hardfacing
Figure 8-11e
Hardfacing Refurbishment Sequence
8-109


Final machining and lapping of the disc or wedge must be performed after all in-body
seat work is completed, as discussed previously in the prerequisites. Final machining is
generally performed on a lathe or vertical boring mill. Lapping is performed with a
lapping table or portable lapping machine as shown in Figure 8-11f. A final blue check
as discussed in Section 15.3 should be performed to verify 360 seat contact.
Figure 8-11f
Lapping Table and Portable Lapping Adapter (Courtesy of EFCO)
8.11.7.1 Gate Valve Wedges
Final machining and fitting of wedges require the skill of an experienced technician.
Detailed fitting techniques are presented in Appendix A, Gate Valve Wedge Fitting
Techniques.
8-110

8.11.7.2 Parallel Disc and Swing Check Valve Discs

Final machining of these flat disc designs requires that the hardfacing surface is square
to the reference face and has a total thickness as specified by the valve manufacturers.
Discs can be fitted by adjusting mechanisms (that is, spacers, clearances between pins
and bushings, and so on) typical of the specific valve type. Refer to the manufacturers
instructions. EPRI/NMAC Report TR-100857, Check Valve Maintenance Guide, provides
details for fitting swing check valves.
8.11.7.3 Tilting Disc Check Valve Disc
Because of the seat angle, which is similar to a globe valve seat, critical diameters and
angles must be machined on the disc to obtain line contact between the seat and disc.
This is accomplished by machining an angle on the disc and seat, with the steeper angle
on the disc as shown in Figure 8-11g. After machining the proper seat configuration on
the disc, both the disc and the seat should be lapped with the lapping discs shown in
Figure 8-11h. Final fitting of the disc and hinge pin assembly is accomplished through
the hinge pin adjustments.
Disc
Seat Ring
Valve Body
Figure 8-11g
Seat Angle Determination for Tilting Disc Check Valve
8-111

Plug O.D. to Fit Seat I.D.
Lapping Fixture for Seat
Bore to Fit Disc O.D.
Lapping Fixture for Disc
Figure 8-11h
Lapping Fixture for In-Body Tilting Disc Check Valve Seat and Disc [13]
8.11.8 Inspection
8-112

8.11.9 Testing
(LLRT), an integral leak rate test (ILRT), or a operability/functional test.
8.12
Poppet Hardfacing Repair
This section focuses on hardfacing repair and replacement of globe-type poppets (also
referred to as plugs). The hardfacing is located on the seat. If the poppet has wear rings,
they are also hardfaced (see Figure 8-12a). These repairs are performed in conjunction
with the seat ring repairs and replacements discussed in Sections 8.3 through 8.6, and
the guide rib repairs discussed in Section 8.9.
Wear Rings
Hardface
Deposit
Seat
Figure 8-12a
Poppets with Hardfaced Wear Rings [16]
Poppets are found in globe, lift check, stop check, and control valves in which the seat is
perpendicular to the bonnet bore. Most repairs performed on poppets are the result of
cracks or wear in the hardfacing materials. Left unrepaired, erosion will eventually
penetrate completely through the hardfacing and into the base material.
8-113

Repairs to poppets are commonly performed in a machine shop with the proper tools
and knowledgeable personnel. In some cases, replacement of the poppet can be more
cost-effective than performing a repair. This is especially true of standard poppets in
valves smaller than 6-inches (152 mm) nominal size.

An evaluation of valve size, type, poppet design, availability of replacement parts, and
personnel should be performed prior to committing to a poppet seat or wear ring repair. Hardfacing welding of these big parts and final machining is difficult and most
challenging to even the most experienced valve personnel. Minimal tolerances are often
employed, making material removal or distortion from welding very critical. Except in
cases where a minor flaw is to be repaired, the existing hardfacing material should be
completely removed and rewelded. When hardfacing materials such as Stellite 1, 6, and
12, or the nickel-based alloys are encountered, they should always be completely removed and rewelded. Welding over or building up hardfacing material that has been
inservice should be avoided because it is very susceptible to stress cracking.
In evaluating the repair/replacement option, the following questions should be asked:
What is the hardfacing material?
Can the flaw or crack be removed by grinding without impacting the sealing area,
If the flaw or crack is in the wear ring, can it be removed by grinding without impacting operation of the poppet, thus avoiding a weld repair?
If the flaw or crack is in the sealing area, can it be removed by taking a light cut
across the contact and still maintain adequate hardfacing thickness?
Does the crack or defect penetrate into the poppet base material such that a welded
repair activity could significantly deform the component? If so, the forged or cast
poppet should be replaced.
Are the wear rings being built up or adjusted to compensate for the material loss of
the in-body guide ribs? Poppet repair is much easier than guide rib repair. A report
detailing the finished bore and seat diameters must be taken prior to performing a
base metal buildup and hardfacing deposit on the poppet.
Is machining, special fixturing, measuring, and welding equipment available to
perform the repair?
Is preheat and post-weld heat treatment equipment available?
Are trained and qualified valve specialists familiar with welding of hardfacing and
fitting of poppets available?
8-114


final report.
If the in-body seat has been repaired or replaced, new measurements should be
recorded as shown in Figure 8-3j and those dimensions used to establish new poppet
seat dimensions.
wear ring prior to initial machining (see Figure 8-12b).
8-115

I.D. Seat
O.D. Seat
Wear Ring Dia.
Figure 8-12b
Poppet Seat and Wear Ring Dimensions [16]
8.12.3 Flaw Removal

overall amount of material to be removed. If a small localized area is going to be repaired due to a corrosion pit, stress crack, or a deep wear scar, the defect should be
removed by manual grinding as discussed in Section 9. In applications where the repair
to the hardfacing is extensive, all of the hardfacing should be removed from the poppet
seat or guide ring by machining on a lathe. If the flaw propagates into the base material,
a manual grinding method should be employed to remove the remaining flaw leaving a
3:1 tapered weld preparation cavity (see Section 9.1). A verification should then be
performed with an etchant to verify complete removal of all hardfacing material, and a
liquid penetrant examination performed to verify that no cracks or defects exist in the
area to be repair welded.
8-116


Filler material selection is dictated by base material compatibility and position as presented in Section 11. Except for the rare case where a repair is made to the disc or
wedge base material, the filler material is a hardfacing alloy, such as ASME Section II,
SFA 5.13, RCoCr-A (Alloy 6), Alloy 21, or NOREM 02A (see Table 11-10). If the
hardfacing is a repairable type, such as Alloy 21 or NOREM 02A, the repair can be
performed with matching hardfacing material. If the existing hardfacing is a much
harder material, such as Alloy 1 (RCoCr-C), Alloy 6 (RCoCr-A), or one of the nickel
alloys (RNiCr-A or B), a softer repair material should be utilized.
When refurbishing a poppet seat or wear ring, the original base metal thickness that
was lost to remove all of the hardfacing should be restored with a filler material compatible with the base material and operating temperature. For structural restoration of
all base materials and for high temperature applications on P-Nos. 4 and 5 substrates, a
compatible filler material must be utilized (see Table 11-4). For non-structural buildups
a Type 309 stainless filler material can be utilized. An austenitic filler material such as
ER309 provides a more forgiving substrate for depositing hardfacing than the carbon
steel filler materials, due to their similar coefficients of thermal expansion. Hardfacing
materials should not be deposited directly on cast steel substrates.

and 8 substrates, but is required for P-Nos. 4 and 5 substrates (see Table 11-1 for PNumber specifications); however, different rules apply to the repair of the base materials. Because of the mass and heat sink of a poppet, preheat is strongly recommended.
The PWHT requirements and exemptions are listed in Tables 13-2, 13-3, and 13-4.
to 288C) or P-No. 5 substrates. Successful repairs to the more hardenable hardfacing

Localized welding repair of valve discs and wedges is generally performed with the
manual GTAW process and the manual SMAW process. The GTAW process provides
the superior control and quality that are critical to depositing hardfacing materials in
confined repair cavities.
The shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) process with coated electrodes has been successfully utilized on large and small repair applications. A drawback to the SMAW
process is that it produces spatter and compromises welding control; however, both can
be overcome with good practices.
8-117

When total hardfacing refurbishment is performed, the manual or machine GTAW,
SMAW, GMAW, or PTAW processes can be utilized. In most applications, the selection
criteria are based on deposition rate, weld quality, and minimal heat input. The PTAW
process is most widely used by valve manufacturers but is rarely found in non-production facilities. The GMAW process is the second most common hardfacing method used
in production. However, welding control and quality is not as good as the GTAW and
PTAW processes. The GTAW process provides superior quality but has slow deposition
rates and high dilution.
When welding on poppet seats and wear rings where a significant quantity of material
was removed to eliminate the original hardfacing material, a two-step welding application is recommended. The base metal should be restored to its original thickness by
building up the area with a matching filler material or butter layer (Figure 8-11e presents a series of steps that would be the same for wear rings and poppet seats). The
buildup can then be machined with the desired weld prep or cavity to ensure that the
hardfacing deposit has a uniform thickness and does not exceed approximately
3/16 inch (4.8 mm). The hardfacing is then deposited as described in Section 14. This
methodology, similar to that used by the original manufacturer, ensures the proper
location and thickness of the new seat or wear ring surface, as well as ensuring a quality

Final machining of the poppet seat must be performed after all in-body seat work is
completed, as discussed previously in the prerequisites. Final machining is generally
performed on a lathe. This final machining step is extremely critical to obtaining a 360
thin contact line. A very consistent conical seat with a minimum 1 steeper angle than
the in-body seat angle will ensure a leak-free valve (see Figure 8-12c). A final blue check
as discussed in Section 15.3 should be performed to verify 360 seat contact.
8-118

Figure 8-12c
Typical Globe Valve Seat Angle Differential [13]
Final machining of the poppet wear ring must also be performed after all in-body repair
to the guide ribs are completed. The wear rings should be machined on a lathe to the
diameter that provides the manufacturers suggested clearances. After machining, the
wear rings should be finished with a light emery cloth to remove the tool marks.
8.12.8 Inspection
8-119

8.12.9 Testing
(LLRT), an integrated leak rate test (ILRT), or a operability/functional test.
8.13
Valve Stem Repair
Repairs to valve stems are generally limited to light machining and grinding to remove
corrosion, pitting, and score marks. Welding is not recommended because stems are
typically machined from high strength, precipitation-hardened 17-4PH stainless steel,
quenched and tempered 410 stainless steel, or strained-hardened Type 316 stainless
steel. To weld these materials, the stem must first be annealed, then welded, then retempered or hardened. These operations would be time consuming and expensive, and
would most likely result in a warped stem.
Light machining and grinding can be used to remove minor surface defects. If the stem is
machined in a lathe and the machined area passes through the packing gland, the entire
length that passes through the packing should be machined. The machined area should
be finished with a fine grit emery cloth to remove the tool marks and the ends tapered. All
machining operations should be followed by a liquid penetrant (PT) examination.
If surface defects must be repaired by welding, the owner should contact the manufacturer for design requirements and recommendations.
If minor surface defects, such as score marks or pits, are encountered, methods such as
plasma spray, metal spray, or liquid metal have been successfully used, followed by
light machining.
8-120

9
DEFECT REMOVAL
Repair of valves or any other component almost always requires metal removal as part of
the remedial activity. Several defect removal methods can be used and should be chosen
based on such variables as location, access, time and equipment availablility, skilled
manpower, amount of material to be removed, and the repair method to follow [22].
Defect removal methods generally used for valve repair include: grinding, machining,
honing, lapping, and, in rare cases, carbon arc or plasma arc gouging. Grinding is the
most common method of removing defects, but hand grinding is laborious and very
time consuming. In situations where defects are found to be extensive and away from
critical sealing surfaces, a more efficient technique, such as carbon arc gouging or
plasma arc gouging, can be used. In situations where weld preparation has to be precise, such as around pressure seal bores or hardfaced seats and seat rings, machining
provides both defect removal and weld preparation in a single step. Honing and flapping are material finishing methods that are used to finish machined surfaces for metalto-metal sealing.
Localized Defect RemovalNo Weld Repair Required. If unacceptable indications are
found using liquid penetrant testing (PT), magnetic particle testing (MT), or ultrasonic
testing (UT), they must be removed. Typical acceptance criteria can be found in ASME
Section V and B31.1. Indications that are shown to be near the surface of the piping
component by NDE methods can be removed by surface grinding and their removal
verified by PT or MT. If the remaining wall thickness of the component, measured using
an ultrasonic thickness gauge, is greater than the minimum required wall thickness, the
area can be blended to a minimum 3:1 (width:depth) profile and returned to service. All
blending should leave a smooth transition from ground areas to the original component
wall thickness as shown in Figure 9-1. Periodic MT or PT inspection should be performed to minimize material removal.
9-1

Surface
Indications
t Minimum
tActual
Surface indications found by MPI
Blend Out
Indications
Remove indications by grinding
W:D > 3:1
Areas of indication removal blended to a

minimum 3:1 (W:D) ratio and all areas must
be greater than t minimum at maximum grind
out depth.
Figure 9-1
Removal of Surface Indications Where No Weld Repair Is Required
9-2

Some instances might exist where the actual wall thickness of the piping or fittings is
significantly thicker than the minimum required wall thickness. In these cases, when a
grindout is performed and more than 15% of the actual wall is removed, a weld repair
should be performed to build the wall up to the original thickness and profile. This
eliminates relatively deep grindouts that could act as stress concentrations when piping
is returned to service.
Localized Defect RemovalWeld Repair Required. A weld repair is required when
the depth required to remove unacceptable defects results in the remaining wall thickness being below code-acceptable limits. The following are the steps for performing
such a repair:
1. Excavate the defect (surface indications will already be exposed; UT indications
must be exposed).
2. Remove the defects by grinding, gouging, or machining.
3. Surface grind and verify the defect removal by PT or MT.
4. Weld repair the cavity as described below.
Following a local repair, the area should be examined by PT or MT and the inspection
results of the localized repair recorded for future reference.
Excavation Shape for Local Weld Repairs. When the depth of material excavated
necessitates a weld repair, the cavity must be prepared for welding after final defect
removal. Either during or following defect removal, the excavation should be shaped to
provide adequate access for the welding operation to ensure proper fusion. An approximately 2:1 width:depth profile is typical. Figure 9-2 illustrates a typical defect excavation and profile for weld repair. Other profiles can be used if there is sufficient access to
deposit the root pass and prevent lack of sidewall fusion. Also, there must be sufficient
access to ensure that there is no slag entrapment.
9-3

Indications found
by inspection
tActual
t Minimum
Defect location as determined by surface

or ultrasonic inspection
Excavation for defect type verification
Complete defect removal and verified by WFMPI
Excavation profiled to 2:1 (W:D) for weld repair
Figure 9-2
Excavation for Defect Type Verification and Local Weld Repair
9-4

If the excavation is performed using a thermal removal process (carbon arc or plasma
arc gouging), a 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) minimum of material must be removed by grinding
prior to the final inspection and before welding begins to remove any carbon pick-up.
When the weld preparation has been completed, MT or PT should be performed on the
entire cavity prior to weld repair.
9.1 Grinding
Grinding is the most commonly used material removal method for valve repair. The
process is used for the removal of localized cracks in hardfacing, pitting and casting
defects, removal of seat rings, and blending of valve repair deposits.
Equipment used for grinding purposes is extensive and varied. Pencil or small disc
grinders are generally used to remove defects, but if large amounts of metal are to be
removed, large disc grinders can be used. The grinders are electric or air-driven portable types with wheels of various shapes, sizes, and abrasive characteristics. Three
American National Standard Institute (ANSI) standards list the generic specifications
for grind wheels as follows:
ANSI B74.13, Markings for Identifying Grinding Wheels and Other Bonded Abrasives
ANSI B74.2, Specifications for Shapes and Sizes of Grinding Wheels, and Shapes, Sizes, and
Identification of Mounted Wheels
ANSI B7.1, Safety Requirements of the Use, Care, and Protection of Abrasive Wheels
Every grinding wheel has two constituents: the abrasive that does the cutting and the
bond that holds the abrasive component. Variations of these components can be selected to give a wide range of grinding characteristics.
It is essential that proper practices are followed so that grinding does not produce any
harmful effects that could result in future problems. Grinding wheels should never be
forced, which can cause excessive wheel breakdown and, more important, areas of
localized high temperature. This type of grinding can result in reduced fatigue strength
and failure due to the introduction of induced residual tensile stresses from improper
grinding operations. Also, the intense localized heating can result in overheating the
material, which can cause the formation of brittle untempered martensite, or the development of tight, shallow surface grinding cracks. These problems can be avoided by
using grinding practices that produce a smooth surface that is free of induced residual
stresses or sites for the initiation of fatigue cracks.
It is also good practice to ensure that abrasive cutting or grinding consumables are
identified for use on carbon and low-alloy steels versus stainless steels. Grinding or
cutting consumables that are impregnated with carbon or low-alloy steel residues when
used on stainless steel induce contamination of the stainless steel surface and most
likely result in surface corrosion. Conversely, it is a good practice to restrict stainless
steel grinding wheels for use on stainless steels and not for use on carbon or low-alloy
steels to avoid future mix-ups [22].
9-5

9.2 Machining
Machining using mechanized cutting equipment is used to remove defects or internal
components cleanly and with precision. Machining equipment used to repair valves
include boring bars, milling machines, magnetic drills, flange facers (portable lathes),
and pipe cutting/beveling machines. Machining has the advantage of cutting and
forming the weld preparation with a single piece of equipment, and dimension tolerances are closely controlled. Boring bars are mounted to the inside bore with expanding
chucking systems or are attached with special stand-off brackets outside the valve.
Smaller boring bars are also available for machine hinge pin penetrations and bonnet
packing boxes.
Portable boring bars have been used where circumferential machining of a bore is
required, such as when removing valve seats, removing valve seat hardfacing, preparing seat areas for new seats, and finishing the new hardfacing to the required location
and angles. Specialized boring bars are available that turn 90 to the bonnet bore for
gate valve refurbishment as shown in Figure 9-3. Other bars are available with accessories to grind or mill seats and guide ribs, and to drill and tap stud holes.
9-6

Guide
Rib
Drive
Motors
Hardfacing
Material
Cutting
Tool
Figure 9-3
Gate Valve Seat Machining [26]
Portable milling machines can be used to remove more localized materials at a much
faster rate than turning machines. Small milling machines have been developed to
remove hardfacing from guide ribs as shown in Figure 9-4. Milling machines have also
been used to repair gate valve guides and remove the bulk of the hardfacing from
integral globe valve seats.
9-7

Figure 9-4
Milling Machine Removing Hardfacing from Guide Ribs
Flanged sealing surfaces require a flat spiral or phonographic finish in order to maintain
leak tightness. Portable flange facers are used to develop the proper finish for flat
flexitalic gaskets or for special ring-type grooves of body-to-bonnet joints in critical
service valves. Flange facers are also used to develop proper sealing surfaces for
threaded-in seat rings and for some types of hinge pin covers.
Machining should always be performed by skilled machinists, both in the field and in
shop applications.
9.3 Lapping
Lapping is a polishing procedure that is used to finish hardfaced wedges, discs, poppets, and seats. Lapping is not used to remove deep defects. A general rule of thumb is
that defects less than .010 inch (.25 mm) are removed by lapping. Lapping provides a
seat surface finish of from 16 rms down to 2 rms, depending on the grit of the lapping
compound or paper and the seat material [9].
Lapping machines are available for most valve types in both portable and bench-type
systems. Gate valve lapping machines (see Figure 9-5) are used by field service groups
in the field and manufacturers in the shop to finish in-body seats and discs or wedges.
The same can be said for globe, check, and safety relief valves from 1/4 inch to
36 inches (6.3 mm to 914 mm) nominal. For globe-type valves, lapping should be used
to remove tool marks as the point of contact is only at the bottom of the seat.
9-8

DN
Figure 9-5
Gate Valve Lapping Machine
In many cases, lapping is performed with special discs made specifically for one application, such as tilting disc check valve seats or gate valve seats that need to be narrowed. These plates should be very thick to maintain dimensionally stability. The seat
should be lapped to the finish and dimensions specified by the manufacturer. The seat
angle and width is critical to obtaining a leak-free valve.
9-9

9.4 Honing
Honing is an abrasive process that is used to obtain a very cylindrical and fine finish.
The process is used to eliminate inaccuracies due to machining by providing a very
straight and round bore with very tight tolerances. Honing tools are placed in the bore
with a radial load applied such that the honing stones are in contact with the bore. The
hone is then driven (rotated) in the bore, generating a high quality surface. Finishes
range from 3 rms to 50 rms [9].
Honing stones consist of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or diamond abrasive grit,
held together in stick form by vitrified clay, resin, or a metal bond. The grain and grade
of abrasive to be used is based on the amount of stock to be removed and the surface
finish desired. Silicon carbide is generally used for cast iron, and aluminum oxide is
recommended for use on steel. As with grinding discs and lapping compoundthe
finer the grit, the finer the surface finish.
For valve repair, hones are used on bonnet packing bores and on body hinge pin penetrations and pressure seal bores in preparation for pressure seal ring installation. The
hone produces a very straight and cylindrical surface for the pressure seal ring to seat
against.
Material Removal Rates for Honing. In general, the honing process can be used to
remove material from bore diameters at a rate of .005 inches per minute (ipm) to
.012 ipm (.13 mm/min. to .30 mm/min.) on steel parts, based on parts having a length
equal to three or four times the diameter [30]. For many pressure seal areas, this rate
will be much faster as a result of the length-to-bore ratio being much less. Recommended rotational surface speeds are 50 feet per minute to 110 feet per minute,
(15.2 m/min. to 33.5 m/min.) for steels. In general, the harder the material to be honed,
the slower the speed.
9-10

10
WELDING PROCESS SELECTION
The selection of a welding process is influenced primarily by the quantity and extent of
repairs required. The inherent difficulties associated with cleaning and the requirements for preheat and post-weld heat treatment on some of the materials are additional
important considerations in selecting the welding process. Only arc welding processes
that are appropriate for manufacturing or in situ repair or replacement are discussed
herein [10, 31].
Localized repairs of limited scope are normally conducted with manual shielded metal
arc welding (SMAW). When several components are to be installed or when repair
areas encompass a substantial portion of the surface area of a component, use of semiautomatic processes, including pulsed gas metal arc welding (GMAW-P) or flux-cored
arc welding (FCAW), should be considered. These processes have the ability to rapidly
deposit quality weld metal (see Figure 10-1). Care should be observed if these processes
are to be used on austenitic stainless steel or the other high-alloy components. The wires
and techniques available might not produce deposits of sufficient quality without some
development or procedure evaluation.
10-1
Welding Process @ 100% Duty Cycle
SMAW (E7018)
1
9
2
1
2
GTAW
6
(Cold Wire Feed)

PAW
0
GMAW (Spray)
24
FCAW
2
36
10
20
30
40
Deposition Rate, LB/HR
Figure 10-1
Welding Process Versus Deposition Rate at 100% Duty Cycle [22]
10.1
Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW)
GTAW is an arc welding process that produces coalescence of metals by heating them
with an arc between a tungsten (nonconsumable) electrode and the work. Shielding is
obtained from a gas or gas mixture. Pressure might or might not be used, and filler
metal might or might not be used. This process is sometimes called tungsten inert gas
welding (TIG). In Europe, it is called WIG welding, using Wolfram, the German word
for tungsten. The process is illustrated in Figures 10-2 and 10-3.
Direction
of Travel
Shielding
Gas
Molten Weld
Metal
Welding
Torch
Tungsten
Electrode
Arc
Filler
Rod
Solidified
Weld Metal
Base Metal
Figure 10-2
Process Diagram (GTAW) [32]
10-2

Cooling Water
Supply
Torch
Power
Source
Inert
Gas
Supply
Filler
Metal
Water
Drain
Gas
Base
Metal
Foot Pedal
(Optional)
Work
Lead
Electrode Lead
Figure 10-3
Circuit Diagram (GTAW) [32]
This welding process is suitable for welding virtually any material used for power plant
piping. Advantages include the high quality of the weld deposit, freedom from slag,
availability of skilled personnel, effective use on localized repairs and the ability to be
automated. The major disadvantage of this process is the slow rate of deposition. This
factor severely limits the size of the job that can be attempted economically.
10.2
Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW)
GMAW is an arc welding process that produces coalescence of metals by heating them with
an arc between a continuous filler metal (consumable) electrode and the work. Shielding is
obtained entirely from an externally supplied gas or gas mixture. Some variations of this
process are called MIG (manual inert gas) or CO2 welding. See Figures 10-4 and 10-5. The
pulsed-current variation of this process is typically used for depositing high-alloy materials.
Shielding
Gas
Molten Weld Metal
Solidified
Weld Metal
Direction
of Travel
Nozzle
Electrode
Arc
Base Metal
Figure 10-4
Process Diagram (GMAW) [32]
10-3

Control System
Feed
Control
Wire
Spool
Gas Out
Gun
Control
Gas In
Hand Held
Gun
Voltage
Control
Cable
(Power, Gas, and Coolant)
Work Lead
Wire
Feed
Drive
Motor
Contractor
Control
110V Supply
Shielding
Gas
Source
Power Source
Figure 10-5
Block Diagram (GMAW) [32]
This process is typically a semi-automatic process that is suitable for the welding of carbon, low-alloy, and many high-alloy steel components in all positions. This approach
requires thorough evaluation using pulsed current for all-position welding on high alloys,
such as P-Nos. 4 and 5 chrome-moly steels (see Table 11-1). The process also offers a very
high rate of deposition and the ability to be used for localized repairs, as well as the
capability of being automated. The disadvantages of the process include the lack of craft
familiar with the process and the need for specialized equipment and further evaluation.
10.3
GMAW-P
The pulsed gas metal arc (GMAW-P) process is a semi-automatic technique that is
suitable for welding carbon and low-alloy steel materials in all positions. Although it
has been used for austenitic stainless steel and other high-alloy materials, it is not at a
stage of demonstrated practice where it can be recommended for out-of-position welding without further and extensive evaluation by the user. The advantages of this process
include high deposition rates, lack of slag, and the ability to be used for localized repairs. Disadvantages include the lack of skilled craft familiar with GMAW-P and the
need for specialized equipment.
10.4
FCAW
Flux-cored arc welding (FCAW) is a semi-automatic process that is suitable for the
welding of carbon and low-alloy steel components in all positions. As with GMAW-P,
FCAW approaches require thorough evaluation for all-position welding of high alloys
at this time. This process offers a very high rate of deposition and the ability to be used
10-4

for localized repairs. The disadvantages of the process include the lack of craft familiar
with the process, slag removal after each weld pass, and the need for specialized equipment and further evaluation.
10.5
Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW)
SMAW is an arc welding process that produces coalescence of metals by heating them
with an arc between a covered metal electrode and the work. Shielding is obtained from
decomposition of the electrode covering. Pressure is not used and filler metal is obtained from the electrode. See Figures 10-6 and 10-7.
Covering
Electrode
Arc
Solidified Slag
Shielding Gases
Weld Metal
Base Metal
Figure 10-6
Shielded Metal Arc Welding Process [33]
Electrode
Holder
Power
Source
Electrode
Electrode Lead
Base
Metal
Work Lead
Figure 10-7
Circuit Diagram (SMAW) [32]
10-5

This process is a widely used manual welding process that is suitable for joining most
power plant materials. Advantages include high rate of deposition, availability of
skilled personnel, and the ability to be used for localized repairs. However, the need to
remove slag from completed weld passes and the frequent starts and stops to change
electrodes can reduce productivity and increase the potential for defects.
10.6
Machine Welding
Machine welding offers high quality weld deposits and has gained greater acceptance
in recent years. Machine approaches have been used quite successfully in both fossil
and nuclear repair applications. It has proven efficient where only several welds were
involved and on repairs where an entire piping system was replaced. This process has
been generally applied by service vendors who possess both portable machining and
machine or automatic welding capabilities. Several utilities who own the appropriate
equipment (machining and welding) are beginning to use this approach for in-house
repair, even on activities of small to moderate scope.
NOTE: Most of the welding conducted to date in an automatic manner is now defined as machine welding, in accordance with code revisions. Even work done with
GTAW-P-AU using a video/remote technique is now defined as machine welding.
Welding that does not require any operator interface or adjustment is defined as automatic [32].
10.7
GTAW-P-AU
The machine pulsed gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW-P-AU) process is the most
widely accepted machine process for in situ valve repair where high quality and reproducibility are required. It provides reasonable deposition rates when properly used and
very high quality weld deposits without the need for slag removal. Primary applications include the joining of any of the candidate pipe/component materials. This process requires the use of highly trained welding operators and specialized equipment.
10.8
Efficiency/Cost Comparisons
Deposition rate ranges for the commonly applied repair welding processes are shown in
Figure 10-1.
Where only a few welds are involved, the selection of process for weld repair is not
terribly important. However, if many welds are involved, the GTAW-P-AU process
should be strongly considered. Other processes such as SMAW, GMAW and FCAW
exhibit higher individual deposition rates, but the GTAW-P-AU process has demonstrated a greater ability to produce defect-free welds on a consistent basis, even in the
plant environment.
10-6

11
WELDING FILLER MATERIAL
Many factors enter into the selection and use of welding filler materials. The composition
of the base material, the welding process to be used, post-weld heat treatments, and
mechanical and service requirements all effect what and how it can be used. Of particular
interest are factors pertaining to whether original versus existing material properties will
be matched or if under-matching approach will be considered. Use of conventional, offthe-shelf material manufactured to existing standards might be appropriate, or special
non-standard or proprietary filler metals might provide superior results. These factors, as
well as the availability of the chosen material, effect selection decisions [12, 3254]. The
most common base metals encountered in valve repair are provided in Table 11-1.
Table 11-1
P-Number, Composition, and Specifications for Selected Valve Materials [10]
P-No.
Nominal
Composition
Forging
Casting
Plate
Bolts, Studs, and Nuts
Carbon Steel
SA-105
SA-181
SA-350-LF2
SA-216 WCA
SA-216 WCB
SA-216 WCC
SA-285 C
SA-515 Gr 60,70
SA-516 Gr 60,70
SA-299
SA-193, Gr B7
SA-194, Gr 2H
Carbon
Molybdenum
SA-182 F1
SA-182 F2
SA-217 WC1
SA-204 A
SA-387 Gr
SA-193 Gr B7, 16
SA-194 Gr 2H, 4
1-1/4 Cr 1/2 Mo
SA-182 F11
SA-217 WC6
SA-387 Gr 11
2-1/4 Cr-1 Mo
SA-182 F22
SA-217 WC9
SA-387 Gr 22
Austenitic
Stainless Steel
SA-182 F304
SA-182 F316
SA-182 F347
SA-351 CF3
SA-351 CF8
SA-351 CF8C
SA-351 CF8M
SA-351 CF3M
SA-240 Type 304

SA-240 Type 316
SA-240 Type 347
SA-193 Gr B7 1 , B6, B82 , 8 2

SA-194 Gr2H 1 , 6
SA-564 Gr 630
Notes:
1. Although sometimes provided, these materials might not be appropriate for stainless steel valves due to their potential for corrosion.
2. These materials are not recommended for threading into 304 or 316 bodies, because galling can occur.
11.1
Types of Filler Metals
Several types or product forms of weld filler metal are available for repair or replacement.
The three major product forms are covered electrodes, bare wire, and consumable insert
material. The type used is welding process-specific and is shown in Table 11-2.
11-1

Table 11-2
Welding Filler Material Use by Process [22]
Welding
Process
Covered
Electrode
Bare
Straight
Bare
Spooled
Comsumable
Insert
N/A
N/A
N/A
GTAW & PAW
N/A
GTAW-P-AU
N/A
N/A
GMAW
N/A
N/A
N/A
SAW
N/A
N/A
N/A
SMAW
The FCAW process and some submerged arc welding (SAW) and SMAW covered
electrodes use tubular core fabricated wires filled with alloy powder and/or flux.
Covered electrodes and bare wire are available in a variety of diameters, lengths, and
spool sizes. The welding process, amount of welding, accessibility, and equipment to be
used all effect the selection of product form and size.
Where a uniform inside weld root configuration is required for erosion or other design
considerations or where the GTAW or GTAW-P-AU welding processes are to be used, a
consumable insert is generally specified. Consumable inserts are shape dependent with
the K-style, 1/8-inch x 5/32-inch (3.2-mm x 4.0-mm), rectangular (radiused corners)
style gaining favorable recognition because of its ease and tolerance to fit-up variations.
11.2
Filler Metal Requirements
Weld filler metals are manufactured and supplied in accordance with predetermined
specifications. Table 11-3 lists those weld filler metal specifications that might apply to
welding the variety of candidate valve repair and replacement materials. The most
current (at this writing) American Welding Society (AWS) A5.XX-XX specifications are
listed. Although ASME SFA5.XX-XX specifications are usually identical to AWS specifications, AWS issues new additions before ASME.
11-2

Table 11-3
Weld Filler Metal Specifications [3752]
AWS
Specification
Specification Title
A5.01-87
Filler Metal Procurement Guidelines
A5.1-81
Specification for Covered Carbon Steel Arc Welding Electrodes
A5.4-81
Specification for Covered Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel

Welding Electrodes
A5.5-81
Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes
A5.6-84
Specification for Covered Copper and Copper Alloy Arc Welding Electrodes
A5.7-84
Specification for Copper and Copper Alloy Bare Welding Rods and Electrodes
A5.9-81
Specification for Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Bare and

Composite Metal Cored and Stranded Welding Electrodes and Welding Rods
A5.11-83
Specification for Nickel and Nickel Alloy Covered Welding Electrodes
A5.13-80
Specification for Solid Surfacing Welding Rods and Electrodes
A5.14-89
Specification for Nickel and Nickel Alloy Bare Welding Electrodes and Rods
A5.16-90
Specification for Titanium and Titanium Alloy Welding Electrodes and Rods
A5.18-79
Specification for Carbon Steel Filler Metals for Gas-Shielded Arc Welding
A5.20-79
Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux-Cored Arc Welding
A5.21-80
Specification for Composite Surfacing Welding Rods and Electrodes
A5.22-80
Specification for Flux Cored Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel

Electrodes
A5.28-79
Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Filler Metals for Gas-Shielded Arc Welding
A5.29-80
Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux-Cored Arc Welding
A5.30-79
Specification for Consumable Inserts
These filler metal specifications list chemical, mechanical property, packaging, labeling,
and safety criteria. Ranges are provided, where technically acceptable, to enable a
variety of vendors to manufacture products within the stated criteria. Each specification
is accompanied by an appendix that offers additional practical information, such as a
short commentary on each weld metal contained in the specification, its possible uses,
and precautions where necessary [3752].
Regardless of the weld filler metal, certain requirements beyond the AWS or ASME
specifications need to be incorporated into the procurement documents. Packaging plus
physical condition and cleanliness are very important. Although normally required to
be in hermetically sealed containers, covered electrodes should be in an undamaged
state with no evidence of broken or cracked flux coating. Damaged covered electrodes
should be discarded as scrap or returned to the vendor. Bare wire in straight lengths
and on spools should be free of dirt, grease, or any other foreign substance that can be
either seen visually or observed by use of the white glove test.
11-3

Wire exhibiting such deleterious material should be cleaned, scrapped, or returned to

the vendorbut never used as-is. Even when bare wire appears clean, it should be
wiped down with an approved solvent immediately prior to welding. A requirement to
have spooled bare wire individually wrapped in sealed plastic bags can be very helpful
as a moisture protection measure, especially if long term storage is anticipated. These
precautionary measures usually cost a few cents per pound, but are well worth the
investment. It is not unusual for remedial measures that are needed to correct problems
resulting from dirty wires to require the expenditure of person hours and dollars that
exceed by many times the original purchase price of the weld filler metal.
11.3
Filler Metal Selection
Weld metals are typically chosen to provide compatible as-welded chemistry and mechanical properties. Within this criteria, the weldments generally exhibit acceptable
inservice performance. Because repair or replacement has been determined necessary,
emphasis must be placed on the base metals and performance of the completed
weldment. The as-welded chemistry of the weld deposit and base metal heat-affected
zone (HAZ) are now of primary importance [3756].
Weld filler metal chemical compositions chosen for original fabrication and installation
were usually selected to provide a deposit with overmatching properties to compensate
for dilution with the base metal. This might not always be the case in repairs, because
existing system materials, although providing adequate service, might not be in their
originally installed condition. Thus, alternate weld material choices might be necessary
to consider. HAZ concerns, however, can be addressed only through control of the
welding process and technique.
In most cases, a variety of weld filler metal options exist within any alloy category, and
the actual choice is dependent on specific performance and ability-to-weld factors.
Tables 11-4 and 11-5 provide some of the options available in filler metal selection.
These choices should be considered only as starting points in the development of welding procedures. A brief commentary for those filler metal specifications typically used is
provided in Section 11.8.
11-4

Table 11-4
Typical Filler Metals for Various Base Metals [22]
P-No.
Base Metal
C-Steel
C-Mo
1/2 to 1-1/4
Cr+Mo
2 and 2-2/4
Cr+Mo
3 and 5
Cr+Mo
7 and 9
Cr+Mo
300
Series
Stainless
C-Steel
C-Mo
1/2 to 1-1/4 Cr+Mo
2 and 2-1/4 Cr+Mo

3 and 5 Cr+Mo
7 and 9 Cr+Mo
A
A
A
B
B
B
C
C
C
D
D
D
D
E
E
D
E
F
G
G
G
300 Series Stainless
G and H
Filler Metal Descriptions

Table
Designation
Composition
Examples for
GTAW or GMAW
Examples for SMAW
A=
Carbon steel
E7016 or E7018
ER70S-2 or ER70S-3
B=
Carbon-1/2 moly
E7016-A1 or E7018-A1
ER80S-B2 or ER80S-B2L4
C=
1-1/4 chrome-1/2 moly
E8018-B2 or E8018-B2L4
D=
2-1/4 chrome-1 moly
E9018-B3 or E9018-B3L4
E=
5 chrome-1/2 moly
E502-15 or E502-16
ER502
F=
9 chrome-1 moly
E505-15 or E505-16
ER505
G=
Stainless steel
E309 or E309L
ER309 or ER309L
H=
Nickel-chromium-iron
ENiCrFe-2 or ENiCrFe-3
ERNiCr-3
I=
See Table 11-5
Notes:
1.
If both base metals are 1/2 chrome-1/2 moly, the filler metal for SMAW can be E8018-B1.
2.
For noncyclic thermal service below 600 F (315 C) and when post-weld heat treatment is not used, Type 309 stainless steel is acceptable.
3.
See the appropriate AWS filler metal specifications for filler metals for other welding processes.
4.
Recent ASME Code changes have restricted the use of low carbon (L-grade) electrodes for certain applications, due to their reduced creep
rupture properties (ASME Section I, 1992, PW-5.6; ASME B31.1, 1992, 127.2).
11-5

Table 11-5
Weld Metal for Joining Selected Stainless Steel Base Materials [64]
Base Metal B
Base Metal A
304L
316L
347
308L
308L
316L
308L
347L
316L/CF-3M
308L
316L
347L
347/CF-8C
308L
347L
347L
304/CF-8
304/CF-3
316/CF-8M
Note: The 300-series stainless weld filler metal should be procured to exhibit an as-welded ferrite level of 8 FN
to 15 FN. The range should be determined by magnetic measurement in accordance with AWS A4.2-74,
Standard Procedures for Calibrating Magnetic Instruments to Measure the Delta Ferrite Content of Austenitic
Stainless Steel Weld Metal.
Covered electrodes and bare wire are available in a variety of diameters, lengths, and
spool sizes. Consumable inserts are shape-dependent, with the K-style, 1/8 inch x
5/32 inch (3.2 mm x 4.0 mm), gaining favorable recognition (see Figure 11-1). Table 11-6
illustrates common product form sizes available and those that are the most popular for
piping and valve work.
11-6

Shape "A" (EB)
Shape "J"
(a)
(b)
Shape "K"
Shape "G"
(c)
(d)
Shape "Y"
(e)
Figure 11-1
Styles of Consumable Inserts [51]
11-7

Table 11-6
Popular Electrode Product Forms and Available Sizes [22]
Available Sizes (Note 1)
Product
Popular Sizes
Diameter
Length
Spool
Diameter
Length
Spool
Covered
Electrode
1/16 5/32
14 16
N/A
3/32, 1/8, &

5/32
14
N/A
Bare Wire
(GTAW)
0.020 5/32
18 36
N/A
1/16, 3/32, &

5/32
36
N/A
Bare Wire
(GTAW-AU)
0.020 1/16
N/A
260 lb.
0.035 & 0.045
N/A
#2 & 10
Bare Wire
(GMAW)
0.020 1/16
N/A
260 lb.
0.035 & 0.045
N/A
All
Bare Wire
(SAW)
1/16 1/4
N/A
25 Max. lb.
All
N/A
All
Cored Wire
(FCAW)
0.30 1/16
N/A
14 60 lb.
0.045 & 1/16
N/A
All
Form
Note:
1. All sizes presented in inches. To convert to SI units multiply by 25.4 mm.
11.3.1 A-Numbers
Weld metals are grouped into classes known as A-Numbers, depending on their chemical composition. A-Number designations are shown in Table 11-7. It should be noted
that the A-Numbers do not always correspond to the P-Numbers. The A-Numbers for
the SMAW and GTAW filler materials most commonly used for piping and associated
repairs can be summarized as follows [12, 53]:
SMAW
GTAW
A-Number
Nominal Composition
E7018
ER70S-2
Mild carbon steel
E7018-A1
ER80S-D2
Carbon-0.5% Mo
E8018-B2
ER80S-B2
0.4%2% Cr-Mo
E9018-B3
ER90S-B3
2%6% Cr-Mo
E505
ER505
6%10% Cr-Mo
E316H
ER316H
Austenitic stainless steel
A new procedure qualification is required when there is a change in the A-Number.

However, qualification with A-Number 1 also qualifies for A-Number 2, and vice versa.
11-8

Table 11-7
A-NumbersClassification of Ferrous Weld Metal Analysis for Procedure
Qualification [22]
Analysis, % 1
A-No.
Types of Weld Deposit
Cr
Mo
Ni
Mn
Si
Mild Steel
0.15
--
--
--
1.60
1.00
Carbon-Molybdenum
0.15
0.50
0.40 0.65
--
1.60
1.00
Chrome (0.4% to 2%)Molybdenum
0.15
0.40 2.00
0.40 0.65
--
1.60
1.00
Chrome (0.2% to 6%)Molybdenum
0.15
2.00 6.00
0.40 1.50
--
1.60
2.00
Chrome (0.6% to
10.5%)-Molybdenum
0.15
6.00 10.50
0.40 1.50
--
1.20
2.00
Chrome-Martensitic
0.15
11.00 15.00
0.70
--
2.00
1.00
Chrome-Ferritic
0.15
11.00 30.00
1.00
--
1.00
3.00
Chromium-Nickel
0.15
14.50 30.00
4.00
7.50 15.00
2.50
1.00
Chromium-Nickel
0.30
25.00 30.00
4.00
15.00 37.00
2.50
1.00
10
Nickel to 4%
0.15
--
0.55
0.80 4.00
1.70
1.00
11
Manganese-Molybdenum
0.17
--
0.25 0.75
0.85
1.25 2.25
1.00
12
Nickel-ChromeMolybdenum
0.15
1.50
0.25 0.80
1.25 2.80
0.75 2.25
1.00
Note:
1. Single values shown above are maximum.
11.3.2 F-Numbers
Electrodes and welding rods are grouped, according to their usability characteristics,
into F-Number designations. This grouping is made to reduce the number of welding
procedures and performance qualifications. The numbers are tabulated in Table 11-8 for
ferrous alloys that correlates F-Number, AWS/ASME Specification number, and AWS
Classification Number. The most commonly used filler materials and their corresponding F-Numbers can be summarized as follows [12, 53]:
F-Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
43
Filler Material
E7020, E7024
E6013, E7014
E6010, E6011
E7018, E8018-B2, E9018-B3
E7016, E8016-B2, E9016-B3
E308-15, E308-16, E309-15, E309-16
E316-15, E316-16, E347-15, E347-16
ER70S-2, ER80S-B2, ER90S-B3
ER308, ER309, ER316, ER347
ENiCrFe2, ENiCrFe3, ERNiCr3
11-9

A new procedure is required when there is a change from one F-Number to any other
F-Number, for example, two different procedures are required to join carbon steel using
E6011 and E7018 electrodes. This is because there is a change in F-Number, E6011 is F-3
and E7018 is F-4. The other essential variables have to be considered because it takes
only one variable change to require separate qualification. For example, if only F-Number was considered, E7018 or E9018-B3 could be used interchangeably because they
have the same F-Number. However, the weld metal analysis or A-Number is another
essential variable that has to be considered. Because E7018 and E9018-B3 have different
A-Numbers, they cannot be used for the same applications. Alternatively, E7016 and
E7018 have both the same A- and F-Numbers, so the same procedure can be used for
both filler materials.
Table 11-8
F-Number Grouping of Welding Electrodes and Rods [22]
(SOURCE: ASME Section IX, 1990 QW 432)
F-No .
ASME Specification No.
AWS Classification No.

Steel and Steel Alloys
SFA-5.1 and 5.5
EXX20, EXX24, EXX27, EXX28
SFA-5.1 and 5.5
EXX12, EXX13, EXX14
SFA-5.1 and 5.5
EXX10, EXX11
SFA-5.1 and 5.5
EXX15, EXX16, EXX18, EXX48
SFA-5.4 (ferritic)
EXX15, EXX16
SFA-5.4 (austenitic)
EXX 15, EXX16
SFA-5.2
RX
SFA-5.17
FXX-EXX
SFA-5.9
ERXX
SFA-5.18
ERXXS-X
SFA-5.20
EXXT-X
SFA-5.22
EXXXT-X
SFA-5.23
FXX-EXXX-X, FXX-ECXXX-X, and

FXX-EXXX-XN, FXX-ECXXX-XN
SFA-5.28
ER-XXX-X and E-XXX-X
SFA-5.29
EXXTX-X
11-10

11.4
Storage of Welding Filler Materials
In view of the adverse effects of hydrogen in welding and because a potential source of
this hydrogen is the moisture in electrode coatings, the proper storage and treatment of
electrodes is essential to obtain crack-free welds. All low hydrogen electrodes should be
purchased in hermetically sealed containers, which reduce the risk of hydrogen pick-up.
The low hydrogen electrodes, used in the SMAW process for mild steel and low-alloy
steels, (that is, those with designations EXX15, 16, or 18 where XX is 70, 80, 90, and so
on) pick up moisture very rapidly if left exposed to the atmosphere. These types of
inorganic covered electrodes are designed and developed to contain the very minimum
of moisture in their coatings (typically less than 0.5%). Therefore, maintaining a low
moisture content for the low hydrogen electrodes is most critical, and precautions need
to be taken to avoid picking up moisture, as follows:
Ensure that the delivered hermetically-sealed containers are not damaged.
After a can has been opened, all the electrodes must be stored in holding ovens at a
temperature of 250F (121C) minimum. It is important to check the oven temperature because if it is too low, moisture can be picked up; and if it is too high [above
450F (232C)], the coating can become brittle.
Portable heating ovens should be used at the weld repair area so that the electrodes
are not left exposed to the atmosphere.
Any electrodes that are left out in the atmosphere for over four hours (this time can
be reduced for humid conditions and for the higher alloy rods, for example, one
hour for E9018 electrodes) must not be used unless they are rebaked. If the electrodes are exposed to water, they must be discarded. Baking involves heating the
E70/80/90-15, -16, -18 rods to 700F800F (371C427C) for at least one hour in a
drying oven. The rods must be transferred directly from the drying oven to the
holding ovens.
A clean dry place is sufficient to store E6010 or E6011 electrodes because they do not
absorb moisture like the low hydrogen rods. However, care should be exercised in the
rebaking of these rods because the coverings are designed to have a moisture level of
3% to 7%, and excessive drying can substantially effect their operation. They should not
be redried unless noticeably wet or if they have been exposed to very high humidity for
a long period of time. The electrode suppliers should be consulted for the exact
rebaking conditions. The GTAW and GMAW filler metals are supplied in boxes. They
should be stored in a dry atmosphere and at normal temperature. The surface of the
wire should be free of rust, oil, dirt, and moisture.
11.5
Handling of Welding Filler Materials
A utility should have an effective control program for purchasing, receiving, inspection,
storage, and handling of welding materials. It is essential that all welding filler materials are correctly identified and not mixed. For example, separate areas are required in
the holding ovens so that the different electrodes are not placed in the same location.
11-11

Bare GTAW filler wires that are different compositions, but are not stamped or tagged,
can easily be mixed up. A system is required so that the correct filler materials are
issued for a repair.
11.6
Dissimilar Weldments
The need to join dissimilar alloys might be more prevalent in repair and replacement
activities. Caution must be observed when selecting weld filler metals for dissimilar
welds to ensure that the connection will satisfy corrosion, mechanical, and physical
property criteria [4452, 5456].
A transition in mechanical and physical properties from one alloy to another is also
important. Tensile and yield strength of the weld filler metal should be complementary
to the two alloys being joined and not severely overmatched. Other factors including
thermal coefficients of expansion/contraction are also important such that unnecessarily high operational stresses can be avoided or taken into consideration in the design.
Caution must always be observed in making dissimilar weldments. Minimization of
dilution is usually required to avoid excessive changes to the as-deposited weld filler
metal composition. This is especially true where nickel filler metals are used. Excessive
dilution with iron (> 20%) usually results in cracking. However, the nickel alloy weld
filler metals are often chosen for dissimilar weldments and can usually be deposited ontop-of most of the carbon and stainless steels. Conversely, stainless steel and carbon
steel weld metals do not usually produce acceptable crack-free deposits on-top-of nickel
or its alloys.
Tables 11-4, 11-5, and 11-9 illustrate viable candidate weld filler metals for joining
dissimilar alloys. Various hardfacing weld filler metals are included in Table 11-10.
Again, these are only recommended starting points for procedure evaluation and qualification. Actual conditions dictate which materials are appropriate.
11-12

Table 11-9
Filler Metal Selection for Different P-Number Combinations [22]
Filler Materials
P-Number Combinations
GTAW
SMAW
P-Nos. 1 to 1
ER70S-2
E7018
P-Nos. 1 to 3
ER70S-2 or ER80S-D2
E7018 or E7018-A1
P-Nos. 1 to 4
As above or ER80S-B2
As above or E8018B2
P-Nos. 1 to 5
As above or E9018B3
P-Nos. 1 to 8
ER309 or ERNiCr-3
E309, ERNiCrFe-2 or 3
P-Nos. 3 to 3
ER80S-D2
E7018-A1
P-Nos. 3 to 4
ER80S-D2 or ER80S-B2
E7018-A1 or E8018-B2
P-Nos. 3 to 5
As above or E9018-B3
P-Nos. 3 to 8
Same as P-Nos. 1 to 8
P-Nos. 4 to 4
ER80S-B2
E8018-B2
P-Nos. 4 to 5
ER80S-B2 or E9018-B3
E8018-82 or E8018-83
P-Nos. 4 to 8
P-Nos. 5 to 5
ER90S-B3
E9018-B3
P-Nos. 5 to 8
P-Nos. 8 to 8
ER308, ER316, or ER347
E308, E316, or E347
11-13

Table 11-10
Selected Weld Filler Metals Used for Hardfacing and Valve Seat Applications [57]
Typical Hardness Rc
(2 layers)
Alloy
Typical
Chemical
Composition
GTAW
SMAW
Product Forms
Bare
Rod
Covered
Electrodes
#6
RCoCr-A (Bare)
ECoCr-A (Coated)
C 1.1
Cr 28
W4
Cobalt Base
40
39
1/8
5/32
3/16
1/4
5/16
1/8
5/32
3/16
1/4
#12
RCoCr-B (Bare)
ECoCr-B (Coated)
C 1.4
Cr 29
W8
Cobalt Base
47
40
Same as #6
Same as #6
#21
(No AWS Classification)
C 0.25
Cr 27
Mo 5
Ni 2.8
Cobalt Base
24 (45**)
26 (45**)
Same as #6
plus .045 on
spools
Same as #6
NOREM 02A
(No AWS Classification)
C 1.25
Cr 25
Mo 2
Ni 4.5
Iron Base,
Cobalt Free
38
36
.045 (Solid,
Tubular)
1/8
5/32
Strip
1/8
410
ER410 (Bare)
E410-15/16 (Coated)
C .12
Cr 12
Mo .75
Ni .6
31
30
0.35, .045
3/32
1/8
5/32
3/16
3/32
1/8
5/32
3/16
Deloro 40
Colmonoy 4
RNiCr-A (Bare)
C 0.45
Cr 10
Si 2.25
Nickel Base
38
N/A
1/8
5/32
N/A
Deloro 50
Colmonoy 5
RNiCr-B (Bare)
C 0.35
Cr 13
Si 3.5
Nickel Base
48
N/A
1/8
5/32
N/A
5/32
**Work hardened
Transition pieces containing two different alloys joined in the same piece of material can
simplify dissimilar connections. Such items can be fabricated by buttering one material
with selected weld metal, by joining two different materials with the hot isostatic processing (HIP) technique, or by using a flanged transition assembly.
11-14

11.7
Filler Metals for Hardfacing Applications
Selection of weld filler metal for hardfacing applications is influenced by the substrate
material (valve body, and so on), service media/environment, temperature, and
whether mechanical influences such as galling, friction, or erosion resistance exist. Table
11-10 lists some of the more popular hardfacing weld filler metals [57].
11.8
Typical Weld Filler Metal Specifications [3752]
AWS A5.1-91, Specification for Covered Carbon Steel Arc Welding Electrodes.
The first two digits designate minimum tensile strength of the deposited metal in the aswelded condition. The third digit indicates the position in which the electrode is capable
of making satisfactory welds. All positions are 1; 2 is for flat and horizontal fillet welds; 4
is for vertical down and other positions. The last two digits indicate current and polarity
for use of the electrode, and coating type. Example: E6012 indicates an electrode (E) depositing 60 ksi (kips per square inch), (413 MPa) tensile-strength weld metal (60), for use
in all positions (1) with ac or direct current, straight polarity (dcsp) (2).
AWS A5.4-92, Specification for Covered Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Welding Electrodes.
The first three digits designate the composition. The letter L indicates low-carbon modifications; H denotes high carbon. Other modifications are indicated by adding the
appropriate chemical symbol to the designation. Two final digits indicate usability: 15,
direct current, reverse polarity (dcrp); 16, dcrp; and ac. Example: E316L-15 is a covered
electrode of 316 stainless steel having a low carbon level, to be used with dcrp.
AWS A5.5-96, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes.
The first two or three digits designate minimum tensile strength of deposited weld metal.
The third or fourth digit indicates electrode position: 1, all; 2, flat and horizontal fillet. The
last digit indicates the current to be used and the type of electrode covering. The suffix,
with or without a numeral, designates the chemical composition of deposited weld metal.
Example: E7027-A1 is a covered electrode (E), depositing a weld of 70 ksi (482 MPa)
tensile strength (70), useful for flat and horizontal fillet (2) welds, ac or dc, sp or rp, having
an iron powder coating (7). A1 indicates the weld metal composition.
AWS A5.9-93, Specification for Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel
Steel Bare and Composite Metal Cored and Stranded Welding Electrodes and Welding
Rods.
Chemical composition classifies these alloys, as indicated by the numeric designation
for the stainless steel type. Si indicates high silicon (0.65% by weight to 1.00% by
weight); other symbols indicate a high content of those elements. Example: ER316L-Si is
an electrode/rod of 316 stainless steel, low carbon (L), and high silicon (Si).
11-15

AWS A5.11-90, Specification for Nickel and Nickel Alloy Covered Welding Electrodes.
Classification is based on the chemical composition of undiluted weld metal. The symbol Ni identifies the electrode as a nickel-base alloy; succeeding chemical symbols
identify the principal alloying elements. Numbers following hyphens identify a modification within an alloy series. Example: ENiMo-3 is a nickel-base (Ni), molybdenumalloy (Mo) electrode (E), containing 23% to 27% molybdenum (-3).
AWS A5.13-80, Specification for Solid Surfacing Welding Rods and Electrodes.
Bare surfacing welding rods and electrodes are classified on the basis of their chemical
composition as manufactured. Covered surfacing electrodes are classified on the basis
of the chemical composition of their undiluted weld metal.
AWS A5.14-89, Specification for Nickel and Nickel Alloy Bare Welding Electrodes and
Rods.
The symbol Ni identifies the rods as nickel-based, other symbols identify principal
alloying elements. Numbers following hyphens indicate a specific alloy within a group.
Example: ERNiMo-2 is an electrode (E) or rod (R), nickel with molybdenum-alloy
(NiMo), having 15% to 18% molybdenum and other limits on composition (-2).
AWS A5.17-89, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged
Arc Welding.
Electrodes are classified by as-manufactured chemical composition. The letters L, M, or
H following E indicates low, medium, or high manganese; the number following indicates the nominal carbon content; and the letter K indicates silicon-killed steel.
Fluxes are classified by the tensile and impact strength of a weld made in combination
with a particular electrode. The letter F indicates a flux; the number following indicates
the minimum tensile strength in 10 ksi (69 MPa). The letter A or P designates the condition of heat treatment, as-welded or post-weld treated. The number following indicates
the lowest temperature at which the impact strength meets or exceeds 20 ft lb (27J).
Example: F7A6-EM12K refers to a flux that produces a weld metal which, in the aswelded condition, has a tensile strength no lower than 70,000 pounds per square inch
(psi) (482 MPa) and Charpy V-notch impact strength of at least 20 ft lb (27J) at -60F
(-51C) when deposited with an EM12K electrode.
AWS A5.18-93, Specification for Carbon Steel Filler Metals for Gas-Shielded Arc Welding.
Chemical composition and mechanical properties of the weld metal are the basis for
classification. Example: ER 70S-4 indicates an electrode or rod (ER) weld metal with
70 ksi minimum tensile strength (70), solid wire (S), covered by a required soundness
and tension test (-4), and no impact requirement.
AWS A5.20-95, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux-Cored Arc Welding.
11-16

The first number following E indicates the minimum tensile strength of the weld metal;
the second number indicates the welding position; the letter T indicates a tubular (fluxcored) electrode; a letter or number following a hyphen indicates other characteristics.
Example: E70T-5 is an electrode (E); weld metal with a tensile strength of 70 ksi (482 MPa)
minimum (7); flat and horizontal position (0); tubular (T) wire; used with CO2 shield (-5).
A5.21-80, Specification for Composite Surfacing Welding Rods and Electrodes.
Composite surfacing welding rods and electrodes are classified on the basis of the
chemical composition of the weld metal with the exception of the composite tungstencarbide welding rods and electrodes. Composite tungsten-carbide surfacing welding
rods and electrodes are classified on the basis of the chemical composition of the carbon
steel tube, the chemical composition of the tungsten-carbide granules, and the mesh size
distribution and percent by weight of the tungsten-carbide granules contained in the
carbon steel tube.
AWS A5.22-95, Specification for Flux-Cored, Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and
Chromium-Nickel Steel Electrodes.
Classification is based on chemical composition of the deposited weld metal and on the
shielding medium required. Numbers following the E indicate the American Iron and
Steel Institute (AISI) stainless steel grade; the letter T indicates a flux-cored electrode.
The numbers following the hyphen indicates the gas shield: 1, CO2; 2, Ar + 2% O2; 3,
none; G, not specified. Example; E308T-3 is a flux-cored (T) electrode (E) of 308 stainless
steel requiring no shielding gas (-3). It is a self-shielding electrode.
AWS A5.23-90, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged
Arc Welding.
Bare solid electrodes are classified by chemical composition of deposited weld metal.
The letters EC indicates a tubular electrode. Fluxes are classified according to certain
mechanical properties and by the chemical composition of a weld deposit made by
using the flux with a particular electrode. See A5.17.
AWS A5.28-79, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Filler Metals for Gas-Shielded Arc
Welding.
These are classified according to chemical composition and mechanical properties of
weld metal deposited by GMAW, GTAW, and PAW (plasma arc welding) procedures
might be used. The numbers following E or ER indicates the required minimum tensile
strength in ksi, the letter S designates a bare solid electrode or rod; and the letter C
represents a cored electrode. A suffix following a hyphen designates a specific asmanufactured chemical composition. Example: ER80S-Ni1 is a solid (S) nickel steel (Ni)
electrode-rod (ER) that deposits 80 ksi (551 MPa) tensile weld metal (80) of a specific
composition (1).
AWS A5.29-80, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux-Cored Arc Welding.
11-17

These are classified according to chemical composition and mechanical properties of the
weld metal, type of current, position of welding, and whether CO2 is used as a separate
shielding gas. The letter E designates an electrode. The first number following indicates
the minimum tensile strength; the second indicates the primary welding position, flat
and horizontal (0) or all positions (1). The letter T designates a flux-cored electrode. The
number following T indicates usability and performance capability. A suffix following a
hyphen shows as-manufactured chemical composition.
AWS A5.29-80, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux-Cored Arc Welding.
These are classified according to chemical composition and mechanical properties of the
weld metal, type of current, position of welding, and whether CO2 is used as a separate
shielding gas. The letter E designates an electrode. The first number following indicates
minimum tensile strength; the second indicates the primary welding position, flat and
horizontal (0) or all positions (1). The letter T designates a flux-cored electrode. The
number following T indicates usability and performance capability. A suffix following a
hyphen shows as-manufactured chemical composition.
AWS A5.30-79, Specification for Consumable Inserts.
The basis of the classification is chemical composition. The prefix IN designates a consumable insert. Numbers indicate as-manufactured chemical composition. Specific
shapes and cross-sections must be selected and specified when ordering.
11-18

12
SHIELDING AND PURGING GASES
Delivery of gases is very important and can be accomplished in several different ways:
single or manifold compressed gas bottles, single or multiple liquid gas dewars, or a
bulk system inherent to the plant or temporarily installed for repair or replacement
outages. Many opportunities for contamination exist between the gases source and the
welding torch and weldment. Shielding and purge gases used for welding operations
must be free of moisture and other contaminants (foreign gases, and so on). For this
reason, gas originating from a liquid source is generally preferred and temporary bulk
systems are often installed to support major repair or replacement outages [5865].
Purity and moisture content concerns can be reduced by specifying a dew point of -60F
(-51C) maximum at the bottle for compressed gas cylinders or the gaseous form after
leaving a dewar. The dew point of the gas at the weld should not exceed -40F (-40C) if
possible. Additional moisture removal can be achieved by adding a molecular sieve (for
example, Hydro-Purge) to the purge or shielding gas lines where single composition
gases are used [65]. These relatively inexpensive devices provide an extra measure for
ensuring that foreign gases do not contaminate the shielding or purging operations.
Contaminated gas or lack of shielding usually promotes the formation of deleterious
oxides or even heavily oxidized surfaces (sugaring). When this occurs, the only prudent
remedy requires that the disturbed material be completely removed. Attempts of removal with manual or power wire brushing are usually unsatisfactory. Power grinding
or machining to sound, unaffected base or weld metal is usually necessary.
12.1
Purging
Where the system design prohibits the use of backing rings and complete joint penetration with a continuous root surface is needed, purging the inside diameter of the
weldment with an inert gas is required. Purging is generally required for all stainless
and nonferrous piping system welds, particularly for open root and consumable insert
groove configurations. Certain thin wall socket and fillet welds might also require
inside diameter or backside purging. Welding grade argon (99.995% pure) is the purge
gas that is used most often. Other gases or mixtures can be used, but their suitability
requires determination on a case-by-case basis. Sample purge dams and fixtures typical
of those in general use are illustrated in Figure 12-1.
12-1

Hinges
Approx.
6 in. (150 mm)
Retrieval
Cord
Weld
Retrieval
Cord
Hinged
Disks
Hinged Collapsible Purging Disk
Vent Hole
Chain or Linkage
Pull Cord
Gas
Inlet
Hose
Inlet Opening
Rubber Gasket
Figure 12-1
Sample Fixtures for Purging the Inside Diameter of Pipe Weldments [58]
Although means for calculating the existence for a proper purge via volume exchanges
can be found in references such as AWS D10.11, Recommended Practices for Root Pass
Welding of Pipe Without Backing, the best and most efficient method is to measure the
oxygen content (< 1%) and/or dew point (< -40F) at the weld joint just prior to welding. Various devices are commercially available for measuring these variables.
12.2
Shielding
Welding grade argon is also the gas of choice for shielding the arc with GTAW. Where
torch designs permit, gas lenses should be used to promote enhanced nonturbulent gas
coverage. Use of molecular sieves is encouraged where single gases are employed.
Argon-helium mixtures (up to 50%/50%) are also used because of their ability to increase penetration and decrease lack of fusion problems. The addition of active gases
such as oxygen (0.5% to 5%) and CO2 (5% to 25%) to argon or argon-helium mixtures is
also particularly useful in stabilizing FCAW or GMAW. The use of 100% CO2 shielding
gas is not generally used for piping or heavy component repair applications.
12-2

13
PREHEAT/POST-WELD HEAT TREATMENT
REQUIREMENTS
The candidate materials for piping and valve repairs generally require elevated preheating prior to welding to obtain satisfactory joints. Table 13-1 provides examples of the
nominal minimum recommended preheat temperatures required for the noted materials. The applicable code should be reviewed to obtain specific requirements, as appropriate [12, 32, 53, 55, 56, 59, 61, 66].
Table 13-1
Preheat, Interpass, and PWHT Guidelines [49, 54, 56]
Material
Preheat ( F)
Interpass ( F)
PWHT
Carbon Steel
P-No. 1
P-No. 3
P-No. 4
P-No. 5
50 min.2
200 min. 2
300 min. 2
400 min.2
500 (260 C) max.

500 (260 C) max.
650 (343 C) max.
750 (400 C) max.
Notes 1&3
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Copper & Alloys

Copper
Alloys
Note 4
50 min.
N/A
Note 5
None
None
Nickel & Alloys
50 min.2
500 (260 C) max.
None
Stainless Steels
300 Series
AL-6XN
50 min.
50 min.
350 (177 C) max.

200 (93 C) max.
None 6
None 7
Notes:
1. See Table 13-4 for exemptions to post-weld heat treat.
2. Preheat of 200 F to 400F (93 C to 204C) is helpful on large castings and fittings.
3. Thickness of material, t < 0.750 in (19 mm).
4. Preheat for commercially pure copper varies as follows:
Thickness (in)
Preheat F(min.)
3/16-1/4 (4.8 mm6.4 mm)
200 (93 C)
1/4-3/8 (6.4 mm9.5 mm)
300 (149 C)
over 3/8 (9.5 mm)
500 (260 C)
5. Maximum interpass temperature for copper-zinc, phosphor-bronze, aluminum-bronze, and copper-nickel is not applicable.
Silicon-bronze is established at 200 F (93 C) maximum.
6. If required for re-establishing corrosion resistance, solution anneal at 1 ,800F to 1,900F (982 C to 1,038C) followed by
quench in water or other rapid means.
7. If required for re-establishing corrosion resistance, solution anneal at 2 ,050F (1 ,121C) minimum followed by quench in water
or other rapid means.
Sound workmanship practice would normally result in applying some preheat prior to
welding to ensure an absence of moisture or other deleterious matter. When the work is
13-1

conducted in cool temperatures or areas of high humidity, warming the weld groove
area to prevent condensation is prudent. These low warm to the touch preheats
generally range from 100F to 150F (38C to 66C).
After welding has begun, maintenance of preheat is usually required on heavy sections.
However, maximum interpass temperatures should not be exceeded.
Preheating to the warm to the touch temperature range is generally not controlled or
even monitored. Where precise control is required, electrical resistance heating is preferred. Unless sophisticated torch arrangements are used, flame heating is usually
employed only for general preheating. In either case, preheat temperatures can be
monitored with temperature-indicating crayons, direct reading pyrometers, or thermocouples wired to precision meters or chart recorders. Use of electrical resistance heating
that is monitored and controlled with thermocouples provides the most accurate preheat approach (see Figure 13-1).
Power Lead
Stainless Band
See Note 2
See Note 1
Insulation
Insulating
Pad
Notes:
1. Use temperature-indicating crayons here for proper temperature
reading at the weld bevel.
2. Minimum distance without interfering with welding operation.
Insulation
Banding
Thermocouple
Figure 13-1
Typical Setup for Preheating Pipe Welds with Electrical Resistance Equipment [66]
Elevated preheats are employed to reduce thermal shock to the component, minimize
distortion, and reduce the propensity for cracking. Whereas a post-weld heat treatment
(PWHT) is normally applied to reduce residual stresses, post-weld heating or soaking at
or above the preheat temperature is applied to assist in removal of hydrogen from the
weld and HAZ.
13-2

Thermal post-weld treatments are generally used to enhance or transform the metallurgical structure or to reduce tensile residual stresses created from fit-up and/or welding
operations. Caution must be observed in the implementation of thermal treatments to
avoid creating one problem while solving another, for example, reducing residual
tensile stresses by stress relieving but ending up with a structure that is severely distorted and unfit for service. This is especially true with valves and internals. Manufacturer maintenance and installation recommendations should be consulted. Additional
information can be found in AWS D10.10-90, Recommended Practices for Local Heat
Treatment of Welds in Piping and Tubing [66].
Preheat and PWHT are both essential variables of the welding procedure. A decrease of
more than 100F (38C) in the preheat temperature qualified requires a new welding
procedure specification (WPS). For PWHT, a separate procedure qualification record
(PQR) is required for each of the following conditions:
No PWHT
PWHT within a specified temperature range relative to the upper and lower transformation temperatures
For a test coupon Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) receiving a PWHT in which
the upper transformation temperature range is exceeded, the maximum qualified
thickness for production welds is 1.1 times the thickness of the test coupon.
13.1
Preheat
The main purposes of preheat are:

Retarding the cooling rates of the weld metal and heat-affected zone. This can result
in a HAZ with a lower hardness and lower cracking tendency.
Reducing the magnitude of shrinkage stresses
Reducing the risk of hydrogen cracking in the weld metal and HAZ. Higher preheat
temperatures permit hydrogen to diffuse away from the weld metal and HAZ.
Evaporating moisture (another source of hydrogen) that might be present at the joint
area
The minimum preheat temperature shall not be less than that specified in the WPS. Only
minimum preheat requirements are addressed in the codes. This is based on the need and
the temperature for preheat, which depend upon a number of factors such as base metal
composition, degree of restraint of the parts being joined, and material thickness. Therefore, different preheat temperatures can be required for the same materials, depending on
these factors. Generally, for low-alloy steels, the need for preheat increases with higher
alloy contents, greater restraints, and material thickness. Typical preheat temperatures for
different materials are shown in Table 13-1. Normally, when materials of two different PNumbers are joined by welding, the preheat used is the preheat for the material with the
higher preheat temperature requirement. For example, if P-No. 1 material is welded to PNo. 5, the preheat temperature selected will be that for the P-No. 5 material, because a
higher preheat temperature is required for P-No. 5 compared to P-No. 1.
13-3

For low alloy steels (P-Numbers 3, 4, and 5), preheating should not be interrupted until
the greater of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) or 25% of the groove thickness is filled. The required
preheat must be re-applied prior to the resumption of welding. If the welding procedure specification requires PWHT, it is good practice to apply it to the joint immediately
following welding so that the joint does not cool down to ambient temperature.
It should be noted that if the WPS specifies preheating for welding, then it must also be
used for the following:
Tack welding
Any thermal cutting or gouging, for example, air carbon-arc gouging
Figures 13-1 and 13-2 illustrate typical electrical resistance preheat setups.
Figure 13-2
Typical Setup for Flexible Pad Heating Elements [66]
13.2
Interpass Temperature
Besides specifying preheat temperature, the welding procedure also indicates an upper
temperature limit known as the maximum interpass temperature. Therefore, it is
equally important to check this temperature after depositing a weld bead. If the maximum interpass temperature is exceeded, welding must stop until the temperature drops
to the specified limit.
In practice, interpass temperature restrictions are a problem only where multiple pass
sequences on small diameter or light wall pipe or fittings are used. Rarely are the temperatures noted in Table 13-1 exceeded for Schedule 40 or greater piping and large
component materials with a heavy mass.
13-4

13.3
Post-Weld Heat Treatment
Post-weld heat treatment (PWHT) is performed mainly to relieve residual welding

stresses introduced from the welding operation; however, it can also improve ductility,
toughness, and corrosion-resistance. The need for PWHT depends on both the material
and thickness. For steels (with the exception of austenitic stainless steels), the higher the
P-Number, the greater the hardness and brittleness in the HAZ following cooling from
the welding temperature. The thicker the material and higher the P-Number (1 to 6), the
need for PWHT becomes more critical.
PWHT involves slowly raising the temperature of the completed weld joint, holding at a
specified temperature for a defined time period, followed by slow cooling. Each step in
the procedure is critical and must follow the requirements of the WPS and ASME Code.
Typical PWHT temperatures and holding times for different P-Numbers are shown in
Tables 13-2 and 13-3. The governing code or alternate criteria must be consulted for each
specific situation. The thickness specified is the thickness of the weld, pressure retaining
material, or the thinner of the sections being joined, whichever is least.
Table 13-2
Mandatory Requirements for Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Welds 1
(Ref. ASME Section III, Table NB-4622.1-1) [12]
P-No.
(QW-420,
Sect. IX)
Holding
Temperature
Range, F 2
Minimum Holding Time at Temperature for

Weld Thickness (Nominal)
1/2 (13 mm)
or less
Over 1/2 to 2
(13 to 51 mm)
Over 2 to 5
(51 to 127 mm)
Over 5
(Over 127 mm)
I, 3
1,100 1,250
(593 C 680 C)
30 min.
1 hr/in
2 hr plus 15 min.
each additional inch
over 2 (51 mm)
2 hr plus 15 min. each

additional inch over 2
(51 mm)
1,100 1,250
(593 C 680 C)
30 min.
1 hr/in
1 hr/in

(127 mm)
1,250 1,400
(680 C 760 C)
30 min.
1hr/in
1 hr/in

(127 mm)
P-Nos. 8, 34, 42,

43, 45 and hard
surfacing on P-No. 1
base metal whose
reported carbon
content is not more
than 0.30%.
PWHT neither required nor prohibited.
Notes:
1. Exemptions to the mandatory requirements of this table are defined in Table NB-4622.7.
2. All temperatures are metal temperatures.
Specific information is provided in ASME Section I, Table PW-39, or ASME Section VIII, Division I, Table UCS-56, or ASME B31.1, Table 132.
13-5

Table 13-3
AWS Post-Weld Heat Treatment Temperatures for Selected Base Metal [66]
Base Metal
1/2 to 1-1/4 CrMo
2 to 3
CrMo
5 and 9
CrMo
300
Series
Stainless
C-Steel
C-Mo
C-steel
C-Mo
1/2 to 1-1/4 CrMo
2 to 3 CrMo
5 to 9 CrMo
300 series stainless
1,100 F to 1 ,200 F (590C to 650 C). Not required if wall thickness does not exceed 3/4 inch (19 mm) or for socket
joints.
1,125 F to 1 ,250 F (607 C to 680 C). Not required if wall thickness does not exceed 5/8 inch (16 mm) or for socket
joints.
1,175 F to 1 ,275 F (635 C to 690 C) where the need for high creep and rupture strength is the primary consideration.
1,275 F to 1 ,350 F (690 C to 730 C) where resistance to corrosion or to hydrogen embrittlement is the primary
consideration. Not required for: (1) valves 2 inches (51 mm) and smaller, (2) piping or tubing with a diameter of less
than 4 inches (102 mm) and wall thicknesses under 1/2 inch (13 mm), and (3) socket joints.
1,275 F to 1 ,375 F (690 C to 745 C). Not required for: (1) valves 2 inches (51 mm) and smaller, (2) piping or
tubing with a diameter of less than 4 inches (102 mm), and (3) socket joints.
1,300 F to 1 ,400 F (705 C to 760 C). Cool to preheat temperature or below before applying post-weld heat treatment.
* Not considered in this document. See AWS D10.4. Recommended Practices for Welding Austentic Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel
Piping and Tubing [56].
Heating and cooling rates can be different, depending on the governing criteria. For
example, PWHT heating and cooling rates are different in ASME B31.1 for power piping than they are for components in ASME Section III. ASME B31.1 stipulates that above
600F (316C), the rate of heating and cooling shall not exceed 600F (316C) per hour
divided by 1/2 the maximum thickness of material in inches at the weld, but in no case
shall the rate exceed 600F (316C) per hour. In ASME Section III, above 600F (316C),
the rate shall not be greater than 400F (204C) per hour divided by the maximum thickness in inches; regardless of thickness, the rate shall not exceed 400F per hour and need
be no slower than 100F (38C) per hour.
The use of lower PWHT temperatures with longer holding times at temperature can be
used, where permitted. The governing code or criteria should be consulted for the
application of alternate PWHT criteria.
Specific guidance for the application of alternative approaches is provided in the National
Board Inspection Code, ANSI/NB-23, ASME B31.1, and ASME Sections III and VIII.
When pressure parts of two different P-Number groups are joined, the PWHT for the
material requiring the higher PWHT shall be used. For example, if a P-No. 3 material is
joined to P-No. 5 material, the PWHT requirements for the P-No. 5 material shall apply.
Therefore, the joint has to be PWHT at a temperature of 1,250F (675C), even though
the P-No. 3 material requires only a temperature of 1,100F (593C). In PWHT pressureto-non-pressure parts, the PWHT requirement of the pressure part shall apply.
13-6

Again, it should be noted that the PWHT requirements differ slightly according to
different codes. Therefore, it is important to determine the applicable code and apply
the PWHT variables as specified by that code.
13.4
Guide to Selection of Heating Methods
13.4.1 Gas Torch Heating

Oxyacetylene or oxy-propane heating should be used only for preheating components
less than 2-inches thick. With torch heating, the flame must be moved around to avoid
localized hot or cold spots. Also, the flame must be neutral and care taken that the
reducing (carburizing) center of the flame does not impinge on the surface of the component. For thicker components, it is difficult to introduce and maintain the preheat
temperature uniformly over the entire surface. Electrical resistance heating should be
used for these applications.
Gas torch heating should not be used for PWHT because it is impossible to control the
heating and cooling rates, and hold the temperature in the specified range for the required period of time.
13.4.2 Electrical Resistance Heating

This is the most common method used for PWHT. The heat can be applied by a variety
of equipment, for example, resistance pads, finger elements, braided heaters. If this
method is to be used for PWHT, then it can also be applied for the preheat. In this way,
the joint can be heated to the PWHT temperature straight from the preheat temperature
without allowing the joint to cool down to ambient temperature.
13.4.3 Furnace Heating

This method can be used only when the component is portable and can be removed
from the site; Therefore, it is seldom used for plant repairs. However, it is economical
and produces a uniform temperature in the component.
13.4.4 Induction Heating

Induction heating is not widely used for field repairs but is ideally suited for PWHT of
heavy-walled components. It produces a very uniform temperature distribution.
13.5
Guide for Selection of Preheat and PWHT
Preheat and PWHT of weld joints is dependent on the base metal composition, dimensions, type of joint, type of welding filler material, andfor PWHTthe preheat
applied during welding. It is essential to know the above variables so that the heat
treatment requirements for the weld can be selected.
13-7

The mandatory requirements are specified in the different codes. It should be noted that
the requirements vary according to which code is being applied. For these cases, the
preheat and PWHT are slightly different among the various codes, for example, different heating and cooling rates, definition of nominal thickness, and PWHT exemptions.
13.6
Preheat and PWHT Procedures
13.6.1 General
A standard procedure should be prepared for the preheat and PWHT of welded joints.
This should describe how the heat treatment is to be performed and will ensure that
standard procedures are used. The procedure or specification should include most of
the details discussed above:
Purpose of preheating and PWHT
Guide to selection and details of heating methods
Installation of heating equipment
Specific requirements, that is, the heat treatment cycle for different codes
It should also include the following topics, which are covered below:
Thermocouple attachment and location
Width of heated band
Documentation
Specific procedures can then be prepared for different P-Number materials for the
required code application. The procedure tabulates the actual preheat and PWHT parameters, for example, applicable code, base metals, nominal thickness, preheat temperature, PWHT heating rate, holding temperature, holding time, and cooling rate. This
procedure can also be used to check and review a contractors procedure if the PWHT is
to be performed by a heat treatment company.
13.6.2 Temperature Measurement

Temperature-indicating crayons or contact pyrometers should be used to check the
preheat temperature and to ensure that it is applied for a distance that is equal to the
thickness of the part being welded, but not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in all directions
from the point of welding. Another crayon should be used to ensure that the joint does
not exceed the maximum interpass temperature during welding. Select a crayon that
melts at the minimum preheat temperature and apply just outside the weld joint area
[no closer than 1/2 inch (13 mm) from the expected weld toe]. The temperature should
be checked periodically to ensure that the preheat temperature is still above the minimum value during the whole welding operation.
13-8

For PWHT, the temperature must be monitored using thermocouples, the output of
which is recorded on a calibrated, multi-channel, strip chart recorder. The entire PWHT
cycle needs to be recorded on the chart. It is also important to note on the strip chart the
specific scales of the temperature and time increments, for example, 1 inch (25 mm) is
equivalent to 30 minutes on the vertical axis. Each thermocouple recording point must
be identified, that is, identify each thermocouple number on the chart with its location
so that the heat cycle at each point can be determined.
13.6.3 Thermocouples
These are normally chromel-alumel Type K, in accordance with ANSI MC96.1. This
standard provides information on temperature measurement and thermocouples,
including terminology, fabrication, wire sizes, installation, and temperature-millivolt
tables.
Thermocouples can be attached using capacitor discharge, thermocouple clips, or flattened tube methods. Figures 13-3 and 13-4 show the three attachment methods. A
minimum of two thermocouples for piping < 8 inches (203 mm) in diameter for the
purpose of temperature recording are placed 180 apart on each pipe weld. For components over 8 inches (203 mm) in diameter, four thermocouples are normally required
and they are placed 90 apart at the 12, 3, 6, and 9 oclock positions. As a minimum,
thermocouples should be placed at the area of highest and lowest anticipated temperatures.
Thermocouples should be located at the outside edge of the minimum controlled band
width (see Figure 13-5). A spare thermocouple should be attached in case one fails
during PWHT. The thermocouple should also run along the surface of the pipe for at
least 8 inches (203 mm) before being brought out through the insulation. Typical placement areas and number of thermocouples are shown in Figure 13-6.
13-9

Twisted T/C Wire

Application Pliers
Workpiece Lead
Figure 13-3
Thermocouple Attachment for PWHT Using the Capacitor Discharge Method [66]
13-10

Type "K" Thermocouple
Weld
Tack Welded
Thermocouple
Attachment Plate
Thermocouple Leads
1/4" Dia. Tube x 3/4" Long, Flattened

to Grip Thermocouple Leads
Porcelain Beads
Tack Welded
Notes:
Tube holding thermocouple
should be of same material
as weldment.
Figure 13-4
Thermocouple Attachment for PWHT Using Clips and a Flattened Tube [66]
13-11

CBW = a
t 1 = Run Pipe Wall Thickness
t 2 = Branch Pipe Wall Thickness
W = Width of Weld Cover Pass
W
Run Pipe or Vessel Shell Butt Weld
b
CBW = c
CBW = D + 2b
Branch or Nozzle Connection
CBW = L + 2b
Attachment Weld
CBW
D
Dimension
Pipe
Header
Branch
3 W Where t1 1 1/2"
3 t 1 Where t1 > 1 1/2"
b
c
2 t1
2 t2
Vessel
6 t1 + W
3 t1
2 t2
CBW = D + 2b
Butt Weld in Branch or Nozzle
(Where there is less than 2 D between the heating
pads, on the branch pipe, and the surface of the
run pipe.)
Figure 13-5
Minimum Controlled Band Width (CBW) for Post-Weld Heat Treatment [53]
13-12

HBW = Minimum Heated Band Width

(Area Under the Heating Pads)
Not Less Than 2"

(Typ. All Figures)
CBW =
=
=
=
Minimum Controlled Band Width

Thermocouple Location (Near Side)
Thermocouple Location (Far Side)
Typical Locations for Extrathermocouples
CBW
HBW
Pipe 8" Dia. or Less
If Diameter is > 8"
CBW
If Diameter is > 8"
HBW
Pipe Over 8" Dia.
CBW
CBW
HBW
HBW
CBW
HBW
If Diameter is > 8"
If Diameter is > 8"
CBW
Note: Heated zones on branch pipe
must be controlled separately from heated
zones on run pipe.
HBW
Figure 13-6
Required Thermocouple Locations and Minimum Heated Band Width (HBW)
for Post-Weld Heat Treatment [53]
13-13

13.6.4 Minimum Controlled Band Width

Local PWHT consists of heating a circumferential band around the component. The
minimum width of the heated band will include any nozzle, attachment, branch connections, and the additional weld width as follows:
Circumferential Butt
Joints in Pipe
Three times the width of the weld cover pass

for wall thicknesses inch (13 mm). For pipe wall
thicknesses > inch (13 mm), three times the pipe wall
thickness.
Branch, Nozzle or
Attachment Connections
Two times the run pipe wall thickness plus the run pipe
thickness under the connection weld on either side of the
area under the connection. Along the branch pipe or
nozzle away from the weld for a distance of at least two
times the branch pipe or nozzle wall thickness.
Typical examples of heated band widths are shown in Figure 13-6.
13.6.5 Heat Treatment Records

Before PWHT is performed, a data sheet should be prepared that indicates all the variables of the method. Typical forms that can be completed and kept as a records are
shown in Figures 13-7a and 13-7b.
13-14

SPECIFICATIONS (Completed by Technical Representative)
SPEC. NO.
DEPT.
UNIT
DR/CHANGE PROP. NO.
USI
LINE/EQUIP. NO.
WORK PLAN NO.
DATE
JOB DESCRIPTION:
MATERIALS:
PROGRAM PROFILE: (Define heating rates, dwells, heating levels, and cooling rates to be used.)
Heating Rate:
Soak Temperature:
Dwell Time:
Cooling Rate:
SAMPLE PROGRAM PROFILE
Heating
Rate
Dwell
Cooling
Rate
C/Hr
Min.
C/Hr
TEMP
(C)
TIME (min.)
ORIGINATOR (Print)
EXT. NO.
ORIGINATOR (Signature)
DATE
VERIFIED BY
DATE
Figure 13-7a
Heat Treatment Quality Control Specification [53]
Also, a copy of the temperature chart should be kept as a record and checked by the
utility inspector or engineer to ensure that the specified temperature cycle has been used.
13-15

13.7
Preheat and Post-Weld Heat Treatment ConsiderationsHardfacing
In most cases, application of hardfacing alloys requires a clean substrate surface and
some preheat. Preheating from warm to the touch up to and including code minimums is used to remove moisture and contaminants, and to reduce the cooling rate of
the molten weld pool for reducing hot or cold cracking tendencies.
13.7.1 Preheat
Hardfacing operations on carbon steel substrates typically yield better results when
accomplished with preheat. This is especially true for the martensitic stainless steel (410,
and so on) and cobalt alloys. Code minimums of course apply, but 200F (93C) minimum is typical.
Prior to EPRIs development of the NOREM family of alloys, non-cobalt bearing
hardfacing alloys typically required the application of 600F800F (316C427C) preheats. The NOREM alloys were formulated to require reduced preheat but to benefit
from the use of up to approximately 200F preheats, especially for localized repairs.
13.7.2 Post-Weld Heat TreatmentHardfacing

Post-weld heat treatment requirements vary for different substrates and code sections
that a component is being repaired to. In general, PWHT is not required for P-Numbers
1, 8, 34, 42, and 45. The PWHT requirements for P-Nos. 3, 4, and 5 vary from code to
code. Table 13-4 is provided to assist in finding the requirements for the specific application.
Table 13-4
Code References for Preheat & PWHT Requirements
Code Jurisdiction
Code Section
ASME B&PVC, Section I
NB-, NC-, ND-4600
ASME B&PVC, Section III

ASME B&PVC, Section VIII
ASME Power Pipe Code B 31.1
13.8
Sections 131, 132
Contracted PWHT
PWHT is contracted out by many utilities to specialty contractors or specialist heat

treatment companies. Before any work is performed, the contractor must submit the
PWHT procedure to be used. This should include, as a minimum, the requirements
shown in Figures 13-7a and 13-7b. This informs the utility how the PWHT will be performed, that is, the method, how the joint will be wrapped (heaters and insulation),
temperature measurement, and so on, and the heat treatment cycle to be used. This
must be reviewed and approved by the utility prior to the repair.
13-16

RECORD OF HEAT TREATMENT
STRIP RECORDER NO.
CHART NO.
TEMPERATURE AXIS (C/Division)
TIME AXIS (Minutes/Division)
SKETCH (weld, numbered thermocouple locations, etc.)
WELD NO., DESCRIPTION, AND LOCATION
THERMOCOUPLE
POINT NO.
STRIP CHART
COLOR
OPERATOR NAME (Print)
POINT
OPERATOR SIGNATURE
VERIFIED BY:
ACCEPTED BY:
OPERATOR'S SUPERVISOR
ONTARIO HYDRO INSPECTOR'S

SIGNATURE
MATERIAL THICKNESS
AT THERMOCOUPLE
LOCATIONS
DATE
DATE
Figure 13-7b
Heat Treatment Quality Control Record [53]
13-17

The contractor should supply a signed and dated heating chart with the thermocouple
locations marked and the time and temperature scales. It is essential that the utility check
the charts to ensure that the correct heat treatment cycle has been applied to the joint.
13-18

14
WELDING METHODS AND PROCEDURES
Base metal weld repair of most valve components, except hardfacing, can be performed
with existing qualified welding procedure specifications (WPS) initially developed for
fabrication or repair of standard piping components. Particular attention must be given
to the effects of preheat, post-weld heat treatment, and weld residual stresses on the
entire valve to minimize distortion. Excessive distortion can cause significant performance problems for internal components and sealing surfaces. Peening should be
considered as a means for minimizing distortion on large repairs. The manufacturers
recommendations should always be consulted. No attempt has been made to provide
actual electrical and mechanical parameters in this guideline because of the variations
due to thickness, material, and individual utility/service vendor practices.
14.1
Manual Base Metal Welding Procedure Guidelines
The orientation, sequence, and placement of each weld bead is critical to making a
localized repair with minimal residual stress. The following information will assist in
making manual repairs. In general, WPSs used for construction of major piping sytems
are generally adequate for base metal repairs.
14.1.1 Manual SMAW

The following guidelines will assist in making manual SMAW repairs:
CleanlinessRemove all grease, oil, cutting lubricant, inspection paints, and dyes
with a solvent such as acetone. If contaminants are not removed, they can cause
porosity, lack of fusion with the base material, and cracking.
Prior to welding, the new surface should be examined by liquid penetrant (PT) or
magnetic particle (MT) testing to ensure that the surface is free of all cracks and base
metal defects.
When possible, utilize a minimal 200F (93C) preheat when making repairs on
carbon steel valve materials.
Use stringer beads of very minimal oscillation.
Wrap heavy sections in insulation immediately after welding to slow the cooling rate.
14-1

14.1.2 Manual GTAW

The following guidelines will assist in making manual GTAW repairs:
Prior to welding, the machined/ground surface should be examined by liquid
penetrant (PT) or magnetic particle (MT) testing to ensure that the surface is free of
all cracks and base metal defects.
When welding on cast substrates, deposit a matching butter layer to seal the base
material and provide a sound substrate.
Use a torch gas cup as large as possible.
Make the bead width no wider than the gas cup diameter.
Clean the weld deposit thoroughly between passes, grinding and brushing as necessary.
Avoid autogenous welding or washing of deposited repair weld material.
14.2
Machine Base Metal Welding Procedure Guidelines
Most repairs to valve bodies or base material are performed with manual welding
approaches unless the repairs are extensive. ALARA considerations can, however,
dictate the use of machine welding.
14.2.1 Machine GTAW

The following guidelines will assist in making machine repairs:
Prior to welding, the machined/ground surface should be examined by liquid
penetrant (PT) or magnetic particle (MT) testing to ensure that the surface is free of
all cracks and base metal defects.
When welding in remote applications where interpass cleaning is not practical, use a
solid wire product.
On heavy sections, a minimum preheat of 250F (121C) for carbon steel and 200F
(93C) for stainless is recommended. Preheat should be maintained throughout the
welding application.
Minimize the weld torch oscillation when welding directly on cast valve body material.
For machine GTAW applications, use a 2% lanthanated or 2% cerium tungsten
electrode with a point sharpened to a 14 angle.
Avoid autogenous welding or washing the deposit.
14-2

14.3
Hardfacing Welding Procedure Guidelines
14.3.1 General RequirementsHardfacing

Depositing a hardfacing alloy of any type requires thorough planning. Careful consideration should be given to surface preparation, overlay configuration, preheat requirements, and buildup thickness. These considerations, along with sound welding practices, generally result in a crack-free weld [10].
14.3.1.1 Surface Preparation
Remove all grease, oil, cutting lubricant, inspection paints, and dyes with a solvent such
as acetone. If contaminants are not removed, they can cause porosity, lack of fusion
with the base material, and cracking.
Prior to welding, the machined/ground surface should be examined by liquid penetrant (PT) or magnetic particle (MT) testing to ensure that the surface is free of all
cracks and base metal defects. The surface should also be etched for the remains of
existing hardfacing. If found, these materials should also be removed by grinding or
machining. Gouges and depression areas should be built up with a matching filler
material and blended to the contour of the substrate surface.
14.3.1.2 Hardfacing Configuration
The deposit configuration should be designed in such a way as to minimize distortion
and residual stress due to shrinkage. The weld direction and deposited thickness should
remain consistent at all times. Varying the deposit thickness or the number of layers
creates an unequal distribution of stresses and promotes the potential for cracking. The
first deposited layer of hardfacing should cover enough base material or butter material to
ensure that subsequent hardfacing layers do not contact base material. This reduces the
potential for cold-lap, lack-of-fusion, and crack initiation.
Consideration should be given to the design of the weldment for in-process thickness
maintenance and post-weld machining. This is especially important to in situ remote
welding. Machined reference surfaces or pockets should be provided so that the deposited thickness and width can be measured. Sufficient hardfacing width should be provided such that final machining can remove and contour the edges of the deposit, thus
eliminating potential toe cracks, typical of hardfacing weldments.
14.3.1.3 Preheating
Hardfacing material generally requires preheating depending upon the welding process,
base material, and weld configuration. The purpose of preheating is to slow down the
cooling rate of the weldment to reduce stress, distortion, andultimatelycracking.
There can be no specific guidelines for preheating due to the many variables involved.
The best guide is experience with the specific application through the use of mockups.
14-3

This is essential when the aim is to weld at room temperature on heavy sections or
when only a limited preheat can be used.
Based on the experience of EPRI evaluators and valve manufacturers, the following
minimum preheat recommendations are provided as a starting point. It should be noted
that higher preheats might be required for massive and complex parts. Higher preheats
might also be necessary for hardfacing deposits exceeding three layers.
14.3.1.4 Hardfacing Preheat Recommendations for Machine and Manual Gas Tungsten
Arc Welding (GTAW) and Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW)
P1 and P8 wrought substrates, three layers or less, min. 150F (66C).
P1 and P8 cast substrates with butter layer(s), three layers or less, min. 100F (38C).
P1 substrate, more than three layers, min. 250F (121C).
P8 substrate, more than three layers, min. 200F (93C).
14.3.1.5 Preheat Recommendations for Plasma-Transferred Arc Welding (PTAW)
P1 wrought substrate, three layers or less, min. 250F (121C).
P8 wrought substrate, three layers or less, PTAW process, min. 200F (93C).
P1 cast substrate, three layers or less, PTAW process, min. 400F (204C).
P8 cast substrate, three layers or less, PTAW process, min. 300F (149C).
It is a good practice to warm any part to 100F (38C) to drive off any moisture from
pores and crevices of the substrate material. Once the preheat temperature is established, monitoring should be maintained throughout the welding proces. After welding
is completed, the part should be wrapped in insulation to slow the cooling rate.
14.3.1.6 Buildup Thickness
The thickness of the hardfacing deposit has a direct effect on distortion, residual stress,
and preheat requirements. Hardfacing serves as a protective wear surfacing material to
preserve the structural material under it. To perform this function, it must be hard and
is subsequently more brittle than the substrate.
As a recommended practice, all weld deposits should be limited to three layers or 1/4
inch, whichever is less. The total finished deposited thickness should be approximately
1/8 inch (3.2 mm), which will require 3/16 inch to 1/4 inch (4.8 mm to 6.4 mm) welded
thickness prior to machining. This thickness includes the height above the base material
plus the depth of penetration and mixing below the original surface. If the specific
application requires more than the recommended thickness due to the removal of
existing hardfacing materials, the base material should be built up with a butter material so that the new hardfacing thickness is not excessive.
14-4

14.3.1.7 Cooling Rate

Controlling the cooling rate of the hardfacing deposit is one of the most critical variables to produce a crack-free weld without preheating. Although this topic has been
mentioned in several other areas, its importance warrants special attention and general
consideration.
A rapid cooling rate can lead to cracking, spalling or underbead cracking at the base
metal interface, and distortion. Methods that have been found to be effective in slowing
the cooling rate include:
Preheating
Insulating the work piece during and after the welding operation
Providing higher heat input during the welding operation
Providing higher heat input to reduce the cooling rate of the weld puddle is an effective
way to slow the cooling rate where little or no preheat is used in field applications.
These practices are contrary to standard welding methods employed to weld carbon
and stainless steels but are quite typical for most hardfacing alloy and other high alloy
steel welding.
The key variable that must be maintained is travel speed. The importance of controlling
this variable must be emphasized to welding personnel. It is extremely important to
keep the travel speed at 3 inches per minute (ipm) to 4 ipm (75 mm/min. to
100 mm/min.) Faster travel speeds produce thin narrow beads, fast cooling rates, and
potential stress (shrinkage) cracks.
14.3.2 Suggested Welding Practices

In addition to the general requirements presented previously, depositing hardfacing
materials without elevated preheat requires welding practices that are generally known
only by experienced hardfacing welders. Many lessons have been learned as a result of
several hundred weldability evaluations performed at the EPRI RRAC and information
shared by valve manufacturers, service companies, and secondary utility evaluators.
Selected welding practices are provided by process.
14.3.3 Manual GTAW

The following welding practices have been found to provide the most consistent results:
material and provide a sound substrate.
A minimum preheat of 250F (121C) for carbon steel and 200F (93C) for stainless
steel is recommended when more than three layers of hardfacing is required. Preheat should be maintained throughout the welding application.
The torch gas cup should be as large as possible.
14-5

Keep the bead width no wider than the gas cup diameter.
Use a 2% lanthanated or 2% cerium tungsten electrode with the point sharpened to a
14 angle.
Maintain a consistent travel speed. If the optimum travel speed is 3 ipm
(75 mm/min.), then 3 ipm should be maintained along the entire length of the weld
bead and not be an average speed from 2 ipm to 4 ipm (51mm/min.100 mm/min.).
Maintain the heat input between 25 KJ/in (9.8 KJ/cm) and 40 KJ/in (15.7 KJ/cm)
when welding without preheat.
Avoid increasing the heat input above that used on the first layer.
Use a 50% bead overlap.
Use care when introducing the weld rod. The rod should not be fed into or dipped
into the molten puddle. The rod should be located such that the leading edge of the
molten puddle moves toward the welding rod.
Avoid actual feeding or dipping of the rod into the puddle, which can cause premature freezing, resulting in a sluggish puddle, and rapid solidification, leading to
cracking.
Clean the weld deposit thoroughly between passes, grinding and brushing as necessary.
Avoid autogenous welding or washing of deposited hardfacing material.
At the end of a bead, continue to feed the rod into the molten puddle and down
slope as quickly as possible.
14.3.4 Localized Hardfacing Repair Practices

Keeping residual stresses to a minimum is the key to a successful localized repair. The
elements necessary to complete a repair are: repair cavity preparation/profile, preheat,
and weld bead sequence. These repair practices are generally the same with either the
manual or machine process.
14.3.4.1 Repair Cavity Preparation/Profile
Cracks in a hardfacing deposit generally propagate to the fusion line of the base material. The crack must be completely removed by machining or grinding and verified by
liquid penetrant (PT) testing. If removing the crack requires excessive gouging into the
substrate material, building up the area to the original base material height with a
similar filler material is recommended. After completing the local base material buildup, the repair cavity is prepared.
In general, the repair cavity should be profiled such that the welding can be performed
in the direction of the original weld. When performing machine repairs, minimum 3:1
taper on both ends of the cavity is recommended to allow a machine welding torch to
move into and out of the cavity without obstruction. This gentle slope helps to reduce
14-6

stress buildup and to aid welder visibility. After grinding and cleaning, a final PT
should be performed to verify that no further defects are visible.
14.3.4.2 Preheat
Repairs introduce very high localized residual stresses due to differential coefficients of
thermal expansion between the base material and the hardfacing material. Demonstrations have shown that repairs on stainless steel substrates are less sensitive to cracking
than on carbon steel substrates. This is due to the thermal coefficients between the
hardfacing alloy and stainless materials.
As an example, localized repairs were successfully demonstrated with the NOREM 02
chemistry on stainless steel substrates at ambient temperatures. Repairs on carbon steel
substrates were sometimes successfully performed at ambient temperature. A minimum
preheat of 200F to 300F (93C to 149C) was consistently successful and is recommended.
When repairs are required on very complex parts or on parts of variable base material
thickness, additional preheat of up to 500F (260C) has been successfully demonstrated.
Preheats for repair demonstrations were generally applied with a pad to the substrate
material and checked frequently during welding to ensure that the minimum temperature was maintained. The preheat was maintained until the repair was completed and
then for the duration of the welding activity. The parts were then insulated to provide
slow cooling.
14.3.4.3 Repair Welding
The orientation, sequence, and placement of each weld bead is critical to making a
localized repair of a hardfacing deposit.
The following welding practices are suggested for a successful hardfacing repair:
Provide a repair cavity that has a good transition at the ends and sides for visibility
and access.
Utilize a minimal 250F (121C) preheat when making repairs on carbon steel substrates.
Avoid autogenous welding of the existing hardfacing material.
At the end of a bead, maintain the wire feed into the molten puddle and down slope
as quickly as possible.
Use stringer beads or very minimal oscillation.
Maintain consistent travel speed.
Wrap finished parts in insulation immediately after welding to slow the cooling rate.
14-7

14.4
Machine Hardfacing Welding Procedure Guidelines
General requirements, suggested welding practices, and repair practices are identical
with those listed in Sections 14.3.1, 14.3.2, and 14.3.4.
14.4.1 Machine GTAW

When welding in remote applications where interpass cleaning is not practical, use a
solid wire product.
material and provide a sound substrate on which to deposit NOREM.
When more than three layers of hardfacing is required, use a minimum preheat of
200F (93C) for carbon steel and 150F (66C) for stainless.
Maintain the heat input between 25 KJ/in (9.8 KJ/cm) and 40 KJ/in (15.7 KJ/cm)
when welding without preheat.
Minimize weld torch oscillation.
Use a 50% overlap of the adjacent bead.
Do not permit the second and subsequent beads/layers to overlap; do not place
them so that they touch the original substrate or butter layer as this increases the
potential for lack of fusion.
For remote applications, use a 2% lanthanated or 2% cerium tungsten electrode with
the point sharpened to a 14 angle.
Use care when introducing the weld wire. The wire should be fed into the molten
puddle at a point between the tungsten and the leading edge of the molten puddle.
If the wire entry point and leading edge of the molten puddle occur at the same
point, wire feed, travel speed, or both are too great.
Avoid feeding excessive wire into the puddle, which can cause premature freezing,
resulting in a sluggish puddle, and rapid solidification, leading to cracking.
Maintain a consistent travel speed, even when operating in the orbital mode.
Use a slow travel speed of 4 ipm (100 mm/min.) or less to slowly heat the substrate
material and to provide a slow cooling rate.
Avoid autogenous welding or washing the deposit.
At the end of a bead, maintain the wire feed into the molten puddle and down slope
14-8

14.4.2 Machine PTAW

material and provide a sound substrate on which to deposit the hardfacing material.
Use a minimum preheat of 200F (93C) when more than three layers of hardfacing is
required. Preheat should be maintained throughout the welding application.
Clean the weld deposit thoroughly between passes, grinding and brushing as
necessary.
Use a 50% bead overlap.
Use a slow travel speed of 5 ipm (126 mm/min.) or less to slowly heat the substrate
material and to provide a slow cooling rate.
Avoid autogenous welding or washing of the deposited hardfacing material.
At the end of a bead, maintain powder feed into the molten puddle and down slope
Wrap finished parts in insulation immediately after welding to slow the cooling rate.
14.5
Temperbead Welding Repair Guidelines
ASME Sections III, VIII, XI and ASME/ANSI B31.1 recognize repairs to P-Number 1
and 3 materials without the application of post-weld heat treatment if certain conditions
are met. These codes do not recognize repairs to cast P-Number 4 or 5 (Ref. ASME
Section IX) materials without the application of post-weld heat treatment as does the
National Board Inspection Code, NB-23. Temperbead repair techniques have been
developed to meet such repair needs. The goal when using the temperbead technique is
to produce equal or greater properties in the repair weld heat-affected zone as those
found in the parent base material. Creep rupture is not a factor in repairs conducted
under ASME Section XI because operating temperatures will not exceed 600F (316C)
[12, 56, 61, 6774].
14.5.1 Temperbead Qualification and Demonstration

A successful temperbead repair relies upon the welders ability to temper the heataffected zone of the base metal by careful placement and deposition of repair weld
beads and layers. This ability must be demonstrated and documented in the form of the
qualification of a welding procedure specification. Specific criteria for alternate repair of
P-Numbers 1 and 3 are outlined in ASME Section XI, IWA-4600 (SMAW and GTAW
only) and NB-23, Paragraph RD-1040, Welding Method 2 (1995). Also, all requirements
specified in ASME Section IX for the qualified process must be observed. Selected
highlights and additional information are provided below.
14-9

14.5.1.1 Qualification Considerations

Process. The gas tungsten arc (GTAW), gas metal arc (GMAW), flux-cored arc (FCAW),
and shielded metal arc (SMAW) welding processes can be used. In most cases, either
GTAW or SMAW are used. RRAC has conducted tests with both processes plus FCAW
and obtained successful results. The bulk of work has been directed at the SMAW
process because most repairs are localized and do not lend themselves to semi-automation or machine welding.
Qualification Material. Test coupon material for the welding procedure qualification
shall be of the same material specification (including specification type, grade, class,
and condition of heat treatment) as the original material for the repair. If the original
material specification material is obsolete, the test material used should conform as
much as possible to the original material used for construction, but in no case shall the
material be lower in strength. Most mockups and qualifications are conducted with new
material. RRAC has conducted reference evaluations on service-aged components
[piping and valves that have operated in the 850F to 1,050F (454C to 575C) range]
and has shown that even material that has seen significant service (> 100,000 hours)
provides acceptable tensile, yield, and toughness results.
Technique. Technique factors, including geometry and position of the repair cavity,
percentage of bead overlay, number of layers, applied preheat and interpass temperature, and whether peening is utilized, affect the ability to produce a satisfactory repair.
The figure provided in ASME XI, IWA-4600, Figure IWA-4623.1-1 (see Figure 1 of the
document) is typically used. (Note: All of the work conducted in the EPRI/RRAC
Lundin and Friedman studies omitted Step 2, removal of the weld bead crown of the
first layer.) Groove depth is determined by repair depth, and the width of the qualification groove normally is about one inch at the root area. See Figure 14-1.
14-10

30 (Typ)
Step 1: Butter cavity with one layer of weld

metal using 3/32-inch diameter coated electrode.
1/8" R
Max Depth
3/4" (Typ)
Reinforcement Weld
Temper Bead Layer
Step 2: The second layer shall be deposited with a 1/8inch diameter electrode. Subsequent layers shall
be deposited with welding electrode no larger
than 5/32-inch maximum diameter. Bead
deposition shall be performed in a manner as
shown. Particular care shall be taken in the
application of the temper bead reinforcement weld
at the tie-in points as well as its removal to ensure
that the heat-affected zone of the base metal and
the deposited weld metal is tempered and the
resulting surface is substantially flush.
Figure 14-1
Temperbead Groove Preparation, Geometry, and Weld Bead Sequence [12]
Position influences bead shape and size, but is affected more by the shape of the repair
cavity. The geometry of the repair cavity must be such that multiple beads and layers
can be deposited. The bottom and remainder of the cavity must permit at least two
beads per layer to be deposited. The cavity must also be of sufficient width to allow the
first layer to be deposited without tie-in of the opposite sidewalls. Tie-in of side walls
on the first layer prohibits or severely limits the ability to temper the HAZ with subsequent passes or layers. Weld layers composed of beads that exhibit 50% overlap seem to
provide the best results and are easily achieved by the welder.
Electrodes of increasing diameter are used; the first layer with 3/32-inch (2.4-mm)
diameter, second layer with 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) diameter, and third plus remaining
layers with no larger than 5/32-inch (4-mm) diameter. Although permitted, many
repair cavities are more easily accomplished by using only the 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) and
14-11

1/8-inch (3.2-mm) diameter electrodes. Cavities are often not wide enough or the position hinders accommodating 5/32-inch (4-mm) electrodes where SMAW is used.
Various studies by Alberry, Lundin, and Friedman have proposed methods for ensuring that beads at the edge of the final weld reinforcement receive proper tempering.
Although methods including run-off tabs have been evaluated, careful bead placement
and sequence provide the most flexible means for proper tempering under varying
conditions of cavity geometry, position, and component geometry.
Peening can be used, if it is implemented during the qualification and documented. This
method for mitigation of shrinkage and residual stresses can be effective, but should
never be used where only a thin section (< 1/4 inch) (6.4 mm) remains or on the root/
hot passes or on the final weld reinforcement layer. Peening should be implemented
only on the second or later intermediate layers.
Preheat/Post Bake. Preheat and interpass temperature are stipulated for P-Numbers 1
and 3. The values stated for P-Number 3 have been shown to be adequate for P-Number
4 and should be effective for P-Number 5, as well. Mass, geometry, and location of the
repair cavity dictate the amount of preheat maintenance that is required. Normally on
test assemblies, much delay is experienced waiting for the assembly to cool down between weld beads or layers. Conversely, full size components in a power plant generally exhibit large heat sinking that effectively minimizes or reduces interpass temperature delays or concerns. In either case, accurate monitoring via thermocouples or
contact pyrometers is essential.
A two-hour post-weld bake is required by code for P-Number 1 materials and a four-hour
bake for P-Number 3 materials. This step is to ensure that any dissolved hydrogen evacuates to acceptable levels (typically < 5 ml/100 g). This step, although required by code, is
very conservative due to modern electrode manufacturing methods that enable production of moisture-resistant electrode coatings. Most domestic electrode manufacturers offer
moisture-resistant (MR) low hydrogen electrode coatings (< 5 ml/100 g) that maintain
their MR condition for up to 8 to 10 hours of exposure. At least one European source
offers MR coatings that maintain < 3 ml/100 g. The EPRI/RRAC work on P-Number 4
materials used typical low hydrogen electrode coatings and observed a two-hour postweld bake at 500F 50F (232C to 288C) with successful results.
14.5.1.2 Qualification Results
As a minimum, tensile, bend, and toughness tests must be performed to demonstrate
the ability of the repair procedure to produce satisfactory mechanical properties.
14-12

14.5.2 Implementation
14.5.2.1 Repair Sequence
Identification and Layout of Repairs. It is important for repair areas to be identified
and characterized via one or more of the various nondestructive examination (NDE)
methods. When the location and extent of repairs are known, maps should be developed and the scope of work or repair can be defined. The location and extent of repair
required affect the welding procedure qualifications and the number of welders required, as well as practical factors including scaffolding, weld metal consumables,
welding machines, and preheating equipment.
Excavation of Defects. Unacceptable indications and defects must be removed to sound
metal. Removal can be achieved by mechanical means, such as grinding or machining,
or by thermal methods, including flame and air arc gouging. Usually no preheat is
required when using mechanical methods, but at least some (warm to the touch) is
advisable when air arc gouging is used.
Where multiple repair cavities are encountered, it can be advantageous to connect them
to gain better access for welding and bead placement. If repairs will involve approximately 1/2 of a welds length or circumference, consideration should be given for a
complete cut-out and reweld. This would typically require full PWHT, but past operations have shown this to normally be cost-effective, as well as to reduce the large unbalanced shrinkage and distortion from the repair of a large area.
Preparation and Geometry of Repair Cavity. The geometry of the repair cavity must
complement the repair operation. A temperbead repair cavity must have enough width
and overall volume to permit deposition of the proper number of weld layers. In particular, the root or bottom of the repair cavity must be able to accept multiple beads to ensure
that tempering of the base metal HAZ and subsequent weld beads can be accomplished.
NDE of Repair Cavity. Unacceptable indications and defects must be removed prior to
repair. NB-23 requires that the excavated area to be repaired be examined by either
magnetic particle (MT) or liquid penetrant (PT) testing to establish that no defects exist.
Installation of Preheat, Temperature Monitoring, and Insulation. Preheat equipment
must be installed to permit both temperature control of the component to be repaired
and provide access to the repair cavity for the welder. Where precise control is required,
electrical resistance heating is preferred. Unless sophisticated torch arrangements are
used, flame heating is usually only employed for general preheating. In either case,
preheat temperatures can be monitored with temperature-indicating crayons, direct
reading pyrometers, or thermocouples wired to precision meters or chart recorders. Use
of electrical resistance heating monitored and controlled with thermocouples provides
the most accurate preheat approach.
Besides specifying preheat temperature, the welding procedure also indicates an upper
temperature limit known as the maximum interpass temperature. Therefore, it is
14-13

equally important to check this temperature after depositing a weld bead, and if the
maximum interpass temperature is exceeded, welding must stop until the temperature
drops to the specified limit. In practice, interpass temperature restrictions are a problem
only where multiple pass sequences on small diameter or light wall pipe or fittings are
used. Rarely are the temperatures exceeded for Schedule 40 or greater piping and large
component materials with a heavy mass.
Insulation must complement the operation. Most successful operations place the majority of insulation in a temporary but non-removable (short term) fashion and have only
removable-type insulation directly over the repair cavity. After repair welding is completed, removable insulation must be replaced for the post-weld bake.
Depositing the First and Second Layer. Depositing the first and second layer of repair
weld metal is the most important portion of a temperbead repair operation because of
their effect on the base metal HAZ. Weld beads must be placed and deposited such that
approximately 50% overlap is achieved. Electrode size, heat input, and bead thickness
are typically minimized for the first layer to enable the heat of welding from the second
bead/layer to provide a level of tempering to the preceding bead and its HAZ. Heat
input for the second layer must be maximized to further provide tempering without
sacrificing the quality of the deposit. Provided that the prescribed overlap, preheat,
interpass temperature, other WPS parameters, and average workmanship standards are
observed, repairs with acceptable and reproducible results should be obtained.
Depositing the Remaining Fill Layers. The technique for depositing the remaining
layers is rather flexible, if the WPS is followed. Maintenance of preheat and not exceeding the maximum qualified interpass temperature is very important. In most cases,
manual processes are used due to the localized nature of repairs, and interpass temperature concerns are minimized.
Depositing the Final Layer/Weld Reinforcement. The final weld reinforcement is
normally made flush with the surface of the component. Care must be observed to
avoid creating an additional HAZ in the base material that is not tempered. Observing
careful bead placement and sequence can ensure that beads at the edge of the weld
reinforcement are properly tempered.
Post-Weld Bake. A post-weld bake operation at 500F 50F (232C to 288C) for a
minimum of two hours is required for welds made with the SMAW and FCAW processes. This step is implemented to ensure that hydrogen evacuation from the
weldment is complete. The post-weld bake must commence after welding and without
permitting the weldment to cool below the minimum preheat temperature.
14.5.2.2 Interim and Final NDE
Interim NDE is not required or routinely performed unless cracking, fusion, or other problems are suspected. When the repair is finished and the component cools to room temperature, MT or PT, as a minimum, must be performed. On repairs with a thickness greater than
3/8 inch (9.5 mm) or on welds that originally required radiographic testing (RT), re-testing
with RT is normally required by code.
14-14

14.5.2.3 Documentation
Documentation varies, depending upon the extent of the repair and local jurisdictional
requirements, but the following would typically be required:
Welding procedure and welder performance qualification records
Weld filler metal information
Repair location information/maps
Weld history record (data sheet, form to record information, and so on)
NDE results
Certificate of authorization, R-stamp
Code data reports
14-15

15
INSPECTION AND TESTING METHODS
15.1
Nondestructive Examination
Nondestructive examination (NDE), as applicable to valves, refers to the following

types of inspection/examination techniques:
Volumetric examination
Radiographic testing (RT)
Ultrasonic testing (UT)
Surface examination
Liquid penetrant testing (LP or PT)
Magnetic particle testing (MP or MT)
Visual examination
As one might infer from the names of the technique categories:
Volumetric techniques provide information about the entire volume of the part being
examined and can detect internal flaws and defects, although there are limits on the
thickness of parts that can be successfully internally examined by these methods.
Surface techniques provide information only about the surface of the part being
examined (but can detect surface flaws and defects that cannot be easily seen without the use of these techniques).
Visual examination consists of looking at the surface of the part being examined
without the benefit of additional surface examination techniques.
The requirements for what types of NDE must be done for a given part is a function of
its size, function, product form, material, applicable design code, and safety classification. These requirements are given in or invoked by the applicable design code. As
discussed in Section 2, this is ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III for
nuclear safety-related valves and ANSI B16.34 for most other valves.
The American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and the American Society of
Mechanical Engineers (ASME) have developed several standards and recommended
15-1

practices for each of the inspection methods listed above. Table 15-1 lists the applicable
standards according to number and title for each NDE method.
Table 15-1
ASTM and ASME Standards for Nondestructive Examination Methods
Liquid Penetrant Testing
ASTM E 165
ASTM E 270
ASTM E 433
ASME Section V
Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Inspection Method

Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Liquid Penetrant Inspection
Standard Reference Photographs for Liquid Penetrant Inspection
Article 6
Magnetic Particle Testing

ASTM E 709
ASTM E 269
ASME Section V
Standard Recommended Practice for Magnetic Particle Examination

Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Magnetic Particle Examination
Article 7
Radiographic Testing
ASTM E 94
ASTM E 142
ASTM E 586
ASME Section V
Standard Practice for Radiographic Testing

Standard Method for Controlling Quality of Radiographic Testing
Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Gamma and X Radiography
Article 2
Ultrasonic Testing
ASTM E 500
ASTM E 428
ASTM E 213
ASTM E 164
ASTM E 797
ASTM E 114
ASME Section V
Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Ultrasonic Testing

Standard Recommended Practice for Fabrication and Control of Steel Reference
Blocks Used in Ultrasonic Inspection
Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Inspection of Metal Pipe and Tubing
Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments
Standard Practice for Measuring Thickness by Manual Ultrasonic Pulse-Echo
Contact Method
Standard Recommended Practice for Ultrasonic Pulse-Echo Straight-Beam Testing
by Contact Method
Article 4
Testing Agency Qualification

ASTM E 543
Standard Practice for Determining the Qualification of Nondestructive Testing Agencies
After the requirements for the NDE that must be done are determined as discussed above,
the rules for how to perform the examinations and the acceptance criteria are given by
Section V of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Nondestructive Examination.
Both ANSI B16.34 and ASME Section III invoke ASME Section V for this purpose.
Obviously, the most serious defects in valves are cracks. Cracks can initiate from casting defects, weld repair defects, improper design, severe operation, or a combination of
the above. Cracks can also form in otherwise sound material as a result of elevated
stresses.
Most cracking can be detected by a thorough visual inspection of the valve body and
internals. Cracking is most frequently found in hardfaced trim components; however, it
would be prudent to perform a complete inspection to ensure that cracking has not
occurred in other locations. Particular attention should be paid to areas that have been
previously repaired. Additional cracking can occur adjacent to the repaired area or can
initiate as a result of improper repair welds. Although many welds can be located
15-2

visually, it might be necessary to thoroughly clean and etch the area to delineate the
weld. Surface casting defects, such as unfused chaplets or chills, can also be verified by
etching or magnetic particle examination.
Post-repair visual, liquid penetrant, and magnetic particle inspections should be performed to verify a sound weld. Significant repairs should also be inspected using a
volumetric method, such as radiography or ultrasound prior to post-weld stress relieving, in case rework is required. Again, ultrasonic testing should be performed with
caution to avoid misinterpretation of the indications from part geometry.
15.2
Post-Repair Testing
Article IMV-3200 of ASME Section XI states:

When a valve or its control system has been replaced or repaired or has under
gone maintenance that could affect its performance, and prior to the time it is returned to service, it shall be tested to demonstrate that the performance parameters
which could be affected by the replacement, repair, or maintenance are within acceptable limits.
The repair or replacement of valve internals has the potential of binding up a disc,
poppet, or stem so that it would not open and close as designed. As a result, a function
test must be performed to verify the unobstructed operation of the valve.
Prior to performing the exercise test, a final visual inspection of the valve internals should
be performed to check for nicks, gouges, or scratches that might have been caused during
the process of working inside the valve. Also, verify that no foreign materials, such as
grinding dust, metal shavings, or tools, have been left inside the valve.
15.2.1 Exercise Test

Valve exercise is performed with the bonnet bolted to the body. The valve should be
manually stroked to the fully-closed and then to fully-open position. A spring or load
cell device can be used to quantify the force. The disc should travel freely throughout
the stroke. On gate and globe valves, verify that the disc or poppet does not bind in the
guides or against the valve body, and that it seals properly in the in-body seats. The
stem should seat against the bonnet backseat in the fully-retracted position. On check
valves, verify that it is not possible for the disc or swing arm assembly to contact the
valve body except at the design backstop contact points. Also verify that the backstop
contact point is square to the stop.
If the valve exercise test is successful, the bonnet should be torqued to the design specifications, and local leak rate tests (LLRT) performed as presented in ASME/ANSI OM,
Part 10 [75].
15-3

15.3
Blue Check
A blue check is a simple method used to detect surface contact between two seat surfaces. Blue checks are performed on valve seats to determine whether 360 contact is
being made between the disc and seat, and the seating location. Several repair cases
utilizing blue checks are presented in Appendix A.
Blue checks are performed with an oil-based dye commonly referred to as prussianblue. For cases where water is present, a waterproof dye called neolube can be used.
The blue is applied as a very thin coating to the wedge/disc or poppet. The disc is then
placed back in the valve, closed, and then reopened. The line on the wedge/disc or
poppet indicates the areas of contact. An experienced valve technician can look at the
results and determine the amount of maintenance or repair required to obtain a leakfree joint.
15-4

APPENDIX A
Gate Valve Wedge Fitting Techniques

(Courtesy of Jon A. Vanier, EFCO USA, Inc.)
The process of fitting a gate valve wedge (disc) to the in-body seats is a much discussed
and argued topic among valve technicians. Those in the trade with the knowledge to
efficiently produce a proper fit have a tendency to guard their methods closely, leaving
those less experienced to use the dreaded trial and error method of valve repair, often
with time consuming and costly results. Actually, obtaining a proper wedge fit is not a
complicated process. The following principles will serve as a guide. They combine
some simple techniques with common sense to achieve the desired result of a 360
continuous, thin line of contact on both the upstream and downstream sides of the
valve. While nothing replaces hands-on experience, the following theory and principles
will lead to a proper seal.
The most important step is the blue check, which needs to be repeated often. The blue
check is a simple method of detecting surface contact between two seating surfaces. For
this discussion, the blue check will serve as the guide to obtain a proper fit between the
wedge and the in-body seats of the gate valve. Blue checks are performed with an oilbased dye. In cases where excessive water is present, Neolube can be substituted, due
to its water-repellent properties. The importance of the blue check and the ability of the
technician to correctly interpret its meaning cannot be understated. Upon initial valve
disassembly and only after match-marking the wedge orientation, the technician will
obtain an as-found blue check. This blue check, if done properly, will be an indication
of the time, materials, equipment, and person hours needed to ensure a leak-proof
component.
The criteria for ensuring a leak-proof seal is determined by many different variables,
such as system pressure, system function, valve design, and so on. However, as previously stated, a narrow, continuous line of contact on both seating surfaces is desirable.
A look at the theory behind obtaining a leak-proof seal in a gate valve supports a narrow versus wide contact area, regardless of whether the contact is the desired 360. The
sealing force of the wedge to the in-body seats must be a magnitude higher than the
pressure differential across those seats (upstream versus downstream pressure) in order
to maintain a seal. The stem and actuator act in unison to exert the sealing force; the
actuator (manual, motor, or hydraulic) creates the rotational force that determines the
amount of linear force with which the wedge maintains a seal. The stem, via the inclined acme threads, transmits the force of the actuator to the wedge. Actuators are
A-1

chosen according to the valves specific requirements for thrust or torque and for stroke
length or angle. While valve size and type influence the stroke length or angle, the
dynamic effects of flowing fluid and friction are the main factors influencing thrust and
torque. For a gate valve, the main opening force to be overcome by an actuator is the
frictional force on the seat, caused by upstream pressure. In most instances, the actuator has been chosen with regard to the above factors. It is essential that this force not be
exceeded (for example, a pipe wrench should never be used on a valve to aid in closure)
or damage to valve internals could result. The actuator, chosen to exert a specific
amount of force, logically exerts more force on a smaller area (narrow seat) than a larger
area (wide seat). The sealing force of the gate valve will be greater if that force is applied to fewer square inches on the seating area. Thus, a narrow line of contact provides a better seal
For most gate valves, in situ repair is cost-effective. The most prevalent cause of valve
failure is leakage; therefore, most repair work focuses on the seat/wedge seal. The
technician must always attempt reconditioning of the in-body seats first to determine
the cost effectiveness of repairing a valve. In-body seats are attached to the valve body
in one of three waysscrewed, welded, or pressed. Due to the difficulty encountered
in replacing these seats, evaluating their condition and their prospects for reconditioning is crucial. Wedges, on the other hand, are relatively easy to transport, recondition,
or replace, if necessary. While in-body seat replacement might be a viable option, often
complete valve replacement is the only alternative, but skilled valve technicians with
the proper equipment can prevent valve replacement in many instances.
In reconditioning the in-body seats, the focus should be on two primary principles of
gate valve repair. The first principle is to ensure a narrow versus wide seating area as
determined by the blue check method. Generally, a seating area over .125-inch width is
too wide. In that instance, apply a 3 taper to the in-body seats with automatic grinding/lapping equipment. When setting up a grinding/lapping machine to achieve a 3
taper, the grinding discs must be centered perfectly. A recommended method is to
mark the seats with a permanent marker to aid in centering; the technician can adjust
the machine more easily by grinding for a few seconds and then checking the wear on
the marks. Use it as a guide until it is centered. This will bring the seats back in and
ensure the desired narrow contact area.
The second principle in reconditioning gate valve seats is to achieve flat seating surfaces. If the blue check is not a continuous line (broken), the in-body seats, the wedge
face, or both, are not flat . In most instances, it is the in-body seats that are not flat due
to gradual wear and the ring-shaped design. Therefore, after a narrow seat is established, the technician must ensure that the seat is flat. Putting a flat on a narrow seat is
accomplished much faster and with greater ease than on a wider seating surface. Bear
in mind that grinding on a seat widens the seating surface (recall that tapering can
regain a narrow seat) and, if over-grinding occurs, the potential for dropping the
wedge is present. This is a condition in which too much of the in-body seating surface
is reflected on the blue check. Wedge replacement or weld buildup of the wedge faces
are the only options at this pointboth expensive propositions. Over-grinding can be
A-2

avoided by this general rule of thumb: For every .001 inch removed from each seat or
wedge face, the wedge will drop about .010 inch further into the seats. The ultimate
goal is to produce a .062 inch to .126 inch land (flat) on the center of the seat face. The
commonly encountered problem of over-grinding can be avoided through careful
manipulation of air pressure, correct pressure of the grinding discs, and correct grit of
grinding abrasives.
Material used for seating surfaces in gate valves ranges from bronze and brass for low
temperature, low pressure applications to high grade steel (stainless, 13 chrome, nickelchrome, and cobalt-chromium alloys). When hardfacing alloys are used, they are
welded thin and evenly onto a base metal, and then machined to specifications. The
thickness of the hardfacing can lead to minimum tolerance problems. The base metal
behind the hardfacing overlay is shiny in appearance, in contrast with the dull gray
appearance of the stellite. If the seating surfaces appear shiny in some areas and dull in
others after cleaning, hardfacing is missing in the shiny areas. A simple acid etch test
can determine if this is the case. Apply a 95-part ethanol to 5-part nitric acid solution to
the in-body seats (or wedge face); after a few minutes the milder steel (13 chromium)
will appear to oxidize while the stellite hardfacing remains the same. If insufficient
stellite remains on the in-body seats and it is not practical to replace the seats, complete
valve replacement might be necessary. Although a hardfacing weld buildup is possible,
it is usually reserved for wedge faces.
The final step in reconditioning in-body seats to obtain a leak-proof seal is achieving the
proper surface finish. Use a fine grit abrasive (250 grit to 500 grit) and light grinding
pressure to obtain a finish of 16 rms (root mean square) or better.
When the in-body seats have been reconditioned to maintain a leak-proof seal, the
wedge is ready for reconditioning. Do another blue check to redefine the scope of work.
The same principles outlined in working the in-body seats also hold true for the wedge
faces (that is, ensure that the hardfacing material is intact, .001 inch removal of seating
surface results in .010-inch drop in the seat, and so on). When reworking a wedge, keep
in mind that various wedge-types exhibit different characteristics. Solid wedges require
the tightest tolerances and the most patience to fit. Flex wedges will give enough to
compensate for slight differences in fit. Easier still to fit are double-disc and paralleldisc wedges, due to the amount of line-up variance incorporated into the valve design.
Note that removing any more of the seating surface than is absolutely necessary drops
the wedge further into the valve seats and might necessitate an angle change on the
wedge. Askilled technician will usually make three or more cuts to fit a wedge. The
blue check illustrations shown in Figures A-1 through A-5 help clarify the proper machining steps for an efficient wedge fit-up. Although the possible scenarios shown by
blue checks are varied, the concept of machining the wedge angle to attain a fit remains
the same.
A-3

Side A: 360 Blue / Side

Side B: 260 Blue Missing at Toe
Dial in So This Is The

Heaviest Cut Area
Front
Side
Back
SOLUTION: Do Not Machine Side A. Machine Side B, Removing

Metal 180 from Center of Gap Area Using Gauges to Determine The
Amount of Metal to Be Removed.
Figure A-1
Blue Check Illustration
Missing Blue on both Sides at the Same Location. Wedge Needs
Slight Angle Change. Angle Change Can Be Done on One Side or
Both Sides. Use Plastic Gauge, Feeler Gauge or MIC Lead Wire at
Location to Aid in Determining The Amount to Machine of Wedge.
Front
Side
SOLUTION: Machine One Side Amount Indicated
by Gauge to Find Gap in Bluing. Its Much Faster to
Remove Metal from Only One Side. Make Sure
Guide Clearance Will Allow Wedge to Lean.
Figure A-2
A-4
Back

Missing Blue at Toe: Blue Check Shows Continuous Wide Line 270
Around Heel of Wedge Indicating Too Wide of Sears And Improper
Wedge Angle on Each Side.
Blue Too Wide
Reference 180 For

Machine Setup
Missing Blue
*Using Plastic-Gauge or Lead Wire, Find Gap Between Seat/Wedge
Side
Front
Back
Solution: Taper Seats 3 to Narrow Line of Wedge to Seat Contact. Correct

Wedge Angle by Machining 180 Opposite of Missing Blue on Each Side.
Figure A-3
Blue Running Off Heel of Wedge: Wedge Has Fallen Through Valve Seats. Need Wedge
of Larger Thickness. Measure Heel and Toe of Wedge to Reference Size of Wedge Needed.
X
HEEL
TOE
Front
Side
Back
Solution: (1) Machine Wedge to Base Metal And Weld Build-up With Manufacturers
Recommended Wedge Face Material. Easiest to Strip, Weld and Remachine
One Side at a Time to Keep Wedge Angle Close.
(2) Purchase Oversized Wedge Usually 0.050" Larger And Fit New Wedge.
Figure A-4
A-5

Blue Only in Center of Wedge: Wedge too Wide.... This is Found When
Fitting a New or Weld Built-up Wedge.
HEEL
TOE
Front
Side
Back
Solution: Take and Old Wedge Heel and Toe Measurements to Machine
Wedge to Fit Further into Valve. Always Machine Conservatively so as
to Not Remove Too Much.
Figure A-5
Using the blue check, heel and toe measurements (see Figure A-6), and feeler gauge/
plastic gauge measurements (see Figure A-7) as guidelines, determine the wedge angle.
Then, using the above guidelines, rework the wedge in a mill, lathe, or surface grinder
using a dial indicator to remove the least amount of material necessary. Figure A-1
presents a typical wedge fitting case. Side B needs material removed 180 from the gap
in the blue check print to bring in the material at the gap area. Therefore, the dial indicator would be set at .0005 inch at the center of the gap area and + .0035 inch 180 from
the center of the gap area. Plus .003 inch was arrived at because the plastic gauge had a
reading of .004 inch. After machining (if using a single point application), lap or grind
the wedge face to remove any tooling marks. The grit of lapping compound or grinding abrasive should correlate to the roughness of the cut; in general, start with a coarser
grit of 240 and work up to a finer grit of 500. It is important to use good lapping techniques and a flat lapping block. A grinding table (such as the EFCO KS-6), drill press
adapters, and portable gate lapping machines (EFCO, LarsLapp, or Unislip) can achieve
the desired finish at a much faster rate.
A-6

CL
Heel
Typical Gate
Valve Seats
(Toe-Heel)/2=X
X/Face = Sin of Angle
Sin of Angle x 2 = Included Angle
Face
Toe
CL
Figure A-6
Heel and Toe Measurement Parameters
A-7

Gauge for Determining The Included Angle for Gate
Seats. Instrument Must Be Sized in Relation to Valve
Sizes.
CL
Slot
Lock Nut
(Swivel Joint)
Typical
Typical Gate
Valve Seats
CL
Preceision Bevel Protractor
Flat Surface
Included Angle of
Wedge Gauge (Seats)
Figure A-7
Gauges Used to Determine Seat and Wedge Angles
A-8

When a satisfactory blue check is achieved, the technician should reassemble the valve
and perform a final blue check with all valve components present, including the actuator.
For example, gate valves fitted with flex, double-disc, or parallel-wedges might not show
360 on the blue check without the additional force exerted by their respective actuators.
Conversely, in rare instances, a good blue can turn unsatisfactory with this additional
force. The technician must also be aware of other variables that could prevent a satisfactory blue, such as wedge guide clearances or binding. If a 360 blue cannot be achieved
on both sides, the downstream seating surface should be given priority. This seat receives
the system pressure as the wedge is forced downstream. In some instances, the wedge
can be reversed (turned 180 to obtain a good downstream seal).
In summary, the principles outlined facilitate the efficient repair of in-line gate valves:
always recondition the in-body seats first; use the blue check as a guide to material
removal and proper seat contact; taper seats with a 3 relief, then grind seats flat; watch
for loss of hardfacing; apply a fine finish (16 rms or better); fit the wedge in gradually,
using several cuts; and cautious lapping or grinding. Keep in mind that any gate valve
identified as leaking-by will have the full pressure drop from upstream to downstream
occurring at some time across the narrow orifice of the leak, in most cases. Depending
on the system fluid, a leak effects range from relatively minor thermal gradients for
gases to the severely destructive results of hot water, steam, or solids. Ensuring that a
gate valve can maintain a leak-proof seal is time and effort well spent. The alternativecomplete valve replacementis not a cost-effective option.
A-9

APPENDIX B
The data in this appendix is for reference only and in no way constitutes EPRI endorsement of their products or services. There could be other manufacturers/suppliers not
listed here for similar equipment and services.
In Situ Welding Equipment

These companies either manufacture equipment for sale or design and manufacture
equipment especially for their own use. This data is based on a 1994 survey of valve
manufacturers, repair vendors, and utilities, and might unintentionally exclude companies of which the authors were unaware. Please refer to the corresponding numbers
shown on the address list.
Bore welding (pressure seal and globe valve seats)
1, 2, 4, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 17, and 18
Gate valve seat face welding
1, 14, 16, and 17
Globe valve seat ring welding
1, 2, 14, 16, and 17
Orbital pipe welding
1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17
NOTES:
1. Gate includes tilting disc check valves.
2. Globe includes control, lift check, Y-type, stop, and angle valves.
1. Anchor/Darling Valve Company
701 First Street
P.O. Box 3428
Williamsport, PA 17701
717/327-4800
717/327-4805 FAX
2. Arc Machines, Incorporated
10280 Glenoaks Boulevard
Pacolma, CA 91331
818/896-9556
818/890-3724 FAX
B-1

3. Atwood & Morrill Company

385 Canal Street
Salem, MA 01970
508/744-5690
508/741-3626 FAX
4. BW/IP International, Incorporated
Pump Division
2300 East Vernon Avenue
Vernon, CA 90058
213/589-6171
213/589-2080 FAX
5. Climax Portable Machine Tools
2712 East Second Street
P.O. Box 230
Newberg, OR 97132
503/538-2185
503/538-7600 FAX
6. Continental Field Systems, Incorporated
23 Westgate Boulevard
Savannah, GA 31405
912/232-8121
912/232-0116 FAX
7. Dimetrics
P.O. Box 339
Davidson, NC 28036
704/892-8872
704/892-4713 FAX
8. E. H. Wachs
Wachs Technical Service
100 Shepard Street
Wheeling, IL 60090
847/537-8800
847/520-1168 FAX
9. Edward Valves, Incorporated
1900 South Saunders Street
Raleigh, NC 27603
919/831-3311
919/831-3369 FAX
10. EFCO USA, Incorporated
1611 Telegraph Avenue, Suite 1600
Oakland, CA 94612
510/272-0481
800/EFCO USA
510/272-0483 FAX
B-2

11. Framatome
3315 Old Forest Road
P.O. Box 10935
Lynchburg, VA 24506-0935
804/832-3473
804/832-3177 FAX
12. GE Nuclear Energy
640 Freedom Business Court
King of Prussia, PA 19406
610/992-6394
13. Magnatech, Incorporated
Bradley Park
East Granby, CT 06026
203/653-2573
203/653-0486 FAX
14. PCI Energy Services
One Energy Drive
P.O. Box 3000
Lake Bluff, IL 60044
847/680-8100
847/362-6441 FAX
15. Tri Tool, Incorporated
3806 Security Park Drive
Rancho Cordova, CA 95742-6990
916/351-0144
800/345-5015
916/351-0372 FAX
16. VR-TESCO
803 Albion Avenue
Schaumburg, IL 60193
800/248-2082
847/893-2433 FAX
17. Welding Services
2225 Skyland Court
Norcross, GA 30071
770/452-0005
770/729-8242 FAX
18. Westinghouse/Elliott Valve
5436 Clay Street
Houston, TX 77023
713/926-8318
B-3
EPRI Proprietary Licensed Material

APPENDIX C
In Situ Valve Machining Equipment

These companies either manufacture equipment for sale or design and manufacture
equipment especially for their own use. This data is based on a 1994 survey of valve
manufacturers, repair vendors, and utilities, and might unintentionally exclude companies of which the authors were unaware. Please refer to the corresponding numbers
shown on the address list.
Boring bars (pressure seal bores, globe valve seats, hinge pin bores)
1, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 17, and 18
Boring bars (gate valve seat facing)
1, 4, 5, 14, and 16
Boring bars (gate valve seat removal)
1, 4, 5, and 16
Flange facers
1, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, and 17
Lapping machines
10
Milling machines
1, 5, 6, 14, and 17
NOTES:
1. Gate includes tilting disc check valves.
2. Globe includes control, lift check, Y-type, stop, and angle valves.
C-1

1. Anchor/Darling Valve Company

701 First Street
P.O. Box 3428
717/327-4800
717/327-4805 FAX
2. Arc Machines, Incorporated
10280 Glenoaks Boulevard
Pacolma, CA 91331
818/896-9556
818/890-3724 FAX
3. Atwood & Morrill Company
385 Canal Street
Salem, MA 01970
508/744-5690
508/741-3626 FAX
4. BW/IP International, Incorporated
Pump Division
Vernon, CA 90058
213/589-6171
213/589-2080 FAX
5. Climax Portable Machine Tools
2712 East Second Street
P.O. Box 230
Newberg, OR 97132
503/538-2185
503/538-7600 FAX
6. Continental Field Systems, Incorporated
Savannah, GA 31405
912/232-8121
912/232-0116 FAX
7. Dimetrics
P.O. Box 339
Davidson, NC 28036
704/892-8872
704/892-4713 FAX
8. E. H. Wachs
Wachs Technical Service
100 Shepard Street
Wheeling, IL 60090
847/537-8800
847/520-1168 FAX
C-2
EPRI Proprietary Licensed Material

9. Edward Valves, Incorporated

Raleigh, NC 27603
919/831-3311
919/831-3369 FAX
10. EFCO USA, Incorporated
1611 Telegraph Avenue, Suite 1600
Oakland, CA 94612
510/272-0481
800/EFCO USA
510/272-0483 FAX
11. Framatome
3315 Old Forest Road
P.O. Box 10935
Lynchburg, VA 24506-0935
804/832-3473
804/832-3177 FAX
12. GE Nuclear Energy
610/992-6394
13. Magnatech, Incorporated
Bradley Park
East Granby, CT 06026
203/653-2573
203/653-0486 FAX
14. PCI Energy Services
One Energy Drive
P.O. Box 3000
847/680-8100
847/362-6441 FAX
15. Tri Tool, Incorporated
3806 Security Park Drive
Rancho Cordova, CA 95742-6990
916/351-0144
800/345-5015
916/351-0372 FAX
16. VR-TESCO
803 Albion Avenue
800/248-2082
847/893-2433 FAX
C-3

17. Welding Services

2225 Skyland Court
Norcross, GA 30071
770/452-0005
770/729-8242 FAX
18. Westinghouse/Elliott Valve
5436 Clay Street
Houston, TX 77023
713/926-8318
C-4

APPENDIX D
Valve Manufacturers
Anchor/Darling Valve Company
701 First Street
P.O. Box 3428
717/327-4800
717/327-4805 FAX
Contact: Frank Velez
Atwood & Morrill Company
385 Canal Street
Salem, MA 01970
508/744-5690
508/741-3626 FAX
Contact: Jeff LeBlanc
BW/IP International, Incorporated
Pump Division
Vernon, CA 90058
213/589-6171
213/589-2080 FAX
Contact: Matt Sweeny
Circle Seal Controls, Incorporated
2301 Wardlow Road
Corona, CA 91720
909/277-6200
909/277-6201 FAX
Control Components
22591-T Avenida Empress
Rancho Santo Margarita, CA 92688
714/858-1877
714/858-1878 FAX
D-1

Conval, Incorporated
265 Field Road
Somers, CT 06071-1049
203/749-0761
203/749-2680 FAX
Contact: Michael Farnsworth
Copes-Vulcan, Incorporated
Vulcan Building (Erie County)
Lake City, PA 16423
814/774-1500
814/774-1681 or 774-2646 FAX
Crane ValvesRomeoville, Ill.
104 North Chicago Street
Joliet, IL 60431
815/727-2600
815/727-4246 FAX
Contact: John Carlson
Crosby Valve & Gage Company
43 Kendrick Street
P.O. Box 308
Wrentham, MA 02093
508/384-3121
508/384-8675 FAX
DeZurik
250 Riverside Avenue
Sartell, MN 56377
Contact: Jack Herold
Raleigh, NC 27603
919/831-3311
919/831-3369 FAX
Contact: Lemar Green
Fisher Controls
205 South Center Street
P.O. Box 190
Marshalltown, IA 50158
515/754-3011
515/754-2830 FAX
Contact: Larry Fleetwood
D-2

Hammel Dahl, Jamesbury Controls Company

175R Post Road
Warwick, RI 02888
401/781-6200
401/781-6204 FAX
Henry Vogt Machine Company, Incorporated
P.O. Box 1918
Louisville, KY 40201
502/634-1500
502/637-7344 FAX
Kerotest Manufacturer Corporation
2525-T Liberty Avenue
Pittsburgh, PA 15222
412/392-4300
412/392-4251 FAX
Leslie Controls, Incorporated
12503 Telecom Drive
Tampa, FL 33637
800/253-7543
813/978-0984 FAX
Lunkenheimer Company
Beekman Street at Waverly Avenue
Cincinnati, OH 45214
513/921-3400
513/244-5228 FAX
Manager, Valves and Controls
Sulzer USA, Incorporated
200 Park Avenue
New York, NY 10166
Contact: Jean-Claude Braendle
Masoneilan Valve Company
85 Bodwell Street
Avon, MA 02322
508/941-5421
Contact: Larry Swartz
Masoneilan-Dresser
1040 South Vail Avenue
Montebello, CA 90640
213/723-9351
Contact: Pat Patnaik
D-3

Neles-Jamesbury, Incorporated, Northeast Service Center

1 Polito Drive
Shrewsbury, MA 01545
800/255-2669
Contact: Tom Hughes
Target Rock Corporation
1966 Broad Hollow Road
East Farmingdale, NY 11735
516/293-3800
Contact: Jim White
Teledyne Fluid Systems, Farris EngineeringN.J.
400 Commercial Avenue
Palisades Park, NJ 07650
201/944-6300
Contact: Paul Papa
The William Powell Company
Spring Grove at Draper
Cincinnati, OH 45214
513/852-2000
513/852-2997 FAX
VALCOR Engineering Corporation
4 Lawrence Road
Springfield, NJ 07081
201/467-8400
800/241-2159
201/467-8382 FAX
Velan, Incorporated
550 McArthur Street
Laurent, Quebec
Canada H4T 1X8
514/748-7743
Contact: Zoltan Palko
Walworth Company
10190-T Harwin Drive
Houston, TX 77036
713/777-7788
713/981-1246 FAX
WKM, Cooper Industry, Incorporated
P.O. Box 4446
Houston, TX 77251
713/939-2211 (Division Headquarters)
713/939-2620 FAX
D-4

Contact: Dean Hannam

713/499-8511 (Cooper Cameron Valves)
713/499-5213 FAX
YARWAY Corporation
480 Norristown Road
Blue Bell, PA 19422
800/220-8070
215/825-1235 FAX
D-5

APPENDIX E
In Situ Valve Repair Vendors

ABB CE Nuclear Power
Department 9428-1206
1000 Prospect Hill Road
Windsor, CT 06095
Contact: Edward Kurdziel
Anchor/Darling Valve Company
701 First Street
P.O. Box 3428
717/327-4800
717/327-4805 FAX
Contact: Frank Velez
Atlantic Valve Corporation
Turnpike Industrial Park
Westfield, MA 01085
413/568-3366
Contact: Joseph L. Casey
Atwood & Morrill Company
385 Canal Street
Salem, MA 01970
508/744-5690
508/741-3626 FAX
Contact: Jeff LeBlanc
Babcock & Wilcox Nuclear Services
3110 Odd Fellows Road
Lynchburg, VA 24506
Contact: Terry L. Jamerson
E-1

BW/IP International, Incorporated

Pump Division
Vernon, CA 90058
213/589-6171
213/589-2080 FAX
Contact: Matt Sweeny
Carter Chambers Supply, IncorporatedMonroe, La.
P.O. Box 486
Monroe, LA 71211
800/256-4671
Contact: Grant Walker
Chalmers & Kubeck, Incorporated
150 Commerce Drive
Aston, PA 19014
215/494-7030
Contact: Joe OShea
Continental Field Systems, Incorporated
Savannah, GA 31405
912/232-8121
912/232-0116 FAX
Contact: Charles Blakewood
Conval, Incorporated
265 Field Road
Somers, CT 06071-1049
203/749-0761
203/749-2680 FAX
Contact: Michael Farnsworth
Copes, Vulcan, IncorporatedPa.
Martin & Rice Avenue
P.O. Box 577
Lake City, PA 16423
800/756-4456
Contact: Joseph Dougher
Crane ValvesRomeoville, Ill.
104 North Chicago Street
Joliet, IL 60431
815/727-2600
815/727-4246 FAX
Contact: John Carlson
E-2

DeZurik
Sartell, MN 56377
Raleigh, NC 27603
919/831-3311
919/831-3369 FAX
Contact: Lemar Green
GE Nuclear Energy
610/992-6394
Contact: Bill Fingrudt
Groth Corporation
1202 Hahlo Street
P.O. Box 15293
Houston, TX 77220-5293
713/675-6151
Contact: Robert L. Wood
Henry Vogt Machine Company
P.O. Box 1918
Louisville, KY 40201-1918
502/634-1500
Contact: Guy A. Jolly
In-Place Machining Company
1929 North Buffum Street
Milwaukee, WI 53212
414/562-2000
414/265-1000 FAX
Contact: Clifford G. Redwine, Jr.
Leslie Controls, IncorporatedCalif.
11144 Business Circle
Cerritos, CA 90701
213/860-0463
Contact: Dave English
Masoneilan Valve Company
85 Bodwell Street
Avon, MA 02322
508/941-5421
Contact: Larry Swartz
E-3

PCI Energy Services

One Energy Drive
P.O. Box 3000
Contact: John Polacheck
Dezurik
Sartell, MN 56377
Velan, Incorporated
550 McArthur Street
St. Laurent, Quebec
Canada H4T 1X8
514/748-7743
Contact: Zoltan Palko
VR-TESCO
803 Albion Avenue
800/248-2082
708/893-2433 FAX
Welding Services
2225 Skyland Court
Norcross, GA 30071
Contact: Pedro Amador
Westinghouse Electric Corporation
4400 Alafaya Trail, MC 200
Orlando, FL 32826-2399
Contact: Kevin P. Hazel
Westinghouse/Elliott Valve
5436 Clay Street
Houston, TX 77023
713/926-8318
Contact: Colbert Pearson
Westinghouse-Movats
2825 Cobb International Avenue
Kennesaw, GA 30144
404/424-6343
404/429-4753 FAX
Contact: Wayne Prokop
E-4

APPENDIX F
REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL BIBLIOGRAPHY
1.
Key Valves Prioritization Study. Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA:
October 1984. Report NP-3611.
2.
Valve Maintenance Equipment Reference Guide. EPRI/Maintenance Equipment Application Center, Charlotte, NC: 1988.
3.
Good Bolting Practices, A Reference Manual for Nuclear Power Plant Maintenance Personnel, Volume 1: Large Bolt Manual. Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto,
CA: May 1987. Report NP-5067.
4.
On-line Leak Sealing, A Guide for Nuclear Power Plant Maintenance Personnel. Electric
Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA: July 1989. Report NP-6523-D.
5.
Improvements in Motor-Operated Valves. Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto,

CA: November 1985. Report NP-4254, Project 2232-2, Interim Report.
6.
Main Feedwater Isolation Valve Maintenance Guide. Electric Power Research Institute,
Palo Alto, CA: May 1991. Report NP-7212, Project 2814-27, Final Report.
7.
Main Steam Isolation Valve Maintenance Guide. Electric Power Research Institute,
Palo Alto, CA: May 1991. Report NP-7211, Project 2814-27, Final Report.
8.
Guide for the Applications and Use of Valves in Power Plant Systems. Electric Power
Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA: August 1990. Report NP-6516. (This document
will be revised and reissued as EPRI TR-105852v1, 1997.)
9.
Check Valve Maintenance Guide. Nuclear Maintenance Applications Center, Charlotte, NC: August 1995. Report TR-100857.
10. NOREM Applications Guidelines, Procedures for GTA and PTA Welding of NOREM
Cobalt-Free Alloys. Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA: November 1995.
Report TR-105816.
11. In Situ Valve Repair Capabilities Survey. Electric Power Research Institute Repair and
Replacement Applications Center, Charlotte, NC: August 1995.
12. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sections II, III, IX, and XI; 1995 Edition, The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers, New York, NY.
F-1

13. Anchor/Darling Valve Seminar. Anchor/Darling Valve Company, Albuquerque,

NM: 1995.
14. Maintenance Manual for Flexible Wedge-Type Gate Valves. Anchor/Darling Valve
Company.
15. Maintenance Manual for Double Disc-Type Gate Valves. Anchor/Darling Valve Company.
16. Maintenance Manual for 2-1/224 Forged Pressure Seal Gate, Globe and Check Valves.
Velan.
17. Equiwedge Gate Valve Maintenance Manual. Edward Valves, Incorporated.
18. Maintenance Manual for Edward Pressure-Seal Valves. Edward Valves, Incorporated.
19. Maintenance Manual for Globe Valves. Anchor/Darling Valve Company,
Williamsport, PA: January 1988.
20. Application Guide for Check Valves in Nuclear Power Plants, Revision 1. Electric Power
Research Institute, Nuclear Maintenance Applications Center, Charlotte, NC: June
1993. Report NP-5479.
21. Maintenance Manual for Swing Check Valves. Anchor/Darling Valve Company,
Williamsport, PA: January 1988.
22. State-of-the-Art Weld Repair Technology for High Temperature and Pressure Parts Repair
Guideline. Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA: June 1994. Report TR103592.
23. Model 1572 MSIV Repair Machine. Climax Portable Machine Tools, Incorporated,
Newberg, OR: August 1987.
24. Maintenance Manual for Tilting Disc Check Valves. Anchor/Darling Valve Company,
Williamsport, PA: December 1987.
25. Gate Valve Wedge Fitting Techniques. EFCO USA, Incorporated
26. Fermi II Approach to Cobalt Reduction in Valves. PCI Energy Services, Lake Bluff, IL.
27. Maintenance and Repair Welding in Power Plants V, presented at the American
Welding Society and Electric Power Research Institute Jointly Sponsored Conference, Orlando, FL (November 30December 2, 1994).
28. Cobalt Reduction Seminar. Anchor/Darling Valve Company, May 1993.
29. Cobalt Reduction Guidelines, Revision 1. Electric Power Research Institute.
F-2

30. Erik Oberg, et al. Machinerys Handbook, 22nd Revised Edition. Industrial Press
Incorporated, New York, NY 1984.
31. Welding Terms and Definitions. AWS A3.0-80.
32. H. B. Cary. Modern Welding Technology, 2nd Edition. Prentice Hall, 1989.
33. The Procedure Handbook of Arc Welding. The Lincoln Electric Company, Cleveland,
OH: 1973.
34. BWR Recirculation Piping System Replacement, Final Report, Volumes 13. J. A. Jones
Applied Research Company, June 1990. Report NP-6723-D.
35. The Procedure Handbook of Welding, 12th Edition. The Lincoln Electric Company,
1973.
36. Welding and Brazing, Metals Handbook, Volume 6, 9th Edition. The American
Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio.
37. AWS A5.01-93, Filler Metal Procurement Guidelines.
38. AWS A5.1-91, Specification for Covered Carbon Steel Arc Welding Electrodes.
39. AWS A5.4-92, Specification for Covered Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and
Chromium-Nickel Steel Welding Electrodes.
40. AWS A5.5-96, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes.
41. AWS A5.9-93, Specification for Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and ChromiumNickel Steel Bare and Composite Metal-Cored and Stranded Welding Electrodes
and Welding Rods.
42. AWS A5.11-90, Specification for Nickel and Nickel Alloy Covered Welding Electrodes.
43. AWS A5.14-89, Specification for Nickel and Nickel Alloy Bare Welding Electrodes
and Rods.
44. AWS A5.17-89, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding.
45. AWS A5.18-93, Specification for Carbon Steel Filler Metals for Gas-Shielded Arc
Welding.
46. AWS A5.20-95, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux-Cored Arc
Welding.
F-3

47. AWS A5.22-95, Specification for Flux-Cored Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and

Chromium-Nickel Steel Electrodes.
48. AWS A5.23-90, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding.
49. AWS A5.28-79, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Filler Metals for Gas-Shielded
Arc Welding.
50. AWS A5.29-80, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux-Cored Arc
Welding.
51. AWS A5.30-79, Specification for Consumable Inserts.
52. AWS Filler Metal Comparison Chart, 1989.
53. Guidelines on Fossil Boiler Field Welding Practices. Electric Power Research Institute,
Palo Alto, CA: November 1991. Research Project 2504-1, Final Report.
54. AWS D10.4-86, Recommended Practices for Welding Austenitic Chromium Nickel
Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing.
55. AWS D10.8-86, Recommended Practices for Welding Chromium-Molybdenum
Steel Piping and Tubing.
56. ASME/ANSI B31.1, ASME Code for Pressure Piping, Power Piping. 1995 Edition.
57. Stoody Corporation Product Information Guide.
58. AWS D10.11-87, Recommended Practices for Root Pass Welding of Pipe Without
Backing.
59. AWS D10.12-89, Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe.
NOTE: The referenced American Welding Society (AWS) standards are also approved by
the American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
60. AWS D1.1-92, Structural Welding CodeSteel, The American Welding Society,
Miami, FL.
61. ANSI/NB-23, A Manual for Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspection. National Board
Inspection Code, 1995 Edition.
62. AWS A3.0-89, Standard Welding Terms and Definitions.
F-4

63. Welding & Fabricating Data Book 1990/91, Welding Design & Fabricating.
64. Guidelines for the Repair/Replacement Welding of Nuclear Service Water Systems. EPRI
NDE Center, Charlotte, NC: July 1992. Report TR-100386.
65. Hydro-Purge. Coast Engineering Laboratories, Cardena, CA.
66. AWS D10.10-90, Recommended Practices for Local Heat Treatment of Welds in
Piping and Tubing.
67. R. Viswanathan. World Repair of Aged PipingA Review of International Experience.
Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA: 1995. Report RP-3484-01, Draft
Report.
68. Temperbead Welding Repair of Low-Alloy Pressure Vessel Steels: Guidelines. Electric
Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA: December 1993. Report TR-103354,
Project C104-02, Final Report.
69. W. J. Childs, S. J. Findlan, and D. W. Gandy. Repair Welding of SA-508 Cl. 2 Steel
Utilizing the 3-Layer Temperbead Approach, Fatigue, Fracture, & Risk. PVPVoume 215.
70. W. J. Childs, S. J. Findlan, D. W. Gandy, and R. E. Smith. A Better Way to Control
GTA Weld Dilution, Welding Design & Fabrication. August 1992.
71. W. J. Childs, S. J. Findlan, D. W. Gandy, and R. E. Smith. Pressure-Vessel Steel
Weld-Repair with CLTT, Welding Design & Fabrication. September 1992.
72. C. Lundin and M. Prager, Repair and Fabrication Practices for 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo
Steel, Second International Conference on Interaction of Steels with Hydrogen in
Petroleum Industry Pressure Vessel and Pipeline Service, Vienna, Austria (October
1921, 1994).
73. P. P. Holz. Half-Bead Weld Repairs for Inservice Applications. Oak Ridge National Laboratory, 1978.
74. L. Friedman. EWI/TWI Controlled Deposition Repair Welding Procedure for
1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo and 2-1/4Cr-1Mo Steels. PVRC Weld Repair Workshop, San
Diego, CA (January 31February 1, 1996).
75. ANSI/ASME S/G OM-10, Inservice Testing of Valves in Light-Water Reactor Power
Plants, 1988.
F-5

Additional Bibliography
1.
General Design Criteria 54 through 57 of 10 CFR Part 50:

GDC 54: Piping systems penetrating containment
GDC 55: Reactor coolant pressure boundary penetrating containment
GDC 56: Primary containment isolation
GDC 57: Closed system isolation valves
2.
Code of Federal Regulations, 10 CFR 50 Appendix J, Primary Reactor Containment Leakage Testing for Water-Cooled Power Reactors, 1973, as amended in
1976, 1980, 1986, 1988, and 1992.
3.
Code of Federal Regulations, 10 CFR 50.65, Requirement for Monitoring the Effectiveness of Maintenance at Nuclear Power Plants, 1991.
4.
ANSI B16.10, Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves.
5.
ANSI B16.11, Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding, and Threaded.
6.
ANSI B16.25, Butt-Welding Ends.
7.
ANSI B16.34, ValvesFlanged and Butt-welding End.
8.
ANSI B16.5, Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
9.
ANSI B16.9, Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt-welding Fittings.
10. ANSI B2.1, Pipe Threads.

11. ANSI N18.2/ANS 51.8, Nuclear Safety Criteria for the Design of Stationary Pressurized
Water Reactor Plants. 1973.
12. ANSI N271-1976/ANS-56.2-1984, Containment Isolation Provisions for Fluid Systems.
13. ANSI/ANS N18.2a, Supplement to N18.2. 1975.
14. ANSI/ANS-51.1, Nuclear Safety Criteria for the Design of Stationary Pressurized Water
Reactor Plants. 1983, revised 1988.
15. ANSI/ANS-52.1, Nuclear Safety Criteria for the Design of Stationary Boiling Water
Reactor Plants. 1983.
16. ANSI/ANS-58.1, Nuclear Safety Design Criteria for Light Water Reactors.
17. ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V, Nondestructive Examination. 1995.
F-6

18. ANSI/ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.1, Power Piping. 1995.
19. ANSI/ASME OM (Code)1990, Code for Operation and Maintenance of Nuclear
Power Plants. 1990.
20. ANSI/ASME OM (Standard)1987, Operation and Maintenance of Nuclear Power
Plants, 1987.
21. ANSI/ASME Oma-1988, Addendum to ASME/ANSI OM-1987. 1988.
22. ANSI/ASME Omc-1990, Addendum to ASME/ANSI OM-1987. 1990.
23. API 598, Valve Inspection and Test.
24. ASM Handbook, American Society for Metals, Volume 6. Ohio 1983.
25. ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code, Section III Code Case N62, Internal and
External Valve Items, Division 1, Classes 1, 2, and 3.
26. ASTM E 114, Standard Recommended Practice for Ultrasonic Pulse-Echo StraightBeam Testing by Contact Method.
27. ASTM E 142, Standard Method for Controlling Quality of Radiographic Testing.
28. ASTM E 164, Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of
Weldments.
29. ASTM E 165, Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Inspection Method.
30. ASTM E 213, Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Inspection of Metal Pipe and Tubing.
31. ASTM E 269, Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Magnetic Particle Examination.
32. ASTM E 270, Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Liquid Penetrant Inspection.
33. ASTM E 428, Standard Recommended Practice for Fabrication and Control of Steel
Reference Blocks Used in Ultrasonic Inspection.
34. ASTM E 433, Standard Reference Photographs for Liquid Penetrant Inspection.
35. ASTM E 500, Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Ultrasonic Testing.
36. ASTM E 543, Standard Practice for Determining the Qualification of Nondestructive Testing Agencies.
F-7

37. ASTM E 586, Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Gamma and X Radiography.
38. ASTM E 709, Standard Recommended Practice for Magnetic Particle Examination.
39. ASTM E 797, Standard Practice for Measuring Thickness by Manual Ultrasonic
Pulse-Echo Contact Method.
40. ASTM E 94, Standard Practice for Radiographic Testing.
41. AWWA C510, Standard for Double Check Valve Backflow-Prevention Assembly,
1993.
42. Bergmann, C. A. and E. I. Landerman. Cobalt Release from PWR Valves, Electric
Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA: July 1984. Report NP-3445.
43. Bergmann, C. A. and L. A. Lamantia. Valve Performance in PWR Chemical and Volume Control Systems, Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA: June 1988.
Report NP-5796.
44. Cobalt Release from PWR Valves, Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA:
July 1984. Report NP-3445.
45. Dihne, Bertil (Vattenfall). Valve Seat Repair: Stellite Replaced with Inconel, April 22,
1988, forwarded by letter to EPRI April 27, 1988.
46. A Guide for Developing Preventive Maintenance Programs in Electric Power Plants.
Electric Power Research Institute, 1984. Report NP-3416.
47. Good Bolting Practices: A Reference Manual for Nuclear Power Plant Maintenance Personnel, Volume 2: Small Bolts and Threaded Fasteners. Electric Power Research Institute, 1990. Report NP-5067.
48. Valve Stem Packing Improvements. Electric Power Research Institute, 1988. Report
NP-5697.
49. Guide for the Application and Use of Valves in Power Plant Systems. Electric Power
Research Institute, 1990. Report NP-6516.
50. Welding of NOREM Iron-base Hardfacing Alloy Wire Products: Procedures for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding. Electric Power Research Institute, 1992. Report TR-101094.
51. Application Guidelines for Check Valves in Nuclear Power Plants, Electric Power Research Institute/NMAC, 1993. Report NP-5479 Revision 1.
52. Heard, D. B. and R. J. Freeman. Cobalt Contamination Resulting from Valve Maintenance,
Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA: August 1983. Report NP-3220.
F-8

53. In Situ Application of Hardfacing Materials in Main Steam Isolation Valves, Electric
Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA: March 1985. Report NP-3926.
54. INPO Good Practice MA-305 (INPO 87-028), Postmaintenance Testing, 1987.
55. INPO Good Practice MA-319 (INPO 92-014), Preventive Maintenance Program
Enhancements, 1992.
56. INPO SOER 86-03, Check Valve Failures or Degradation, 1986.
57. Maintenance of Pressure Seal Bonnets. Fifth Valve Technology Symposium,
Albuquerque, NM, June 1995.
58. Moore, T., et al., The Long View for Nuclear Plant Maintenance, EPRI Journal.
(October/November 1991).
59. MSS SP6, Standard Finish for Contact Faces of Pipe Flanges and Connecting-End
Flanges of Valves and Fittings.
60. MSS SP25, Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions.
61. MSS SP44, Steel Pipe Line Flanges (26 inches and larger).
62. MSS SP53, Quality Standard for Steel Castings and Forgings for Valves, Flanges
and Fittings, and Other Piping ComponentsMagnetic Particle Examination
Method.
63. MSS SP54, Quality Standard for Steel Castings for Valves, Flanges and Fittings
and Other Piping ComponentsRadiographic Examination Method.
64. MSS SP55, Quality Standards for Steel CastingsVisual Methods.
65. MSS SP61, Pressure Testing of Steel Valves.
66. MSS-SP66, Pressure Temperature Ratings for Steel Valves.
67. MSS-SP67, Butterfly Valves.
68. MSS-SP70, Cast Iron Gate Valves.
69. MSS-SP71, Cast Iron Check Valves.
70. MSS-SP72, Ball Valves.
71. MSS-SP80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves.
72. MSS SP84, Steel ValvesSocket Welding and Threaded Ends.
73. MSS-SP85, Bronze Valves.
F-9

74. Nolin, L. Cobalt Replacement in Primary Valves, Virginia Power, Electric Power
Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA: August 1, 1988. Report NP-1284.
75. Ocken, H., Project Manager, Implementing Cobalt-Free Hardfacing Technology,
In Seminar Proceedings, Charlotte, NC, Electric Power Research Institute, Palo
Alto, CA (April 18, 1989).
76. USNRC GL 86-17, Technical Findings Related to Generic Issue C-8; BWR MSIV
Leakage and Leakage Treatment Methods.
77. USNRC GL 87-06, Testing of Pressure Isolation Valves.
78. USNRC IE Circular 78-15, Tilting-Disc Check Valve Failed to Close.
79. USNRC IE Information Notice 80-16, Shaft Seal Packing in Main Steam Swing Disc
and Isolation Valves.
80. USNRC IE Information Notice 80-29, Broken Studs on Terry Turbine Steam Inlet
Flange.
81. USNRC IE Information Notice 80-41, Failure of Swing Check Valves in the Decay
Heat Removal System at Davis-Besse Unit No. 1.
82. USNRC IE Information Notice 82-20, Check Valve Problems.
83. USNRC IE Information Notice 82-26, RCIC and HPCI Turbine Exhaust Check
Valve Failures.
84. USNRC IE Information Notice 84-74, Isolation of Reactor Coolant System From
Low-Pressure Systems Outside Containment.
85. USNRC IE Information Notice 86-01, Failure of Main Feedwater Check Valves
Causes Loss of Feedwater System Integrity and Water Hammer Damage.
86. USNRC IE Information Notice 86-57, Operating Problems with Solenoid-Operated
Valves at Nuclear Power Plants.
87. USNRC IE Information Notice 88-85, Broken Retaining Block Studs on Anchor
Darling Check Valves.
88. USNRC IE Information Notice 89-62, Malfunction of Borg-Warner Pressure Seal
Bonnet Check Valves Caused by Vertical Misalignment of Disc.
89. USNRC IE Information Notice 90-79, Failure of Main Steam Isolator Check Valves
Resulting in Disc Separation.
90. USNRC IE Information Notice 95-14, Susceptibility of Containment Sump Recirculation Gate Valves to Pressure Locking.
F-10

91. USNRC NUREG 1482, Guidelines for Inservice Testing at Nuclear Power Plants,
Draft for Comment published 1993.
92. USNRC NUREG/CR-4302 (ORNL 6193), Aging and Service Wear of Check Valves
Used in Engineered Safety-Feature Systems of Nuclear Power Plants, 1991.
93. USNRC RG 1.84, Code Case Acceptability, ASME III Design and Fabrication.
94. USNRC RG 1.85, Code Case Acceptability, ASME III Material.
95. USNRC SRP 3.9.6, Inservice Testing of Pumps and Valves.
96. USNRC TI 2515/114, Inspection Requirements for Generic Letter 89-04, Acceptable Inservice Inspection Programs, 1992.
97. Valve Application and MaintenanceAn NMAC Study. Fifth Valve Technology
Symposium, Albuquerque, NM, June 1995.
F-11

APPENDIX G
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
ac
alternating current
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
ALARA
radiation levels as low as reasonably achievable
AMS
American Materials Society
ANII
Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector
ANS
American Nuclear Society
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
ANSI B31.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers and American National

Standards Institute Power Piping Code
API
American Petroleum Institute
ASA
American Standards Association
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASME III
Section III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS
American Welding Society
AWWA
American Water Works Association
B&PV
Boiler and Pressure Vessel
BWR
boiling water reactor
CBW
controlled band width
CFR
U.S. Code of Federal Regulations
CM
corrective maintenance
G-1

CoCr
cobalt-chrome
Colmonoy
trade name for nickel-based hardfacing alloys
CrMo
chrome-moly steel
CS
carbon steel
Cv
valve flow coeffecient
DA
damage assessment
dc
direct current
dcrp
direct current, reverse polarity
dcsp
direct current, straight polarity
EPRI
EQ
environmental qualification
degrees Fahrenheit
FCAW
flux-cored arc welding
FCI
Fluid Controls Institute
FMECA
failure modes and effects criticality analysis
FN
ferrite number
F&T
float and thermostatic
GDC
general design criteria
GL
USNRC Generic Letter
GMAW
gas metal arc welding
GMAW-P
pulsed gas metal arc welding
GTAW
gas tungsten arc welding
GTAW-P-AU machine-pulsed gas tungsten arc welding

HAZ
heat-affected zone
HBW
heated band width
HIP
hot isostatic process
G-2

ID
inside diameter
IE
USNRC Inspection and Enforcement Branch
IEB
USNRC IE Bulletin
IEN
USNRC IE Information Notice
ILRT
integrated leak rate test
INPO
Institute of Nuclear Power Operations
ipm
inches per minute
ISA
Instrument Society of America
ISI
inservice inspection
IST
inservice testing
ksi
kips per square inch
LER
licensee event report
LLRT
local leak rate tests
LP
liquid penetrant testing
MeV
megaelectronvolt
MIC
microbiologically induced corrosion
MIG
manual inert gas
Mo
molybdenum
MOV
motor-operated valve
MP
magnetic particle testing
MR
moisture resistant
MSIV
main steam isolation valve
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry
MT
magnetic particle testing
NBBI
National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors
NBIC
National Board Inspection Code

G-3

NDE
Nondestructive Examination
NEI
Nuclear Energy Institute
NER
Nuclear Experience Review
Ni
nickel
NIC
Nuclear Industry Check Valve Group
NMAC
Nuclear Maintenance Applications Center
NOREM
EPRI-developed cobalt-free hardfacing alloy
NPAR
Nuclear Plant Aging Research Program
NPRDS
Nuclear Plant Reliability Data System
NPS
nominal pipe size
NRC
United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission
NUMARC
Nuclear Management and Resources Council (now known as NEI)
O&MR
INPO Operation and Maintenance Reminder
OD
outside diameter
OE
INPO Operating Experience Report
OEM
original equipment manufacturer
O&M
Operation and Maintenance
OS&Y
outside screw and yoke
PAW
plasma arc welding
pH
acid/base level
PH
precipitation hardened
PM
preventive maintenance
P-No.
ASME base material designation system. Number based on like chemistry and weldability.
PQR
procedure qualification record
psi
pounds per square inch (pressure)
G-4

PT
liquid penetrant testing
PTAW
plasma-transferred arc welding
PWHT
post-weld heat treatment
PWR
pressurized water reactor
RBI
risk-based inspection
RC
Rockwell C-scale
RCM
reliability-centered maintenance
RCPB
reactor coolant pressure boundary
RG
USNRC Regulatory Guide
rms
root mean square
RO
repair option
rp
reverse polarity
RRAC
Repair & Replacement Applications Center
RRAP
Repair & Replacement Applications Program
RT
radiographic testing
SAW
submerged arc welding
SC
safety class
S/G
standards and guides
Si
silicon
SMAW
shielded metal arc welding
SOER
Significant Operating Experience Report
sp
straight polarity
SP
standard practices
SRP
USNRC Standard Review Plan
SS
stainless steel
SSCs
structures, systems, and components

G-5

Stellite
trade name for cobalt-based hardfacing alloys
TDC
tilting disc check valves
TI
USNRC Temporary Instruction
TIG
tungsten inert gas welding
UFSAR
Updated Final Safety Analysis Report
UL
Underwriters Laboratory, Incorporated
USAS
United States of American Standards Institute
USNRC
United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission
UT
ultrasonic testing
WPS
welding procedure specification
G-6
WARNING: This Document contains

information classified under U.S. Export
Control regulations as restricted from
export outside the United States. You
are under an obligation to ensure that you have a
legal right to obtain access to this information
and to ensure that you obtain an export license
prior to any re-export of this information. Special
restrictions apply to access by anyone that is not
a United States citizen or a Permanent United
States resident. For further information regarding your obligations, please see the information
contained below in the section titled Export
Control Restrictions.
Export Control Restrictions

Access to and use of EPRI Intellectual Property is granted
with the specific understanding and requirement that
responsibility for ensuring full compliance with all applicable
U.S. and foreign export laws and regulations is being undertaken by you and your company. This includes an obligation
to ensure that any individual receiving access hereunder who
is not a U.S. citizen or permanent U.S. resident is permitted
access under applicable U.S. and foreign export laws and
regulations. In the event you are uncertain whether you or
your company may lawfully obtain access to this EPRI
Intellectual Property, you acknowledge that it is your
obligation to consult with your companys legal counsel to
determine whether this access is lawful. Although EPRI may
make available on a case by case basis an informal assessment
of the applicable U.S. export classification for specific EPRI
Intellectual Property, you and your company acknowledge
that this assessment is solely for informational purposes and
not for reliance purposes. You and your company
acknowledge that it is still the obligation of you and your
company to make your own assessment of the applicable
U.S. export classification and ensure compliance accordingly.
You and your company understand and acknowledge your
obligations to make a prompt report to EPRI and the
appropriate authorities regarding any access to or use of
EPRI Intellectual Property hereunder that may be in violation
of applicable U.S. or foreign export laws or regulations.
SINGLE USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

THIS IS A LEGALLY BINDING AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND THE ELECTRIC POWER
RESEARCH INSTITUTE, INC. (EPRI). PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY BEFORE REMOVING THE
WRAPPING MATERIAL.
BY OPENING THIS SEALED PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO
NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE UNOPENED PACKAGE TO EPRI
AND THE PURCHASE PRICE WILL BE REFUNDED.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE
EPRI grants you the nonexclusive and nontransferable right during the term of this agreement to use this package
only for your own benefit and the benefit of your organization.This means that the following may use this package:
(I) your company (at any site owned or operated by your company); (II) its subsidiaries or other related entities; and
(III) a consultant to your company or related entities, if the consultant has entered into a contract agreeing not to
disclose the package outside of its organization or to use the package for its own benefit or the benefit of any party
other than your company.
This shrink-wrap license agreement is subordinate to the terms of the Master Utility License Agreement between
most U.S. EPRI member utilities and EPRI. Any EPRI member utility that does not have a Master Utility License
Agreement may get one on request.
2. COPYRIGHT
This package, including the information contained in it, is either licensed to EPRI or owned by EPRI and is protected by
United States and international copyright laws.You may not, without the prior written permission of EPRI, reproduce,
translate or modify this package, in any form, in whole or in part, or prepare any derivative work based on this package.
3. RESTRICTIONS
You may not rent, lease, license, disclose or give this package to any person or organization, or use the information
contained in this package, for the benefit of any third party or for any purpose other than as specified above unless
such use is with the prior written permission of EPRI.You agree to take all reasonable steps to prevent unauthorized
disclosure or use of this package. Except as specified above, this agreement does not grant you any right to patents,
copyrights, trade secrets, trade names, trademarks or any other intellectual property, rights or licenses in respect of
this package.
4.TERM AND TERMINATION
This license and this agreement are effective until terminated.You may terminate them at any time by destroying this
package. EPRI has the right to terminate the license and this agreement immediately if you fail to comply with any
term or condition of this agreement. Upon any termination you may destroy this package, but all obligations of
nondisclosure will remain in effect.
5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITIES
NEITHER EPRI,ANY MEMBER OF EPRI,ANY COSPONSOR, NOR ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION ACTING
ON BEHALF OF ANY OF THEM:
(A) MAKES ANY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION WHATSOEVER, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, (I) WITH
RESPECT TO THE USE OF ANY INFORMATION, APPARATUS, METHOD, PROCESS OR SIMILAR ITEM
DISCLOSED IN THIS PACKAGE, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OR (II) THAT SUCH USE DOES NOT INFRINGE ON OR INTERFERE WITH PRIVATELY
OWNED RIGHTS, INCLUDING ANY PARTYS INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY, OR (III) THAT THIS PACKAGE
IS SUITABLE TO ANY PARTICULAR USERS CIRCUMSTANCE; OR
(B) ASSUMES RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING
ANY CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF EPRI OR ANY EPRI REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES) RESULTING FROM YOUR SELECTION OR USE OF THIS
PACKAGE OR ANY INFORMATION,APPARATUS, METHOD, PROCESS OR SIMILAR ITEM DISCLOSED IN
THIS PACKAGE.
6. EXPORT
The laws and regulations of the United States restrict the export and re-export of any portion of this package, and
you agree not to export or re-export this package or any related technical data in any form without the appropriate United States and foreign government approvals.
7. CHOICE OF LAW
This agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California as applied to transactions taking place entirely in California between California residents.
About EPRI
EPRI creates science and technology solutions for
the global energy and energy services industry.
U.S. electric utilities established the Electric Power
Research Institute in 1973 as a nonprofit research
consortium for the benefit of utility members, their
customers, and society. Now known simply as EPRI,
the company provides a wide range of innovative
products and services to more than 1000 energyrelated organizations in 40 countries. EPRIs
multidisciplinary team of scientists and engineers
draws on a worldwide network of technical and
business expertise to help solve todays toughest
energy and environmental problems.
EPRI. Electrify the World
8. INTEGRATION
You have read and understand this agreement, and acknowledge that it is the final, complete and exclusive agreement
between you and EPRI concerning its subject matter, superseding any prior related understanding or agreement. No
waiver, variation or different terms of this agreement will be enforceable against EPRI unless EPRI gives its prior written consent, signed by an officer of EPRI.
Program:
TR-105852-V2
Nuclear Power
1996 Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), Inc. All rights reserved. Electric Power Research
Institute and EPRI are registered service marks of the Electric Power Research Institute, Inc.
EPRI. ELECTRIFY THE WORLD is a service mark of the Electric Power Research Institute, Inc.
Printed on recycled paper in the United States of America
EPRI 3412 Hillview Avenue, Palo Alto, California 94304 PO Box 10412, Palo Alto, California 94303 USA
800.313.3774 650.855.2121 askepri@epri.com www.epri.com

Valve Application, Maintenance and Repair Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Valve Application, Maintenance and Repair Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Valve Application, Maintenance and Repair Guide

(In Situ State-of-the-Art Valve Welding Repair)

Valve Application, Maintenance,

The Valve Application, Maintenance, and Repair Guide is a three

BACKGROUND Several EPRI-sponsored studies and surveys have concluded

Electric Power Research Institute

vendors, their in situ repair capabilities, and their experience. The

Valve Application,Maintenance,and Repair Guide

EPRI Project Managers

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITIES

EPRI Licensed Material

Welding Services, Incorporated

EPRI Licensed Material

Wall Colmonoy Incorporated

EPRI Licensed Material

PROJECT DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................. 1-1

Introduction and Application ............................................................................................. 1-1

Summary ............................................................................................................................. 1-3

CODES AND STANDARDS ............................................................................................................ 2-1

General ................................................................................................................................ 2-1

Pressure/Temperature Ratings ..........................................................................................

General Discussion of Pressure Boundary Materials ..................................................... 2-7

Required Minimum Wall and Corrosion Allowance ......................................................... 2-9

GENERAL VALVE DESIGN ............................................................................................................ 3-1

Nomenclature/Glossary of Terms ...................................................................................... 3-1

Common Valve Construction Features ...........................................................................

VALVE MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 4-1

Trim Components and Materials ....................................................................................... 4-1

Material Selection Practices ..............................................................................................

Hardfacing ........................................................................................................................... 4-9

Resilient (Soft) Seating .................................................................................................... 4-11

Pressure-Retaining Materials .......................................................................................... 4-14

EPRI Licensed Material

GATE VALVES ................................................................................................................................ 5-1

Introduction and Application ............................................................................................. 5-1

Design .................................................................................................................................. 5-1

Repair Issues ....................................................................................................................

GLOBE VALVES ............................................................................................................................. 6-1

Introduction and Application ............................................................................................. 6-1

Repair Issues ....................................................................................................................

CHECK VALVES ............................................................................................................................. 7-1

Introduction and Application ............................................................................................. 7-1

Repair Issues ....................................................................................................................

EPRI Licensed Material

VALVE COMPONENT REPAIRS .................................................................................................... 8-1

Valve Body Repair ..............................................................................................................

Pressure Seal Area Repair ................................................................................................. 8-8

Seat Ring Repair ...............................................................................................................

Seat Ring Replacement ....................................................................................................

Integral Seat Repair ..........................................................................................................

EPRI Licensed Material

Integral Seat Replacement ...............................................................................................

Bonnet Backseat Repair and Replacement ....................................................................

Guide Repair and Replacement.......................................................................................

Guide Rib Repair ...............................................................................................................

Hinge Pin Repair ............................................................................................................... 8-88

EPRI Licensed Material

Wedge/Disc Repair (Gate, Swing Check, and TDC) .....................................................

Poppet Hardfacing Repair ..............................................................................................

Valve Stem Repair ........................................................................................................... 8-120

DEFECT REMOVAL ........................................................................................................................ 9-1

Grinding ............................................................................................................................... 9-5

Machining ............................................................................................................................ 9-6

Lapping ................................................................................................................................ 9-8